WO2022145317A1 - Article conveyor - Google Patents

Article conveyor Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022145317A1
WO2022145317A1 PCT/JP2021/047641 JP2021047641W WO2022145317A1 WO 2022145317 A1 WO2022145317 A1 WO 2022145317A1 JP 2021047641 W JP2021047641 W JP 2021047641W WO 2022145317 A1 WO2022145317 A1 WO 2022145317A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
magazine
docking
pallet
unit
article
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2021/047641
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
泰行 石谷
Original Assignee
パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 filed Critical パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社
Priority to JP2022573028A priority Critical patent/JPWO2022145317A1/ja
Priority to CN202180087863.5A priority patent/CN116602067A/en
Publication of WO2022145317A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022145317A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05KPRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K13/00Apparatus or processes specially adapted for manufacturing or adjusting assemblages of electric components
    • H05K13/02Feeding of components

Definitions

  • This disclosure relates to an article transport device.
  • Patent Document 1 A parts transfer device capable of appropriately managing parts has been proposed (see Patent Document 1).
  • This parts transfer device is connected to a cart having a mounting portion on which a tray for supporting parts is mounted and wheels that can contact the traveling surface, and is movably connected to the cart via a connecting mechanism, and travels on the traveling surface. It is equipped with an automatic guided vehicle.
  • the cart enters the aisle space provided in the elevator device having the elevating member capable of supporting the tray, and conveys the tray to and from the elevating member.
  • the present disclosure is devised in view of the above-mentioned conventional situation, and an object of the present disclosure is to provide an article transporting device capable of automatically replenishing and collecting a component storage body with a manufacturing facility by using a simple mechanism.
  • the present disclosure is an article transport device for transporting articles used in at least one manufacturing facility installed on a factory floor on the factory floor, the article storage body for accommodating at least one article, and traveling on the factory floor. It has at least one holding table that can move up and down with respect to the base portion and holds the article storage body, and the article storage body is taken in and out from the lateral direction of the holding table.
  • an article transport device including a storage rack having a possible opening and a rack elevating device for raising and lowering the storage rack.
  • the parts storage body can be automatically replenished and collected from the manufacturing equipment by using a simple mechanism.
  • FIG. Conceptual diagram showing the cross-sectional structure of the component mounting system shown in FIG. Perspective view of the pallet on which the tray is placed
  • FIG. Perspective view of the pallet on which the tray is placed An exploded perspective view of the pallet shown in FIG. Perspective view of the magazine containing the pallets Perspective view of the magazine from diagonally below Perspective view of the tray component stocking apparatus shown in FIG.
  • Block diagram of tray parts stock equipment Operation explanatory diagram of the pallet transport section immediately before pulling out the pallet from the pallet stock section Operation explanatory diagram of the pallet transport unit that has finished pulling out the pallet from the pallet stock unit.
  • FIG. 32 is a sectional view taken along the line CC.
  • Block diagram showing the control system of the article transfer device Flow chart showing the procedure until the power supply for power is turned on after docking
  • Explanatory drawing showing the positional relationship between the article transporting device and the tray parts stocking device after docking.
  • Explanatory drawing of positioning height of magazine storage rack Explanatory diagram of magazine delivery operation Flowchart showing positioning height setting process
  • Explanatory diagram of the detection principle of the reference height sign Flow chart of magazine delivery operation showing the procedure of carrying in to the first magazine holding table Explanatory drawing of the unloading operation from the tray parts stocking device by the processing of the first loading section Explanatory drawing of the loading operation to the first magazine holding table by the processing of the first loading section Explanatory drawing of the loading operation to the first magazine holding table by the processing of the first loading section
  • Flow chart of magazine delivery operation showing the procedure of carrying in to the second magazine holding table
  • Flow chart of magazine delivery operation showing the procedure of carrying out from the second magazine holding table Explanatory drawing of the operation of carrying out from the second magazine holding table by the processing of the second
  • FIG. 1 is a plan view of a factory floor on which the component mounting system 11 according to the first embodiment is installed.
  • the X-axis indicates the left-right direction of the component mounting device 13
  • the Y-axis indicates the front-rear direction of the component mounting device 13
  • the Z-axis indicates the vertical direction of the component mounting device 13.
  • the X-axis and Y-axis are orthogonal to each other and are included in the horizontal plane.
  • the Z axis is included in the vertical plane orthogonal to the horizontal plane.
  • each of the plurality of component mounting devices 13 is provided side by side so as to be close to each other along the passage 15 having the passage width W1.
  • Each component mounting device 13 is provided with a plurality of parallel substrate transport conveyors 19 having the X-axis direction as the transport direction of the substrate 17 across each of the plurality of component mounting devices 13.
  • a stick feeder 21, a tray component supply device 23, a tape component supply device 25, and the like are integrally connected to the component mounting device 13.
  • the plurality of component mounting devices 13 installed side by side constitute a mounting line 27 on the factory floor.
  • a plurality of mounting lines 27 are installed in parallel with the passage 15 in the direction along the X axis passing in front of and behind the component mounting device 13 interposed therebetween.
  • the component mounting device 13 in which the tray component stock device 29 is integrally connected to the tray component supply device 23 constitutes the component mounting system 11.
  • FIG. 2 is an overall configuration diagram of the component mounting system 11 shown in FIG.
  • the component 33 (see FIG. 4) housed in the tray 31 (see FIG. 4) is taken out by the mounting head 35 (see FIG. 3), which is a component mounting portion, and is mounted on the substrate 17. It includes a component mounting device 13 to be mounted, a tray component supply device 23 that supplies the tray 31 to a position that can be taken out by the mounting head 35, and a tray component stock device 29 that replenishes the tray 31 to the tray component supply device 23.
  • the component mounting device 13 has a component mounting device main body 37.
  • the tray component supply device 23 and the tape component supply device 25 are connected to the surface of the component mounting device main body 37 on the passage side.
  • the tray component stock device 29 is integrally connected to the component mounting device main body 37 via the tray component supply device 23.
  • a tray as an example of a component stock device The component stock device 29 has a pallet 39 (see FIG. 4) on which a tray 31 containing a component 33 (see FIG. 4) is placed along a first axis (for example, an X axis).
  • a magazine 41 that can be inserted and removed is provided.
  • the tray component stock device 29 has a pallet stock section 43 that serves as a stocker.
  • the pallet stock portion 43 allows the magazine 41 to be taken in and out along a second axis (for example, the Y axis) that intersects the X axis in a plane along the horizontal plane.
  • the tray component stock device 29 has a pallet transport unit 45.
  • the pallet transport section 45 transports the pallet 39 along the X-axis from the magazine 41 stored in the pallet stock section 43.
  • the pallet 39 conveyed from the pallet stock unit 43 by the pallet transfer unit 45 is supplied to the tray parts supply device 23. Further, the pallet transport unit 45 collects the consumed pallet 39 of the component 33 from the tray component supply device 23 (that is, all the components 33 on the pallet 39 are used for mounting on the substrate 17) for collecting the pallet stock.
  • the pallet 39 is conveyed to the unit 43.
  • FIG. 3 is a conceptual diagram showing a cross-sectional structure of the component mounting system 11 shown in FIG.
  • the component mounting device main body 37 is provided with a substrate transfer section 49 having a substrate transfer conveyor 19 for transporting the substrate 17 in a direction along the X axis (board transfer direction) on the upper surface of the base 47.
  • the board transporting unit 49 transports the board 17 to which the component is mounted, positions it at the working position of the component mounting device main body 37, and holds it.
  • a tray component supply device 23 is arranged on the passage side of the base 47.
  • the tray parts supply device 23 has a replacement pallet storage unit 51.
  • the replacement pallet storage unit 51 arranges and holds a plurality of magazines 41 in the vertical direction (direction along the Z axis).
  • a pallet changer 53 is provided between the replacement pallet storage unit 51 and the base 47.
  • the pallet changer 53 raises and lowers the changer elevating table 55 by the pallet changer elevating portion 57 (see FIG. 11).
  • the tray component supply device 23 moves the pallet 39 between the replacement pallet storage section 51 and the component take-out position by operating the pallet changer 53.
  • the tray component supply device 23 attaches the component 33 to the mounting head 35 by moving the pallet 39 on which the tray 31 in which the component 33 (see FIG. 4) is stored in a grid pattern is placed to the component take-out position. Supply.
  • the mounting head 35 is a multi-unit type head provided with a plurality of unit transfer heads, and a suction nozzle is interchangeably mounted on the lower end of each unit transfer head.
  • the mounting head 35 is movably mounted in the XY direction by an XY table 59 in a direction along the Y axis including a linear drive mechanism or the like.
  • the mounting head 35 is movable between the component take-out position and the component mounting position on the board transfer unit 49 by the XY table 59.
  • the tray parts stock device 29 has a pallet stock unit 43 and a pallet transport unit 45.
  • a plurality of magazines 41 are stored in the pallet stock portion 43 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction (direction along the Z axis). Any pallet 39 can be inserted and removed from each magazine 41 stored in the vertical direction (direction along the Z axis) in the direction along the X axis by the pallet transport unit 45.
  • the pallet 39 pulled out from the pallet stock unit 43 by the pallet transport unit 45 is moved to the tray component supply device 23 by the pallet transport unit 45. Further, the pallet transport unit 45 allows the pallet 39 to move in the opposite direction.
  • FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the pallet 39 on which the tray 31 is placed.
  • FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the pallet 39 shown in FIG.
  • the pallet body 61 is formed in a rectangular plate shape in a plan view.
  • one of the pair of parallel long side portions is the first long side portion 63, and the other is the second long side portion 65.
  • the first long side portion 63 is the front portion of the pallet
  • the second long side portion 65 is the rear portion of the pallet.
  • the pallet 39 is transported with either the first long side portion 63 or the second long side portion 65 being the tip end side in the transport direction.
  • the pallet 39 is made of a magnetic material at least in a portion including the upper surface.
  • a tray 31 made of a non-magnetic material such as resin is placed on the upper surface of the pallet 39.
  • a plurality of parts 33 are arranged in an aligned state on the tray 31.
  • the tray 31 is held in a state of being positioned at a predetermined position on the pallet 39 by the positioning device 67.
  • the pallet 39 on which the tray 31 is placed constitutes the component storage body 69.
  • the parts storage body 69 may be one in which parts are placed and stored on the pallet 39. Further, the outer shape of the tray 31 may be the same as that of the pallet 39, and the tray 31 itself may be used as the component storage body 69.
  • Two tray positioning pieces 71 parallel to each of the first long side portion 63 and one short side portion adjacent to the first long side portion 63 are orthogonally fixed to the upper surface of the pallet 39.
  • the two tray positioning pieces 71 have an inside corner because they are arranged in the orthogonal direction.
  • the tray 31 is positioned relative to the pallet 39 by pressing the two sides against the tray positioning piece 71 so that one corner is aligned with the inside corner of the pallet 39.
  • the tray 31 on the pallet positioned in this way is fixed to the pallet 39 by pressing the positioning device 67 against the surface opposite to the surface pressed against the tray positioning piece 71.
  • the positioning device 67 has, for example, a magnet.
  • the positioning device 67 is in a state of being strongly fixed to the upper surface of the pallet 39 made of a magnetic material by a magnetic force.
  • the tray 31 is restricted from moving on the pallet 39 and fixed.
  • the positioning device 67 has two lever portions 73 on both ends (see FIG. 5), and each lever portion 73 is located above the upper surface of the pallet 39. By pressing these lever portions 73 toward the upper surface of the pallet 39, the positioning device 67 can be easily removed from the pallet 39 by the principle of the lever.
  • the first engaging portion 75 is provided on the first long side portion 63
  • the second engaging portion 77 is provided on the second long side portion 65.
  • the first engaging portion 75 and the second engaging portion 77 are arranged so that the opening sides of the engaging claws formed in a U-shape in a plan view face each other.
  • the distance between the engaging claws of the first engaging portion 75 is larger than that of the second engaging portion 77.
  • the first engaging portion 75 engages with the changer engaging rod 79 (see FIG. 10) of the pallet changer 53
  • the second engaging portion 77 pulls the pallet transporting portion 45 as shown in FIG. It engages with the handler engagement rod 81, which is a portion.
  • FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the magazine 41 containing the pallet 39.
  • FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the magazine 41 as viewed from diagonally below.
  • the magazine 41 will be explained.
  • the upper ends of the pair of parallel side plates 83 are connected to each other by the top plate 85, and the lower ends of the pair of parallel side plates 83 are connected to each other by the bottom plate 87 (see FIG. 7), so that the inner storage space is on both sides. It is formed into an open square tube shape as an insertion / removal opening 89.
  • the magazine 41 is stored in the pallet stock portion 43 so that both ends in the direction along the X axis are on the open side.
  • the pair of side plates 83 are housed in the pallet stock portion 43 in a direction separated from each other along the Y axis.
  • each side plate 83 On the inner surface of each side plate 83, ribs 91 having both ends extending over the insertion / removal opening 89 are provided.
  • the gap between the ribs 91 adjacent to each other in the vertical direction (direction along the Z axis) inserts each of the pair of parallel short sides of the pallet 39.
  • the magazine 41 stores a plurality of pallets 39 in a multi-stage shape in the vertical direction (direction along the Z axis) in the inner storage space (see above), and enables insertion and removal from the insertion / removal opening 89. ..
  • a pair of X alignment rollers 93 are provided on the lower side on the outside of each side plate 83.
  • Each of the pair of X alignment rollers 93 is rotatable around a center of rotation perpendicular to the side plate 83.
  • a Y alignment portion 95 is provided inside the pair of side plates 83, inside the pair of side plates 83, a Y alignment portion 95 is provided on the lower side close to the insertion / removal openings 89 at both ends.
  • a tapered surface 97 is formed on the Y alignment portion 95, and the tapered surface 97 is formed by a slope formed with a thin side plate 83 toward the lower side.
  • each Y alignment roller 99 is rotatably supported around a rotation center perpendicular to the mounting piece 101 with respect to the mounting piece 101 hanging from the lower surface of the bottom plate 87 in a direction perpendicular to the side plate 83.
  • the X alignment roller 93 and the Y alignment roller 99 described above form a first alignment group 103.
  • the lower side portions of the pair of parallel openings in the insertion / removal openings 89 at both ends of the bottom plate 87 form the X alignment portion 105.
  • the Y alignment unit 95 having the tapered surface 97 and the X alignment unit 105 as described above form a second alignment group 107.
  • FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the tray component stock device 29 shown in FIG.
  • the pallet stock portion 43 has a housing (for example, a cover 109) that forms an internal space that allows the magazine 41 to be stored.
  • the cover 109 is provided with an opening (for example, a magazine replacement window 111) through which the magazine 41 can be taken in and out along the second axis (Y axis).
  • the lower part of the magazine replacement window 111 of the pallet stock portion 43 is the stock base portion 113.
  • a docking base 115 is provided on the stock base portion 113.
  • the docking base 115 is, for example, a connection portion when a self-propelled magazine transfer device (not shown) is used.
  • the docking base 115 is electrically connected to the tray component stock device control unit 119 (see FIG.
  • an operation unit 121 such as a touch panel electrically connected to the tray component stock device control unit 119 (see FIG. 11) is provided.
  • the operation unit 121 may be omitted as a configuration of the tray component stock device 29.
  • the slide table device 123 is arranged in the internal space of the cover 109.
  • the slide table device 123 mounts the magazine 41 and passes through the magazine replacement window 111 along the second axis (Y axis) so that the magazine can be placed between the internal space of the cover 109 and the outside of the cover 109. 41 can be moved (that is, put in and out).
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic configuration diagram of the inside of the tray parts stock device 29 as viewed from the aisle side.
  • the tray component stock device 29 has a plurality of (for example, four stages) fixed shelves 125 separated in the vertical direction (direction along the Z direction).
  • the slide table device 123 is fixed to the fixed shelf 125 on the second stage from the bottom. That is, in the pallet stock unit 43, among the magazines 41 stored in the upper and lower four stages, the magazine 41 in the second stage from the bottom is placed on the slide table device 123.
  • the slide table device 123 may be installed in any stage in the vertical direction.
  • the slide table device 123 is installed only in the second stage from the bottom will be described, but the slide table device 123 may be installed in a plurality of stages.
  • the slide table device 123 can manually drive the slide table 127 (see FIG. 17) on which the magazine 41 is placed. Further, the slide table device 123 may be configured to automatically project the slide table 127 on which the magazine 41 is placed to the outside of the cover 109 by providing the advance / retreat drive unit 129.
  • the advancing / retreating drive unit 129 includes, for example, an air cylinder 131 (see FIG. 18) which is an advancing / retreating drive source, a valve for supplying operating air to the air cylinder 131, and the like.
  • the pallet transport unit 45 provided in the tray parts stock device 29 includes a pallet handler 133 that moves the pallet 39 between the pallet stock unit 43 and the tray parts supply device 23.
  • the pallet transport unit 45 includes a pallet handler elevating unit 135 that moves up and down in the vertical direction (direction along the Z direction).
  • the pallet handler elevating portion 135 is erected on the stock base portion 113 and has a height substantially equal to that of the pallet stock portion 43.
  • the pallet handler elevating part 135 is provided with an upright stocker feed screw (not shown). This stocker feed screw is rotated by a handler elevating motor (not shown).
  • An elevating base nut portion (not shown) is screwed into the stocker feed screw.
  • the elevating base 137 is fixed to the elevating base nut part.
  • a drawer device 141 is rotatably supported on the upper surface of the elevating base 137 via a handler shaft 139 along the Z axis.
  • a handler motor 145 whose output axis is along the Z axis is fixed to the upright base portion 143 of the elevating base 137.
  • a belt 147 is stretched between the output shaft of the handler motor 145 and the handler shaft 139.
  • the handler motor 145, the belt 147, and the handler shaft 139 constitute a swivel mechanism 149 (see FIG. 10).
  • the pull-out device 141 has a handler engaging rod 81 and a pair of parallel pallet guides 151.
  • the pallet handler 133 moves up and down along the pallet stock unit 43 by driving a handler elevating motor (not shown), for example, by a pallet transfer control unit 153 (see FIG. 11). At this time, the pallet handler 133 can arrange the drawer device 141 at the height position of the pallet 39 corresponding to this storage address by designating the storage address attached to the pallet storage unit of the pallet stock unit 43. At the lower part of the pallet transport unit 45, a tray component stock device control unit 119 for performing these controls is provided.
  • FIG. 10 is a plan view showing the layout of the tray parts stock device 29 and the tray parts supply device 23.
  • the pallet stock portion 43 and the pallet transport portion 45 are arranged along the passage 15 (see FIG. 1). That is, the tray component stock device 29 is installed with the long side side facing along the passage 15.
  • the pallet transport unit 45 of the tray component stock device 29 is connected to the component mounting device 13 in the direction along the Y axis via the tray component supply device 23.
  • the pallet stock portion 43 and the pallet transport portion 45 on the long side are arranged side by side in the direction along the X axis, and the pallet stock portion 43 and the pallet transport portion 45 intersect the X axis. It is installed in an L-shaped space in a plan view connected to the tray component supply device 23 in the direction.
  • the component mounting device 13 for taking out the component 33 stored in the tray 31 by the component mounting unit (for example, the mounting head 35) and mounting the component 33 on the board 17, and the tray 31 are components. It includes a tray component supply device 23 that supplies the tray component to a position that can be taken out by a mounting unit (for example, a mounting head 35), and a tray component stock device 29 that replenishes the tray component supply device 23 with the tray 31.
  • the tray parts stock device 29 is a pallet that can store a magazine 41 that allows the pallet 39 on which the tray 31 that stores the parts 33 is placed to be inserted and removed along the first axis (for example, the X axis) in the internal space of the cover 109.
  • the parts storage body transport unit for example, the pallet transport unit 45 for transporting the pallet 39 between the stock unit 43, the pallet stock unit 43, and the parts supply device (for example, the tray parts supply device 23), and the magazine 41 are placed.
  • a second axis eg, the Y axis
  • It is configured with a slide table device 123 having a possible slide table 127.
  • the slide table device 123 may further include an advancing / retreating drive unit 129 that projects the slide table 127 to the outside of the cover 109.
  • FIG. 11 is a block diagram of the tray parts stock device 29.
  • the tray parts stock device 29 includes a pallet transport unit 45, a slide table device 123, an operation unit 121, one connector 117, and a tray parts stock device control unit 119.
  • An external power supply unit 155 is connected to the tray component stock device 29 to one of the connectors 117 by a power supply cable 157.
  • An external power supply 159 is connected to the power supply unit 155 by a power supply cable 157.
  • the power supply unit 155 is also directly connected to the tray component stock device control unit 119 by the signal line 161.
  • the tray component stock device control unit 119 includes a pallet transfer control unit 153, a slide table control unit 163, and a storage unit 165.
  • the pallet transfer control unit 153 When the pallet transfer control unit 153 receives the request instruction of the component 33 from the component mounting device 13, the pallet transfer control unit 153 refers to the component stock information stored in the storage unit 165, and sets the pallet 39 of the tray 31 holding the component 33 as the pallet stock unit. Instructions for withdrawing from 43 are sent to the pallet carrier 45. The pallet transfer unit 45 pulls out the corresponding pallet 39 from the pallet stock unit 43 based on the instruction from the pallet transfer control unit 153, and the pulled out pallet 39 is used as a replacement pallet storage unit in the tray parts supply device 23. It is inserted into the magazine 41 of 51 to complete the supply of the pallet 39 to the tray component supply device 23.
  • the pallet transfer control unit 153 does not have the required parts 33 or the remaining amount is low (for example, when the remaining amount is less than the specified amount), the tray parts stock device 29.
  • the request instruction of the component 33 to the operation unit 121 is displayed on the operation unit 121 to notify that the component is out of order or the component is out of order in the near future.
  • the slide table control unit 163 gives an instruction to switch the port of the valve connected to the air cylinder 131 (see FIG. 18) to the withdrawal actuating side. Send to 123.
  • the slide table device 123 switches the valve described above based on the instruction from the slide table control unit 163. By this switching, the drive shaft of the air cylinder 131 (see FIG. 18) advances, and the slide table 127 passes through the magazine replacement window 111 and advances to the aisle side.
  • the slide table control unit 163 gives an instruction to switch the port of the valve connected to the air cylinder 131 (see FIG. 18) to the storage operation side. Send to device 123.
  • the slide table device 123 switches the valve described above based on the instruction from the slide table control unit 163. By this switching, the drive shaft of the air cylinder 131 (see FIG. 18) is retracted, and the slide table 127 is housed in the pallet stock portion 43.
  • the slide table control unit 163 may advance / retreat the slide table 127 by an advance / retreat command from the component mounting device 13 or the magazine transfer device (not shown).
  • the storage unit 165 is configured by using a data recording device such as a flash memory, an HDD (Hard Disk Drive), or an SSD (Solid State Drive), and stores stock information.
  • the storage unit 165 includes a quantity of parts 33 to be replenished to the parts mounting device 13, a storage address (for example, a combination of a magazine 41, a pallet 39, a tray 31 number, etc. on which each part 33 is placed) and parts. Parts stock information indicating whether or not the mounting device 13 is replenished is stored.
  • FIG. 12 is an operation explanatory view of the pallet transport unit 45 immediately before pulling out the pallet 39 from the pallet stock unit 43.
  • the pallet stock portion 43 accommodates the pallet 39 so that the second engaging portion 77 is arranged on the surface facing the pallet transport portion 45.
  • the pull-out device 141 of the pallet transport unit 45 moves in the vertical direction (direction along the Z axis), and the handler engaging rod 81 provided in the pull-out device 141 moves. , Is engaged with a second engaging portion 77 provided on the desired pallet 39.
  • FIG. 13 is an operation explanatory view of the pallet transport unit 45 in which the pallet 39 has been pulled out from the pallet stock unit 43.
  • the pallet 39 pulled out to the pull-out device 141 is supported by a pair of pallet guides 151 at short sides on both sides from below.
  • FIG. 14 is an operation explanatory view of the pallet transport unit 45 in which the drawer device 141 is rotated clockwise.
  • the drawer device 141 supporting the pallet 39 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise by the drive of the handler motor 145.
  • the first engaging portion 75 with which the handler engaging rod 81 is not engaged is arranged on the side of the replacement pallet accommodating portion 51.
  • the handler engaging rod 81 engaged with the second engaging portion 77 is arranged on the passage side in the direction along the Y axis.
  • FIG. 15 is an operation explanatory view of the pallet transport unit 45 in which the pallet 39 is inserted into the tray parts supply device 23.
  • the pull-out device 141 moves the handler engaging rod 81 in the Y direction.
  • the pallet 39 is inserted into the replacement pallet storage unit 51 in the tray component supply device 23 while sliding the pallet guide 151 by moving the handler engaging rod 81 in the Y direction.
  • the elevating base 137 is moved up and down to a desired height by the pallet handler elevating unit 135.
  • the drawer device 141 having the pallet 39 inserted into the tray component supply device 23 is moved up or down by the drive of the pallet handler elevating section 135 to disengage the engagement with the second engaging section 77, and then supplies the tray component. Evacuate in the direction away from the device 23.
  • the pallet transport unit 45 returns the handler engaging rod 81 to the retracted position, and completes the supply of the pallet 39 to the tray component supply device 23.
  • the empty pallet 39 is moved to the pallet stock section 43 by the reverse operation procedure as described above. Will be done.
  • FIG. 16 is a plan view of the slide table device 123 in which the slide table 127 is housed.
  • the tray component stock device 29 has a pallet stock section 43 and a slide table device 123.
  • the pallet stock unit 43 allows the magazine 41, which allows the pallet 39 on which the tray 31 containing the parts 33 to be placed, to be inserted and removed along the first axis (for example, the X axis), to be stored in the internal space of the cover 109. ..
  • the slide table device 123 has a slide table 127.
  • the slide table 127 rests the magazine 41 and places the magazine 41 between the inside and outside of the cover 109 along a second axis (eg, the Y axis) that intersects the first axis in a plane along the horizontal plane. Move it. That is, the slide table 127 can protrude from the inside to the outside of the cover 109.
  • a second axis eg, the Y axis
  • the slide table device 123 supports a slide table 127 and has a slide rail 167 that expands and contracts along a second axis (for example, the Y axis).
  • the slide table 127 moves outside and inside the cover 109 as the slide rail 167 expands and contracts.
  • the slide rail 167 has a fixed rail 169 (see FIG. 18), a connecting rail 171 (see FIG. 18), and a movable rail 173 (see FIG. 18).
  • the fixed rail 169 is fixed to the fixed shelf 125 of the pallet stock portion 43 by the L metal fitting 175.
  • the connecting rail 171 is connected in parallel with the fixed rail 169 and is slidable in the extending direction of the fixed rail 169. About half of the total length of the connecting rail 171 can advance from the fixed rail 169 in the Y direction. Almost half of the connecting rail 171 that has advanced from the fixed rail 169 is restricted from further advance by the stopper mechanism (not shown).
  • the movable rail 173 is connected in parallel with the connecting rail 171 and is slidable in the extending direction of the connecting rail 171. About half of the total length of the movable rail 173 can advance in the Y direction from the connecting rail 171.
  • the movable rail 173, which is almost half advanced from the connecting rail 171, is restricted from further advancement by the stopper mechanism (not shown).
  • the slide rail 167 is supported by the connecting rail 171 which is advanced from the fixed rail 169 and the movable rail 173 by almost half the total length, and is supported by the connecting rail 171 which is approximately half the total length of the movable rail 173. Will be done.
  • the movable rail 173 can be extended from the fixed rail 169 with a length corresponding to almost the entire length (see FIG. 18).
  • the slide rail 167 can have almost the same extension length as the storage space.
  • the slide table device 123 may have one slide rail 167 or a plurality of slide rails 167.
  • the slide table device 123 extends along the second axis (for example, the Y axis) and is arranged in parallel at intervals in the direction along the first axis (for example, the X axis). It has two slide rails 167.
  • the two parallel slide rails 167 face each other with their movable rails 173 inside.
  • a slide base 177 (see FIG. 17) having an L-shaped cross section is fixed over the longitudinal direction of the movable rail 173.
  • the pair of parallel slide bases 177 are connected to each other by a plurality of connecting plates 179.
  • the slide base 177 and the connecting plate 179 constitute the slide table 127.
  • the slide table 127 has a size in which at least one magazine 41 is placed.
  • FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the slide table 127.
  • the slide base 177 has a first regulating unit that regulates the position of the magazine 41 in the direction of the first axis (for example, the X axis) with respect to the slide table 127, and a second axis (for example, the Y axis) for the magazine 41 with respect to the slide table 127.
  • a second regulatory unit that regulates the position in the direction is provided.
  • Each slide base 177 has an L-shaped cross section in which the horizontal piece is on the inside and the standing piece is on the outside.
  • the first regulatory unit is the X alignment guide 181.
  • a total of four X-alignment guides 181 are fixed so as to be separated from each other in the extending direction of each slide base 177.
  • the X alignment guide 181 is an upright plate perpendicular to the side plate 83 (see FIG. 6) of the magazine 41, and a pair of slide bases 177 provided at opposite positions of the two slide bases 177 are arranged so as to move upward. It has inclined surfaces 183 that are separated from each other. That is, the pair of X alignment guides 181 are inclined upward in a Y shape when viewed from the direction along the Y axis (see FIG. 19).
  • the above-mentioned X alignment roller 93 (see FIG. 6) provided on the side plate 83 of the magazine 41 is fitted between the pair of X alignment guides 181 by being guided while sliding on the inclined surface 183.
  • the second regulatory section is the Y alignment guide 187 (see FIG. 25).
  • a total of four Y alignment guides 187 are fixed inside the four X alignment guides 181 so as to be spaced apart from each other in the extending direction of the slide base 177.
  • the Y alignment guide 187 is an upright plate perpendicular to the side plate 83 of the magazine 41, and a pair of slide bases 177 provided at opposite positions is one corner of a quadrangle on the X alignment guide 181 side. Is formed into a chamfered trapezoidal shape. That is, the pair of Y alignment guides 187 are inclined toward an A shape when viewed from the direction along the X axis (see FIG. 25).
  • the pair of Y alignment guides 187 are positioned with respect to the slide table 127 by guiding the above-mentioned Y alignment roller 99 provided on the lower surface of the bottom plate 87 of the magazine 41 to the inclined surface 185 on both outer sides.
  • FIG. 18 is a plan view of the slide table device 123 to which the slide table 127 has advanced.
  • the tray component stock device 29 may be provided with an advance / retreat drive unit 129 in the slide table device 123.
  • the advance / retreat drive unit 129 automatically allows the slide table 127 to advance / retreat between the outside of the cover 109 and the internal space.
  • the advance / retreat drive unit 129 is arranged between the two slide rails 167 (see FIG. 18).
  • the advance / retreat drive unit 129 has a first rack gear 189, a second rack gear 191, a pinion gear 193, and an advance / retreat drive source.
  • the first rack gear 189 is fixed inside the cover 109 with the longitudinal direction oriented parallel to the second axis (for example, the Y axis). More specifically, the first rack gear 189 is fixed to the fixed shelf 125.
  • the second rack gear 191 is mounted on the slide table 127 and is arranged parallel to the first rack gear 189.
  • the pinion gear 193 meshes with the first rack gear 189 and the second rack gear 191.
  • the advancing / retreating drive source moves the pinion gear 193 along a second axis (eg, the Y axis).
  • the advancing / retreating drive source is, for example, an air cylinder 131 that advances / retreats the advancing / retreating drive shaft from the cylinder.
  • a valve or the like for supplying operating air is connected to the air cylinder 131. By switching a plurality of ports, the valve can be driven in a direction in which the advancing / retreating drive shaft of the air cylinder 131 is advanced or retracted.
  • a slider 195 is fixed to the tip of the advancing / retreating drive shaft.
  • the slider 195 moves linearly guided by the slider rail 197 in the direction along the Y axis fixed to the fixed shelf 125.
  • the pinion gear 193 is rotatably supported on the slider 195 with the direction along the Z axis as the center of rotation.
  • FIG. 19 is a front view of the slide table device 123 as viewed from the aisle side.
  • the slide table device 123 When viewed from the direction along the Y axis, the slide table device 123 has a pair of parallel slide rails 167 extending outward along the Y axis fixedly arranged on the fixed shelf 125.
  • a slide base 177 is fixed to the inside of each of the pair of slide rails 167 (that is, on the movable rail side).
  • the pair of slide bases 177 constitutes a slide table 127 fixed by a connecting plate 179.
  • the air cylinder 131 which is an advancing / retreating drive source, is housed in a space surrounded by a pair of slide bases 177 and a connecting plate 179, and is fixed to a fixed shelf 125.
  • the pinion gear 193 which is moved forward and backward by the moving shaft of the air cylinder 131, is sandwiched between the first rack gear 189 fixed to the fixed shelf 125 and the second rack gear 191 fixed to the slide base 177. It is meshing with the rack gear of.
  • FIG. 20 is a conceptual diagram of an advancing / retreating mechanism using an air cylinder 131 as an advancing / retreating drive source.
  • the advancing / retreating drive unit 129 moves along the second axis (Y axis) while rotatably supporting the pinion gear 193 on the slider 195.
  • the pinion gear 193 is located on the back side (opposite side of the slide table advance side) of the first rack gear 189 and meshes with the pinion gear 193.
  • the tip side of the second rack gear 191 fixed to the slide base 177 in the advancing direction meshes with the pinion gear 193.
  • the second rack gear 191 meshing with the pinion gear 193 changes to the pinion gear 193.
  • FIG. 21 is a conceptual diagram of an advancing / retreating mechanism using a motor as an advancing / retreating drive source.
  • the advancing / retreating drive unit 129 may be configured by using the advancing / retreating drive motor 199 as the advancing / retreating drive source.
  • the fixed shelf 125 rotatably supports a pair of sprockets 201 whose rotation center is in the direction along the X axis and is separated in the direction along the Y axis.
  • An endless chain 203 is hung on the pair of sprockets 201.
  • the chain 203 rotatably supports the pinion gear 193 that meshes with both the first rack gear 189 and the second rack gear 191.
  • the pinion gear 193 By driving one sprocket 201 with the advance / retreat drive motor 199, the pinion gear 193 is moved along with the movement of the chain 203. As a result, the pinion gear 193 can be moved in the direction along the Y axis in a state of being meshed with both rack gears in the same manner as in the case of movement by the air cylinder 131. According to the advancing / retreating drive unit 129 using the advancing / retreating drive motor 199 as the advancing / retreating drive source, the slide table 127 can be advanced / retreated without using pneumatic equipment.
  • FIG. 22 is a conceptual diagram showing a variable stroke structure of the advancing / retreating mechanism.
  • the advance / retreat drive unit 129 may coaxially fix the large-diameter pinion gear 205 and the small-diameter pinion gear 207.
  • the small diameter pinion gear 207 (outer peripheral length A) is meshed with the first rack gear 189
  • the second rack gear 191 is meshed with the large diameter pinion gear 205 (outer peripheral length 2A) fixed coaxially.
  • the advance / retreat drive unit 129 can freely set the stroke expansion ratio by combining a plurality of pinion gears 193 having different diameters (outer peripheral lengths).
  • the advancing / retreating drive unit 129 can realize a highly versatile advancing / retreating mechanism capable of supporting slide table devices 123 having different drawer lengths.
  • FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the magazine 41 positioned and placed on the slide table 127.
  • each direction of the X-axis direction, the Y-axis direction, and the Z-axis direction is positioned.
  • FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram of the positioning operation mainly by the X alignment guide 181 on the slide table 127.
  • the magazine 41 is placed on the slide table 127 by being moved downward in the direction along the Z axis.
  • This mounting operation may be manual (that is, performed by the worker) or automatic.
  • the X alignment roller 93 of the magazine 41 comes into contact with the first regulating portion (for example, the X alignment guide 181).
  • the position of the magazine 41 in the first axial direction (for example, the X-axis direction) is positioned with respect to the slide table 127 by guiding the X alignment roller 93 to the X alignment guide 181.
  • FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram of the positioning operation mainly by the Y alignment guide 187 on the slide table 127.
  • the Y alignment roller 99 comes into contact with the second regulating portion (for example, the Y alignment guide 187) almost at the same time as the contact between the X alignment guide 181 and the X alignment roller 93.
  • the position in the second axial direction (for example, the Y-axis direction) is positioned with respect to the slide table 127 by guiding the Y alignment roller 99 to the inclined surface 185 of the Y alignment guide 187.
  • the magazine 41 When the magazine 41 is moved to the final lowering position and placed, the lower surface of the bottom plate 87 comes into contact with the Y alignment guide 187.
  • the position of the Z-axis of the magazine 41 is positioned with respect to the slide table 127 by abutting the lower surface of the bottom plate 87 on the four Y alignment guides 187.
  • the magazine 41 is positioned in the XYZ direction with respect to the slide table 127 at the same time when the magazine 41 is placed on the slide table 127.
  • the parts stock device allows the parts storage body 69 (for example, the pallet 39 on which the tray 31 is placed) containing the parts 33 to be inserted and removed along the first axis (for example, the X axis).
  • the magazine 41 is housed in a stocker (for example, a pallet stock portion 43) in which the magazine 41 can be taken in and out along a second axis (for example, the Y axis) that intersects the first axis in a plane along the horizontal plane.
  • a parts storage body transport unit for example, a pallet transport unit 45 for transporting a parts storage body 69 (for example, a pallet 39) from the magazine 41 along a first axis is provided.
  • the stocker has a housing (for example, a cover 109) that forms an internal space that allows the magazine 41 to be stored.
  • the housing has an opening (for example, a magazine replacement window 111) through which the magazine 41 can be taken in and out along the second axis.
  • the tray 31 in which the parts 33 are stored is placed on the pallet 39.
  • the pallet 39 can be inserted and removed along the first axis and is stored in the magazine 41.
  • a plurality of pallets 39 are stored in the magazine 41 in a multi-stage manner in the vertical direction.
  • the magazine 41 makes it possible to convey a plurality of stored pallets 39 at one time.
  • a plurality of magazines 41 are stored in a stocker (for example, a pallet stock unit 43).
  • a plurality of magazines 41 are stored in the pallet stock section 43 in a multi-stage manner in the vertical direction.
  • the pallet transport section 45 is integrally connected to the pallet stock section 43 along the first axis. The pallet transport section 45 transports the pallets 39 one by one from the magazine 41 stored in the pallet stock section 43 along the first axis while inserting and removing the pallets 39.
  • the pallet stock unit 43 and the pallet transport unit 45 are integrally connected.
  • the pallet stock unit 43 and the pallet transport unit 45 form a tray parts stock device 29.
  • At least the pallet stock portion 43 requires an installation space for one pallet.
  • the pallet transport unit 45 also requires an installation space for at least one pallet. Therefore, the tray component stock device 29 composed of the pallet stock unit 43 and the pallet transport unit 45 has a rectangular shape that requires at least two pallet installation spaces in a plan view.
  • the tray components stock device 29 In this tray parts stock device 29, the pallet stock unit 43 and the pallet transport unit 45 are lined up along the aisle 15. That is, the tray component stock device 29 is installed so that the long side of the rectangle is oriented along the passage 15 in a plan view.
  • the tray parts stock device 29 is provided with an opening (for example, a magazine replacement window 111) in the housing (for example, the cover 109) of the pallet stock portion 43.
  • the pallet stock portion 43 allows the magazine 41 to be taken in and out along the second axis (Y axis) through the magazine replacement window 111.
  • the second axis is a direction that intersects the first axis along the passage 15. That is, as described above, the tray component stock device 29 having the long side installed along the passage 15 is the passage of the pallet stock portion 43 among the pallet stock portion 43 and the pallet transport portion 45 arranged along the passage 15.
  • the magazine replacement window 111 is directed to the side surface facing the 15, and the magazine 41 can be taken in and out of the pallet stock portion 43 in the direction (front-back direction) along the second axis (Y-axis) from the passage 15.
  • the tray parts stock device 29 enables the magazine 41 to be replaced in the direction along the Y axis from the aisle side, so that the magazine 41 can be easily replaced by utilizing the wide space on the aisle. In addition, it does not interfere with the work of accessing the feeder mounted on the bogie (splicing work, feeder replacement or bogie replacement). Further, when the magazine is automatically replaced by the transfer robot, it is not necessary to wrap around to the side (left and right) of the tray parts stock device 29.
  • the tray component stock device 29 is arranged in the internal space, mounts the magazine 41, and moves the magazine 41 between the internal space and the outside of the housing through the opening along the second axis.
  • a slide table device 123 is provided.
  • the pallet stock unit 43 is provided with the slide table device 123 in the internal space covered by the cover 109.
  • the slide table device 123 is provided corresponding to the position of the magazine replacement window 111.
  • the slide table device 123 makes the magazine 41 movable between the internal space of the cover 109 and the outside of the cover 109 by passing through the magazine replacement window 111 along the second axis (Y axis).
  • a plurality of magazines 41 are stored in the pallet stock section 43 in multiple stages in the vertical direction.
  • the pallets 39 stored in the respective magazines 41 can be taken in and out in the direction along the X axis by the pallet transport unit 45.
  • the slide table device 123 serves as a transfer unit (that is, an exchange unit) for exchanging magazines 41 one by one between the outside of the pallet stock unit 43 and the internal space.
  • the pallets 39 in which the parts 33 are stored in the tray 31 are sequentially pulled out by the pallet transport unit 45.
  • the pallet 39 on which the tray 31 emptied by consuming the parts 33 is placed is stored by the pallet transport unit 45. That is, the replenished magazine 41 of the parts 33 mounted on the slide table device 123 is sequentially replaced with the empty pallet 39 by the pallet transport unit 45.
  • the magazine 41 mounted on the slide table device 123 is moved to the outside (on the aisle) of the cover 109 by the slide table device 123 when all the stored pallets 39 are replaced with empty pallets 39.
  • the magazine 41 whose parts have been consumed moved onto the aisle is replaced with the magazine 41 which has been replenished with the parts 33 together with the magazine 41 by hand or by the magazine transfer device.
  • the magazine 41 is further extended onto the aisle by the slide table device 123 from the magazine replacement window 111 provided on the passage side of the pallet stock portion 43, so that the magazine has a weight of, for example, about 20 kg.
  • the 41 can be easily replaced.
  • the slide table device 123 may be manually pulled out from the aisle side.
  • the slide table device 123 pulled out to the aisle side functions as a shelf, and a large space on the aisle becomes a work space, which facilitates manual replacement work.
  • the slide table device 123 further includes an advancing / retreating drive unit 129 that projects the slide table 127 on which the magazine 41 is placed to the outside of the housing.
  • the slide table device 123 is provided with an advance / retreat drive unit 129.
  • the advancing / retreating drive unit 129 automatically advances / retreats the slide table 127 between the outside and the inside space of the cover 109 via the magazine replacement window 111 by operating the advancing / retreating drive unit 129.
  • the tray parts stock device 29 automates the replacement of the magazine 41 when the self-propelled magazine transfer device is run on the aisle at a low equipment cost without the need for a large-scale elevator device or the like. It will be easier.
  • the component mounting system 11 is a component mounting device that takes out the component 33 stored in the component storage body 69 (for example, the tray 31) by the component mounting unit (for example, the mounting head 35) and mounts the component 33 on the substrate 17.
  • a parts supply device for example, a tray parts supply device 23
  • a parts stocking device for example, a tray parts stocking device 29 for replenishing 31 is provided.
  • the tray parts stock device 29 has a magazine 41 that allows a parts storage body 69 (for example, a pallet 39 on which a tray 31 is placed) for storing parts 33 to be inserted and removed along a first axis (for example, an X axis), and a horizontal plane.
  • a stocker for example, a pallet stock portion 43 that allows the magazine 41 to be taken in and out along a second axis (for example, the Y axis) that intersects the first axis in the horizontal plane, and a magazine 41 to the first from the magazine 41 stored in the stocker.
  • the stocker for example, the pallet stock portion 43
  • the housing comprises an opening (eg, magazine replacement window 111) through which the magazine 41 can be taken in and out along a second axis (eg, the Y axis).
  • the pallet transport section 45 transports the pallet 39 between the pallet stock section 43 and the component mounting device 13.
  • the pallet 39 is supplied in the order of the pallet stock section 43, the pallet transport section 45, and the component mounting device 13, and is collected in the order of the component mounting device 13, the pallet transport section 45, and the pallet stock section 43. That is, the pallet 39 is supplied from the pallet stock unit 43 to the component mounting device 13 via the pallet transport section 45, and after the component 33 is consumed and emptied, the component mounting device 13 via the pallet transport section 45. It is collected in the pallet stock section 43.
  • a linear mounting line 27 is configured by installing a plurality of component mounting devices 13 side by side in the left-right direction (direction along the X-axis). Further, on a factory floor having a large production volume, a plurality of mounting lines 27 may be installed in parallel with a passage 15 along the X axis passing in front of and behind the component mounting device 13 interposed therebetween. In this case, the mounting lines 27 and the passages 15 are laid out in parallel with each other and alternately.
  • the extending direction of the mounting line 27 The pallet stock portion 43 and the pallet transport portion 45 extend in a direction intersecting (direction along the X axis) and (direction along the Y axis).
  • the pallet stock portion 43 and the pallet transport portion 45 extending from the rear part of the component mounting device 13 are not a little protruding from the passage 15. Become.
  • the factory floor design at the time of new construction if the installation space for this protrusion is expanded to the component mounting device 13 in order to secure the passage width, the factory floor area will be enlarged and the area production will be increased. Reduces sex.
  • the pallet stock unit 43 and the pallet transport unit 45 are integrally connected to form the tray parts stock device 29.
  • the pallet stock unit 43 requires an installation space for at least one pallet
  • the pallet transport unit 45 also requires an installation space for at least one pallet. Therefore, the tray component stock device 29 composed of the pallet stock unit 43 and the pallet transport unit 45 has a rectangular shape that requires at least two pallet installation spaces in a plan view.
  • the pallet stock unit 43 and the pallet transport unit 45 are lined up along the aisle 15. That is, the tray component stock device 29 is installed with the long side side facing along the passage 15.
  • the pallet transport unit 45 of the tray component stock device 29 is connected to the component mounting device 13 in the direction along the Y axis via the tray component supply device 23.
  • the pallet stock portion 43 on the long side and the pallet transport portion 45 are arranged side by side in the direction along the X axis, and the tray components on the component mounting device side are arranged in the direction in which they intersect the X axis. It is installed in an L-shaped space in a plan view connected to the supply device 23.
  • the component mounting system 11 can make the pallet loading / unloading direction of the tray component supply device 23 orthogonal to the aisle 15 and the pallet loading / unloading direction of the pallet stock portion 43 parallel to the aisle 15.
  • the component mounting system 11 arranges the pallet stock section 43, the pallet transport section 45, and the tray component supply device 23 on a straight line intersecting the passage 15 between the lines of the equipment.
  • the position of the pallet stock portion 43 can be bent at a right angle and arranged, so that the jumping out to the aisle 15 can be suppressed (in other words, the width of the aisle can be expanded). ..
  • the pallet 39 has a direction (left-right direction) between the pallet stock unit 43 and the pallet transport unit 45 along the X axis and a Y axis between the pallet stock unit 43 and the tray component supply device 23.
  • the direction is changed in the direction along (front-back direction) and reprinted. This makes it possible to secure both the passage width and the area productivity.
  • the parts storage body 69 (for example, the pallet 39 on which the tray 31 is placed) in which the parts 33 are stored is placed on the first axis (for example, the X axis).
  • a stocker (for example, a pallet stock portion 43) that can store the magazine 41 that can be inserted and removed along the inner space of the housing (for example, the cover 109) and the magazine 41 are placed, and the first in the plane along the horizontal plane.
  • a slide table having a slide table 127 that moves the magazine 41 between the inside and outside of the housing along a second axis (eg, the Y axis) that intersects the axis of the housing and can project from the inside to the outside of the housing.
  • the device 123 is provided.
  • the stocker for example, the pallet stock portion 43
  • the slide table device 123 in the internal space covered with the housing (for example, the cover 109).
  • the slide table device 123 allows the magazine 41 to be moved between the internal space of the cover 109 and the outside of the cover 109 along a second axis (eg, the Y axis).
  • a plurality of magazines 41 are stored in the pallet stock section 43 in multiple stages in the vertical direction.
  • the pallets 39 stored in the respective magazines 41 can be taken in and out in the direction along the X axis.
  • the slide table device 123 serves as a transfer unit (that is, an exchange unit) for exchanging magazines 41 one by one between the outside of the pallet stock unit 43 and the internal space.
  • the pallet 39 in which the parts 33 are stored in the tray 31 is sequentially pulled out from the magazine 41 placed on the slide table 127.
  • the pallet 39 on which the tray 31 emptied by consuming the parts 33 is placed is stored. That is, in the internal space of the pallet stock portion 43, the magazine 41 with the parts replenished placed on the slide table 127 is sequentially replaced with the empty pallet 39.
  • the magazine 41 placed on the slide table 127 is moved to the outside (on the aisle) of the cover 109 by the slide table device 123 when all the stored pallets 39 are replaced with empty pallets 39.
  • the magazine 41 moved onto the aisle is replaced with a new parts-filled magazine 41 in which the parts 33 are filled together with the magazine 41 by hand or a magazine transfer device.
  • the magazine 41 since the magazine 41 is fed out on the passage by the slide table device 123, the magazine 41 having a weight of, for example, about 20 kg can be easily replaced manually.
  • the slide table device 123 may be manually pulled out from the aisle side.
  • the slide table device 123 pulled out to the aisle side functions as a shelf, and a large space on the aisle becomes a work space, which facilitates manual replacement work.
  • the slide table device 123 supports the slide table 127 and has a slide rail 167 that expands and contracts along a second axis (for example, the Y axis).
  • the slide table 127 moves between the outside and the inside of the housing as the slide rail 167 expands and contracts.
  • the slide table 127 is supported by the slide rail 167.
  • the slide rail 167 makes the slide table 127 movable between the internal space of the cover 109 and the outside of the cover 109.
  • a single slide rail 167 may support the slide table 127, for example. That is, the slide table 127 may be moved back and forth between the inside and outside of the pallet stock portion 43 by one telescopic slide rail 167.
  • the support structure of the slide table 127 is simplified.
  • the slide table device 123 extends along the second axis (for example, the Y axis) and is parallel to each other in the direction along the first axis (for example, the X axis). It has two slide rails 167 arranged.
  • the slide rails 167 are composed of two slide rails 167 that are parallel to each other and are separated in the direction along the X axis.
  • the slide table 127 is supported by the two slide rails 167, so that the load capacity of the slide table 127 is increased. Further, since the slide table 127 is supported by two slide rails 167 separated in a direction orthogonal to the advancing / retreating direction, the magazine 41 can be stably supported as compared with the support by one slide rail 167.
  • the slide table 127 includes a first regulating unit (for example, X alignment guide 181) that regulates the position of the magazine 41 in the first axial direction (for example, the X-axis direction) with respect to the slide table 127.
  • the magazine 41 is provided with a second regulating unit (for example, a Y alignment guide 187) that regulates the position of the magazine 41 in the second axial direction with respect to the slide table 127.
  • the slide table 127 is provided with a first regulation unit and a second regulation unit.
  • the first regulation unit (for example, X alignment guide 181) regulates the position of the magazine 41 with respect to the slide table 127 in the first axis (for example, X axis) direction.
  • the second regulation unit (for example, Y alignment guide 187) regulates the position of the magazine 41 in the second axis (for example, Y axis) direction with respect to the slide table 127.
  • the Y alignment guide 187 also serves as a magazine receiver 187 for receiving the magazine 41 placed from above.
  • the Y alignment guide 187 also acts as a magazine receiver 187 to regulate the position of the magazine 41 in the Z-axis direction with respect to the slide table 127.
  • the magazine 41 is positioned relative to the slide table 127 in the XYZ directions.
  • the parts stock device (for example, the tray parts stock device 29) can insert and remove the parts storage body 69 (for example, the pallet 39 on which the tray 31 is placed) storing the parts 33 along the first axis (for example, the X axis).
  • a stocker (for example, a pallet stock portion 43) capable of storing the magazine 41 in the internal space of the housing and a second axis (for example, a second axis) on which the magazine 41 is placed and intersecting the first axis in a plane along the horizontal plane.
  • a slide table device 123 including a unit 129 and a slide table device 123.
  • the slide table 127 is driven by the advancing / retreating drive unit 129.
  • the advancing / retreating drive unit 129 automatically advances / retreats the slide table 127 between the outer side and the inner space of the cover 109 by operating.
  • the tray parts stock device 29 automates the replacement of the magazine 41 when the self-propelled magazine transfer device is run on the aisle at a low equipment cost without the need for a large-scale elevator device or the like. It will be easier.
  • the slide table device 123 supports the slide table 127 and has a slide rail 167 that expands and contracts along the second axis.
  • the slide table 127 moves between the outside of the housing (for example, the cover 109) and the inside of the housing (for example, the cover 109) as the slide rail 167 expands and contracts.
  • the slide table 127 is supported by the slide rail 167 in the slide table device 123 provided with the advance / retreat drive unit 129.
  • the slide rail 167 makes the slide table 127 movable between the internal space of the cover 109 and the outside of the cover 109.
  • a single slide rail 167 may support the slide table 127, for example. That is, the slide table 127 may be moved back and forth between the inside and outside of the pallet stock portion 43 by one telescopic slide rail 167. When one slide rail 167 is used, the support structure of the slide table 127 is simplified.
  • the slide table 127 has two slide rails 167 extending along the second axis and arranged in parallel at intervals in the direction along the first axis.
  • the slide rails 167 are parallel to each other and are composed of two slide rails 167 separated in the direction along the X axis.
  • the slide table 127 is supported by the two slide rails 167, so that the load capacity of the slide table 127 is increased.
  • the magazine 41 can be stably supported as compared with the support by one slide rail 167.
  • the advance / retreat drive unit 129 is arranged between the two slide rails 167.
  • the slide table device 123 includes two slide rails 167 that are parallel to each other and are separated in the direction along the X axis.
  • the advance / retreat drive unit 129 is installed by utilizing the space portion vacated between the two slide tables 127.
  • the slide table device 123 can compactly configure the advance / retreat drive mechanism provided with the advance / retreat drive unit 129.
  • the advancing / retreating drive unit 129 is mounted on the first rack gear 189 fixed inside the housing and the slide table 127 in a state where the advancing / retreating drive unit 129 is oriented in the longitudinal direction parallel to the second axis.
  • a second rack gear 191 arranged in parallel facing the first rack gear 189, a pinion gear 193 that meshes with the first rack gear 189 and the second rack gear 191 and an advancing / retreating drive that moves the pinion gear 193 along the second axis. It has a source (eg, an air cylinder 131).
  • the slide table 127 is driven forward and backward by the advance / retreat drive unit 129.
  • the advancing / retreating drive unit 129 rotatably supports the pinion gear 193 and moves it along the second axis.
  • the pinion gear 193 meshes with the first rack gear 189 fixed inside the cover 109.
  • the pinion gear 193 is provided so as to be able to move forward and backward with respect to the cover 109 by the slide rail 167, and meshes with the second rack gear 191 arranged in parallel with the first rack gear 189. That is, the pinion gear 193 is sandwiched between the first rack gear 189 fixed in the cover and the second rack gear 191 mounted on the slide table 127 that can be moved forward and backward, and meshes with both of them.
  • the pinion gear 193 is moved along the Y axis by an advancing / retreating drive source (for example, an air cylinder 131) while being engaged with each other while being sandwiched between both rack gears.
  • the pinion gear 193 is located on the back side (opposite side of the slide table advance side) of the first rack gear 189 and meshes with the slide table 127 when the slide table 127 is retracted inside the cover 109.
  • the tip side of the second rack gear 191 mounted on the slide table 127 in the advancing direction meshes with the pinion gear 193.
  • the tray parts supply device 23 it is possible to secure the moving stroke required for the slide table 127 while accommodating the slide table device 123 in a compact size.
  • the advance / retreat drive unit 129 by changing the gear ratio between the pinion gear 193 and the rack gear, it is possible to change the movement stroke of the slide table 127 with respect to the movement stroke of the pinion gear 193 by the advance / retreat drive source.
  • the slide table 127 has a first restricting unit (for example, an X alignment guide 181) that regulates a position in the first axial direction with respect to the magazine 41, and a second axial direction with respect to the magazine 41.
  • a second regulating unit for example, Y alignment guide 187) that regulates the position is provided.
  • the magazine 41 is moved downward in the direction along the Z axis, so that the X alignment roller 93 of the magazine 41 comes into contact with the first regulation unit (for example, the X alignment guide 181).
  • the position of the magazine 41 in the first axial direction (for example, the X-axis direction) is positioned with respect to the slide table 127 by guiding the X alignment roller 93 to the X alignment guide 181.
  • the Y alignment roller 99 comes into contact with the second regulation unit (for example, the Y alignment guide 187) at the same time as the contact between the X alignment guide 181 and the X alignment roller 93.
  • the position in the second axial direction (for example, the Y-axis direction) is positioned with respect to the slide table 127 by guiding the Y alignment roller 99 to the inclined surface 185 of the Y alignment guide 187.
  • the magazine 41 When the magazine 41 is moved to the final descending position and placed, the lower surface of the bottom plate 87 abuts on the four Y alignment guides 187. As a result, the position of the Z-axis of the magazine 41 is positioned with respect to the slide table 127. As a result, the magazine 41 is positioned in the XYZ direction with respect to the slide table 127 at the same time when the magazine 41 is placed on the slide table 127.
  • the component mounting system 11 is a component mounting device that takes out the component 33 stored in the component storage body 69 (for example, the tray 31) by the component mounting unit (for example, the mounting head 35) and mounts the component 33 on the substrate 17. 13 and a parts supply device (for example, a tray parts supply device 23) that supplies a parts storage body 69 (for example, a tray 31) to a position where it can be taken out by a parts mounting portion (for example, a mounting head 35), and parts to the tray parts supply device 23.
  • a parts stock device for example, a tray parts stock device 29 for replenishing the storage body 69 (for example, the tray 31) is provided.
  • the tray parts stock device 29 has a magazine 41 that allows the parts storage body 69 (for example, the pallet 39 on which the tray 31 is placed) for storing the parts 33 to be inserted and removed along the first axis (for example, the X axis).
  • a parts storage body transport unit (for example, a pallet transport unit 45) that transports a parts storage body 69 (for example, a pallet 39) between a stocker (for example, a pallet stock unit 43) that can be stored in the internal space and the stocker and the tray parts supply device 23.
  • a slide table device 123 having a slide table 127 that can project from the inside to the outside of the housing.
  • the pallet stock portion 43 is provided with the slide table device 123 in the internal space covered with the cover 109.
  • the slide table device 123 allows the magazine 41 to be moved between the internal space of the cover 109 and the outside of the cover 109 along the second axis (Y axis).
  • a plurality of magazines 41 are stored in the pallet stock section 43 in multiple stages in the vertical direction.
  • the pallets 39 stored in the respective magazines 41 can be inserted and removed in the direction along the X axis.
  • the slide table device 123 serves as a transfer unit (that is, an exchange unit) for exchanging magazines 41 one by one between the outside of the pallet stock unit 43 and the internal space.
  • the pallet 39 in which the parts 33 are stored in the tray 31 is sequentially moved to the tray parts supply device 23.
  • the pallet 39 on which the tray 31 emptied by consuming the parts 33 is placed is returned from the tray parts supply device 23 and stored. That is, the replenished magazine 41 of the parts 33 mounted on the slide table device 123 is sequentially replaced with the empty pallet 39.
  • the magazine 41 mounted on the slide table device 123 is moved to the outside (on the aisle) of the cover 109 by the slide table device 123 when all the stored pallets 39 are replaced with empty pallets 39.
  • the magazine 41 whose parts have been consumed moved onto the aisle is replaced with the magazine 41 which has been replenished with the parts 33 together with the magazine 41 by hand or by the magazine transfer device.
  • the magazine 41 is further extended onto the aisle by the slide table device 123 from the aisle side of the pallet stock portion 43, so that the magazine 41 having a weight of, for example, about 20 kg can be easily replaced. It becomes.
  • the slide table device 123 may be manually pulled out from the aisle side.
  • the slide table device 123 pulled out to the aisle side functions as a shelf, and a large space on the aisle becomes a work space, which facilitates manual replacement work.
  • the component mounting system 11 has a component mounting device 13 for taking out the component 33 stored in the component storage body 69 (for example, the tray 31) by the component mounting unit (for example, the mounting head 35) and mounting the component 33 on the board 17, and the component storage body.
  • a parts supply device for example, a tray parts supply device 23
  • supplies 69 for example, a tray 31
  • a parts mounting portion for example, a mounting head 35
  • a parts storage body 69 for example, a tray for the tray parts supply device 23.
  • a parts stocking device for example, a tray parts stocking device 29) for replenishing 31) is provided.
  • the tray parts stock device 29 has a housing (for example, a magazine 41) that allows a parts storage body 69 (for example, a pallet 39 on which the tray 31 is placed) for storing parts 33 to be inserted and removed along a first axis (for example, an X axis).
  • a stocker for example, a pallet stock unit 43
  • a parts storage body transport unit for example, a parts storage unit transport unit
  • a slide table device having a slide table 127 that moves the magazine 41 to and from the outside of the housing (for example, the cover 109) and can project from the inside of the housing (for example, the cover 109) to the outside of the housing (for example, the cover 109).
  • the slide table device 123 includes an advancing / retreating driving unit 129 that projects the slide table 127 to the outside of the housing.
  • the pallet stock portion 43 is provided with the slide table device 123 in the internal space covered by the cover 109.
  • the slide table device 123 allows the magazine 41 to be moved between the internal space of the cover 109 and the outside of the cover 109 along the second axis (Y axis).
  • a plurality of magazines 41 are stored in the pallet stock section 43 in multiple stages in the vertical direction.
  • the pallets 39 stored in the respective magazines 41 can be inserted and removed in the direction along the X axis.
  • the slide table device 123 serves as a transfer unit (that is, an exchange unit) for exchanging magazines 41 one by one between the outside of the pallet stock unit 43 and the internal space.
  • the pallet 39 in which the parts 33 are stored in the tray 31 is sequentially moved to the tray parts supply device 23.
  • the pallet 39 on which the tray 31 emptied by consuming the parts 33 is placed is returned from the tray parts supply device 23 and stored. That is, the replenished magazine 41 of the parts 33 mounted on the slide table device 123 is sequentially replaced with the empty pallet 39.
  • the magazine 41 mounted on the slide table device 123 is moved to the outside (on the aisle) of the cover 109 by the slide table device 123 when all the stored pallets 39 are replaced with empty pallets 39.
  • the magazine 41 whose parts have been consumed moved onto the aisle is replaced with the magazine 41 which has been replenished with the parts 33 together with the magazine 41 by hand or by the magazine transfer device.
  • the magazine 41 is further extended onto the aisle by the slide table device 123 from the aisle side of the pallet stock portion 43, so that the magazine 41 having a weight of, for example, about 20 kg can be easily replaced. It becomes.
  • the slide table device 123 may be manually pulled out from the aisle side.
  • the slide table device 123 pulled out to the aisle side functions as a shelf, and a large space on the aisle becomes a work space, which facilitates manual replacement work.
  • the slide table 127 is driven by the advancing / retreating drive unit 129.
  • the advancing / retreating drive unit 129 automatically advances / retreats the slide table 127 between the outer side and the inner space of the cover 109 by operating.
  • FIG. 26 is an overall configuration diagram of an article transport system 211 provided with the article transport device 209 according to the second embodiment.
  • the same members and parts as those shown in FIGS. 1 to 25 in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and duplicate description will be omitted.
  • the article transfer device 209 conveys articles (for example, a pallet 39 as an example of a component storage body 69; the same applies hereinafter) used in at least one manufacturing facility (see below) installed on the factory floor. ..
  • the article transfer device 209 is also referred to as a magazine transfer device.
  • the manufacturing equipment includes not only the equipment for assembling, processing, processing, inspection, etc., but also the incidental equipment for storing and supplying the articles consumed by those members.
  • the tray parts supply device 23, the tape parts supply device 25, and the tray parts stock device 29 correspond to incidental equipment.
  • the article transfer device 209 can automatically travel in the passage 15 on the factory floor by connecting the transfer vehicle 213 to the side portion of the article transfer device 209. That is, the article transport device 209 is a traction type.
  • the article transfer device 209 accommodates a magazine 41 loaded with articles (for example, a pallet 39) at a work place (not shown) away from the tray component stock device 29 connected to the tray component supply device 23, and a designated tray component. It can be transported and docked to the stock device 29 to collect and replenish the magazine 41.
  • FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the article transport device 209.
  • the article transfer device 209 has an article storage body for accommodating at least one article.
  • the article storage body is the magazine 41.
  • the article storage body is also referred to as a magazine 41.
  • the component storage body 69 (see FIG. 4) described in the first embodiment may be a tray 31, a pallet 39, or may be composed of a tray 31 and a pallet 39.
  • the article transfer device 209 has a base portion 217 provided with wheels 215 for traveling on the factory floor.
  • the article transfer device 209 is covered with a rectangular parallelepiped cover 219 that is vertically long above the base portion 217.
  • a magazine storage rack 223, which is a storage rack having an opening 221 is accommodated.
  • At least one holding table for holding the magazine 41 is provided on the inner wall surface of the magazine storage rack 223.
  • This holding table moves up and down integrally with the magazine storage rack 223 by raising and lowering the magazine storage rack 223 with respect to the base portion 217.
  • the holding table includes, for example, a first magazine holding table 225 and a second magazine holding table 227.
  • the number of holding tables is not limited to two.
  • the magazine storage rack 223 allows the magazine 41 to be taken in and out from the lateral direction of the holding table by moving the slide table 127 of the tray parts stock device 29 back and forth from the opening 221.
  • FIG. 28 is a side sectional view of the article transport device 209.
  • the article transporting device 209 includes a rack lifting device 229 that raises and lowers the storage rack.
  • the rack elevating device 229 includes a rack elevating motor 231, a feed screw 233, and a rack elevating nut portion 235.
  • the rack elevating motor 231 is fixed to a frame 237 extending up and down with the drive shaft in a posture along the Z axis.
  • the lead screw 233 is coaxially connected to the drive shaft of the rack elevating motor 231 and is rotatably supported by a plurality of bearing plates 239.
  • the rack elevating nut portion 235 is screwed into the feed screw 233, and the side surface of the rack elevating nut portion 235 is fixed to the back surface of the magazine storage rack 223 (that is, the surface opposite to the opening 221).
  • FIG. 29 is a sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 28. Therefore, when the rack elevating motor 231 is driven, the feed screw 233 rotates and the rack elevating nut portion 235 moves in the vertical direction, so that the slide portion 241 fixed to the back surface of the magazine storage rack 223 becomes the base portion. Guided by the slide guide 243 erected on the 217, the magazine storage rack 223 moves up and down. The operation of the rack elevating motor 231 housed in the unit inner space 245 shown in FIG. 28 is controlled by the magazine transfer device control unit 247 housed in the base unit 217. Further, inside the opening 221 is provided a wireless communication unit 249 connected to the magazine transport device control unit 247 at a position that does not interfere with the raising and lowering of the magazine storage rack 223.
  • the opening 221 of the magazine storage rack 223 is provided with a reference height detection sensor 251 which is a reference height detection unit described later.
  • the reference height detection unit is not limited to the sensor alone, and may be, for example, a camera unit for image recognition or the like.
  • a pair of slide table detection sensors 253 sandwiching each of the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227 at the top and bottom is a total of four. There are two.
  • each of the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227 has an X alignment roller 255, a magazine receiving portion 257, and a Y alignment member, which will be described later, on both ends along the Y axis. 259 is provided.
  • Each of the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227 is supported on both sides by the facing inner wall surface of the magazine storage rack 223.
  • the broken line in FIG. 29 shows the outline of the magazine 41 in a plan view.
  • the X alignment roller 255, the magazine receiving portion 257, and the Y alignment member 259 are arranged at the four corners of the magazine 41, respectively. That is, four X alignment rollers 255, a magazine receiving portion 257, and a Y alignment member 259 are arranged.
  • a stopper 261 is provided between the back wall of the magazine storage rack 223 and the first magazine holding table 225, and between the back wall of the magazine storage rack 223 and the second magazine holding table 227. Each stopper 261 restricts each of the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227 from retracting to the magazine storage rack 223 by a predetermined number or more.
  • a first magazine detection sensor 263, which will be described later, is provided between the back wall of the magazine storage rack 223 and the first magazine holding table 225. The first magazine detection sensor 263 detects the magazine 41 placed on the first magazine holding table 225.
  • a second magazine detection sensor 265, which will be described later, is provided between the back wall of the magazine storage rack 223 and the second magazine holding table 227. The second magazine detection sensor 265 detects the magazine 41 placed on the second magazine holding table 227.
  • Each of the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227 is provided with a static eliminating contact 267 for removing static electricity charged in the magazine 41.
  • the base portion 217 has a docking base 115 (see FIG. 8) possessed by the manufacturing equipment by moving the base portion 217 in a first direction (for example, a direction along the Y axis) and approaching the manufacturing equipment. ) Further has a docking unit 269 for docking.
  • FIG. 30 is a perspective view of the docking base 115.
  • FIG. 31 is a perspective view of the docking unit 269.
  • the docking portion 269 moves in the first direction (direction along the Y axis) and approaches in contact with at least one alignment member provided on the docking base 115, so that the docking portion 269 is orthogonal to the first direction in the horizontal direction. It has at least one aligned member that adjusts the position of the base portion 217 (ie, the entire article transfer device 209) in two directions (eg, along the X-axis).
  • the alignment member provided on the docking base 115 is an X guide 271 having a guide slope 425 shown in FIG. 30 and a positioning pin guide member 275 having a positioning pin guide hole 273. These alignment members regulate the position in the direction along the X axis.
  • the aligned member included in the docking portion 269 is an X guide roller 277 and a positioning pin 279.
  • these two aligned members are arranged at intervals in the second direction (direction along the X axis). Each of these aligned members individually contacts two alignment members provided on the docking base 115 at intervals in the second direction.
  • the base portion 217 further has a held member held by the docking holding portion 281 provided on the docking base 115.
  • the docking holding portion 281 has a hook insertion port 283 arranged at a distance in a second direction (direction along the X axis).
  • the held member included in the base portion 217 is a pair of hooks 285 arranged at intervals in the second direction (direction along the X axis) shown in FIG. 31.
  • the docking unit 269 has a other connector 287 for communication or power supply that is electrically connected to one connector 117 provided on the docking base 115.
  • One connector 117 is arranged at an intermediate position between the pair of X guides 271.
  • the other connector 287 is arranged at an intermediate position between the pair of X guide rollers 277.
  • One connector 117 is a female connector in which a female terminal is housed in a female housing made of an insulating resin.
  • the other connector 287 is a male connector in which a male terminal electrically connected to a female terminal is housed in a male housing made of an insulating resin.
  • the sex of one connector 117 and the other connector 287 is not limited to this.
  • the other connector 287 makes it possible to connect two circuits, a communication circuit electric wire and a power supply circuit electric wire.
  • the other connector 287 can be formed in the same male housing with a plurality of terminal accommodating chambers accommodating male terminals mounted on electric wires of different circuits.
  • the other connector 287 may be one in which a male housing for communication and a male housing for power supply formed separately are integrally joined.
  • the docking unit 269 has a connector position adjusting mechanism 289 that adjusts the vertical position of the other connector 287 at the time of docking.
  • the docking base 115 has a connector position adjusting mechanism 289 that adjusts the vertical position of one connector 117 at the time of docking. That is, the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 may be provided on either the docking portion 269 or the docking base 115.
  • the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 is operated by an alignment member provided on the docking partner.
  • the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 is provided, for example, in the docking portion 269. Therefore, the alignment member for operating the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 is provided on the docking base 115.
  • the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 has an elevating member 291 shown in FIG. 31, a pushing member 293, and a cam follower 295. Further, the alignment member that operates the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 is a plate-shaped cam 297 having a working surface (for example, an inclined surface Sc) shown in FIG. 30.
  • the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 moves up and down together with the other connector 287.
  • the cam follower 295 moves in the first direction (direction along the Y axis) while contacting the inclined surface Sc of the cam 297 provided on the docking base 115 of the tray component stock device 29.
  • the height position of the elevating member 291 is adjusted by the cam 297.
  • the article transport system 211 includes at least one manufacturing facility (tray parts stock device 29) installed on the factory floor, and an article transport device 209 that moves the factory floor and transports articles used in the manufacturing facility.
  • the article transfer system 211 is provided by a docking device 299 (see FIG. 35) including the docking base 115 shown in FIG. 30 of the tray parts stock device 29 and the docking unit 269 shown in FIG. 31 of the article transfer device 209.
  • the article transfer device 209 is docked to the tray parts stock device 29, and the article is delivered between the article transfer device 209 and the tray parts stock device 29. That is, it can be said that the docking device 299 is a joint portion for joining the article transport device 209 and the tray component stock device 29.
  • FIG. 32 is a plan view of the docking unit 269 provided in the article transport device 209. 33 is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 32.
  • the docking device 299 has an induction unit 301, a cushioning unit 303 (see FIG. 30), a docking holding unit 281 (see FIG. 30), and a connector connecting unit 305 (see FIG. 35).
  • the guide portion 301 is composed of an alignment member (for example, X guide 271) and an aligned member (for example, X guide arm 307, X guide roller 277).
  • the guide portion 301 has a second direction (in the X axis) orthogonal to the first direction of the article transport device 209 approaching from the first direction (direction along the Y axis) toward the tray component stock device 29 in the horizontal plane. Guidance is made while adjusting the position in the direction along the line).
  • the guide portion 301 includes at least one alignment member (for example, X guide 271) provided on the docking base 115 and at least one aligned portion (for example, X guide arm 307, X guide roller 277) provided on the docking portion 269. Have.
  • the guide portion 301 moves the X guide roller 277 in the first direction (direction along the Y axis) while contacting the guide slope 425 of the X guide 271, so that the trajectory of the X guide roller 277 is corrected by the X guide 271. This adjusts the position of the article transport device 209 in the second direction (direction along the X axis).
  • the aligned portion includes a roller (for example, X guide roller 277) that comes into contact with the alignment member (for example, X guide 271).
  • a roller for example, X guide roller 277
  • FIG. 34 is a conceptual diagram of the shock absorber 303 and the docking holding portion 281 before docking.
  • the cushioning portion 303 is composed of a bearing 309, a slide shaft 311, a large diameter portion 313, a receiving portion 315, and a cushion member (for example, a cushioning spring 317).
  • the cushioning unit 303 absorbs the impact at the time of docking by pushing the article transporting device 209 in the direction away from the manufacturing equipment by utilizing the repulsive force of the cushioning spring 317.
  • the cushioning portion 303 is arranged on one of the docking base 115 and the docking portion 269.
  • a protrusion 319 that abuts on the cushioning portion 303 from the first direction (direction along the Y axis) and deforms the cushioning spring 317 is arranged.
  • the cushioning spring 317 is arranged on the docking base 115, and the protrusion 319 is arranged on the docking part 269.
  • the docking holding portion 281 is composed of a hook holding portion 321 and a cushioning portion 303.
  • the docking holding portion 281 prevents the tray parts stocking device 29 and the docked article transporting device 209 from separating from the manufacturing equipment (for example, the tray parts stocking device 29) due to the repulsive force of the cushioning spring 317.
  • the docking holding portion 281 is arranged on one of the docking base 115 and the docking portion 269. At least one held member (for example, hook 285) held by the docking holding portion 281 is provided on the other side of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269.
  • the docking holding portion 281 is arranged on the docking base 115, and the held member (for example, the hook 285) is arranged on the docking portion 269.
  • the docking holding portion 281 has a lever 323 and a holding force generating portion 325 (for example, a holding spring 327, a lever shaft 329, and a docking roller 331).
  • the lever 323 provides a docking roller 331 that abuts on the held member (eg, hook 285) from a third direction (eg, along the X axis) that intersects the first direction (eg, along the Y axis).
  • the holding force generating unit 325 turns the lever 323 and presses the docking roller 331 against the hook 285.
  • a thick portion 333 is formed at the tip of the hook 285 protruding toward the docking base 115.
  • the thick portion 333 is formed in a wedge shape by the front taper 335 on the tip side and the rear taper 337 on the base end side of the front taper 335.
  • the hook 285 makes the docking roller 331 in the direction opposite to the third direction as the article transport device 209 moves in the first direction (for example, along the Y axis) and approaches the tray component stock device 29. It has a roller operating surface (ie, rear taper 337) that is displaced in a direction and then displaced in a third direction.
  • the connector connecting portion 305 (see FIG. 35) is composed of a connector position adjusting mechanism 289 (for example, an elevating member 291 and a pushing member 293) shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, and an alignment member (for example, a cam follower 295).
  • the connector connecting portion 305 positions the other connector 287 of the article transporting device 209 and the one connector 117 of the manufacturing facility as the article transporting device 209 approaches the manufacturing equipment (for example, the tray component stocking device 29). adjust.
  • the connector connecting portion 305 includes a connector position adjusting mechanism 289 arranged on one of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269, and an alignment member (for example, cam 297) arranged on the other of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269.
  • the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 moves up and down together with the other connector 287.
  • the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 has an elevating member 291 whose height position is adjusted by the alignment member by moving in a first direction (direction along the Y axis) while contacting the alignment member.
  • the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 is arranged on the docking portion 269, and the alignment member is arranged on the docking base 115.
  • the connector connecting portion 305 includes the connector pressing portion 339 shown in FIGS. 32 and 33.
  • the connector pressing portion 339 is arranged on one of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269, and one connector 117 arranged on one of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269 is pressed against the other connector 287.
  • the connector pressing portion 339 is arranged on the docking portion 269. Therefore, the connector pressing portion 339 provided on the docking portion 269 presses the other connector 287 provided on the docking portion 269 against the one connector 117 (see FIG. 35) provided on the docking base 115.
  • the connector pressing portion 339 is provided on the elevating member 291 shown in FIGS. 32 and 33.
  • the elevating member 291 is movable up and down by the elevating guide 341 and is supported by the base portion 217.
  • the elevating member 291 is urged downward along the Z axis by the tension spring 343. Further lowering of the elevating member 291 is restricted by abutting on the lowering stopper 345.
  • a pair of guide rods 347 separated in the direction along the X axis are projected from the surface of the elevating member 291 facing the docking base 115.
  • Each guide rod 347 penetrates both sides in the longitudinal direction of the pushing member 293 formed in the shape of a rectangular plate.
  • the pushing member 293 through which the guide rod 347 penetrates becomes movable along the guide rod 347 in the direction of approaching and separating from the elevating member 291.
  • a connector pressing spring 349 is extrapolated from the guide rod 347 between the elevating member 291 and the pushing member 293.
  • the connector pressing spring 349 urges the pushing member 293 in a direction away from the elevating member 291.
  • the push-in member 293 is restricted from being detached from the guide rod 347 by a detachment restricting portion formed at the protruding tip of the guide rod 347. That is, the pushing member 293 can be pushed in a direction approaching the elevating member 291 against the urging force of the connector pressing spring 349 and is supported.
  • one of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269 has at least one positioning pin 279 protruding in the first direction (direction along the Y axis).
  • the other of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269 has a positioning pin guide member 275.
  • the positioning pin guide member 275 has at least one positioning pin guide hole 273 into which the positioning pin 279 is inserted from the first direction.
  • the positioning pin 279 is arranged in the docking portion 269, and the positioning pin guide member 275 is arranged in the docking base 115.
  • a transport vehicle 213 for pulling the article transport device 209 is connected to the base portion 217 formed of the docking portion 269 having the positioning pin 279 on the side surface opposite to the positioning pin 279.
  • a claw portion 351 is provided.
  • FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram of the horizontal positioning operation by docking.
  • FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram of a vertical positioning operation by docking. Docking of the docking portion 269 with respect to the docking base 115 is started after the preliminary alignment of the tray component stock device 29 and the article transfer device 209 in the direction along the X axis is completed. In the docking operation, first, the article transport device 209 approaches the tray component stock device 29, so that the X guide roller 277 is displaced in the direction along the X axis following the X guide 271. As a result, the position of the article transport device 209 in the X direction is corrected and aligned with the tray component stock device 29.
  • the positioning pin 279 moves to a position where it can be inserted into the positioning pin guide hole 273, and the cam follower 295 also moves to a position where it can contact the cam 297.
  • the positioning pin 279 is inserted into the positioning pin guide hole 273. At this time, the article transport device 209 moves in the direction of approaching the tray component stock device 29 while the X guide roller 277 abuts on the X guide 271.
  • the article transfer device 209 completes the alignment in the direction along the X axis by inserting the positioning pin 279 into the positioning pin guide hole 273. Further, in the connector position adjusting mechanism 289, the cam follower 295 rides on the inclined surface Sc of the cam 297 and moves to the flat surface of the cam 297, so that the alignment in the direction along the Z axis is completed. In this state, one connector 117 and the other connector 287 face each other at a position where they can be connected to each other. Further, when the article transfer device 209 is moved in the direction approaching the tray component stock device 29, the coupling between the one connector 117 and the other connector 287 is started.
  • the connector pressing spring 349 is compressed, and the repulsive force of this spring firmly bonds the connectors to each other.
  • the article transport device 209 completes the alignment in the XZ direction with respect to the tray component stock device 29.
  • the article transport device 209 is such that the protrusion 319 (see FIG. 34) presses the receiving portion 315 (see FIG. 34) of the buffer portion 303 (see FIG. 34).
  • the tray component stocking device 29 is pushed by 213.
  • the receiving portion 315 retracts to a predetermined position against the urging force of the cushioning spring 317 (see FIG. 34)
  • the cushioning portion 303 is restricted from further retreating.
  • FIG. 37 is a conceptual diagram of the docking holding portion 281 after docking.
  • the article transport device 209 is pressed against the protrusion 319 by the repulsive force of the cushioning spring 317.
  • the article transporting device 209 on which the protrusion 319 is pressed is about to be returned in the direction away from the tray component stocking device 29.
  • the rear taper 337 formed on the hook 285 of the docking holding portion 281 is engaged with the docking roller 331 of the holding force generating portion 325.
  • the displacement angle of the lever 323 of the docking roller 331 is regulated by the displacement angle regulating stopper 353 (see FIGS. 34 and 37).
  • the holding spring 327 generates a spring force that can prevent the article transport device 209 and the tray component stock device 29 from being released from the docked state due to the repulsive force. That is, the docking holding unit 281 keeps the article transporting device 209 and the tray component stocking device 29 apart by a certain distance and holds them in the docked state. As a result, the article transport device 209 completes the alignment in the first direction (direction along the Y axis) with respect to the tray component stock device 29, and ends the docking operation.
  • the article transport system 211 includes at least one manufacturing facility (tray component stock device 29) installed on the factory floor and at least one article transport device 209 moving on the factory floor, and is a tray component.
  • the article is transported between the stock device 29 and the article transfer device 209.
  • FIG. 38 is a perspective view of the magazine storage rack 223.
  • the article transport system 211 includes a magazine 41, a first support table, a second support table, a first support table moving device, and a second support table elevating device.
  • the article is a pallet 39 holding a tray 31 for accommodating the component 33 shown in FIG.
  • the magazine 41 stores a plurality of pallets 39.
  • FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram showing the support areas of the first support table and the second support table.
  • the first support table is provided in the tray component stocking device 29.
  • the first support table is the slide table 127 of the slide table device 123.
  • the first support table is also referred to as a slide table 127.
  • the slide table 127 supports a plurality of parts of the magazine 41 located in the first region F1 which is a part of the region where the magazine 41 is projected in a plane from below.
  • the second support table is provided in the article transport device 209.
  • the second support table is a first magazine holding table 225 and a second magazine holding table 227 provided in the magazine storage rack 223.
  • the second support table is also referred to as a first magazine holding table 225 or a second magazine holding table 227.
  • the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227 are other parts of the area where the magazine 41 is projected in a plane and are located in the second area F2 which does not overlap with the first area F1. Support several other parts from below.
  • FIG. 40 is a plan view showing a state in which the slide table 127 has advanced to the magazine storage rack 223.
  • the first support table moving device is provided in the tray component stocking device 29 (see FIG. 26).
  • the first support table moving device is configured to have an advancing / retreating driving unit 129 as a main unit.
  • the advancing / retreating drive unit 129 includes an air cylinder 131, a pinion gear 193, a slider 195, a first rack gear 189, and a second rack gear 191.
  • the first support table moving device is also referred to as an advance / retreat drive unit 129.
  • the slide table 127 interferes with the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227 even in a state where the slide table 127 slides into the inside of the magazine storage rack 223. Arranged so as not to.
  • FIG. 41 is a perspective view of the holding table.
  • Each of the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227 is a plane in which the base ends of a pair of parallel table movable plates 355 long in the direction along the Y axis are connected to each other by a table connecting plate 357. It is visually formed in a U-shape.
  • Each of the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227 moves up and down together with the magazine storage rack 223 which is raised and lowered by the rack raising and lowering device 229.
  • a slide table 127 advancing inside the magazine storage rack 223 is arranged inside the U-shape of the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227.
  • each of the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227 can move up and down without interfering with the slide table 127 arranged inside the U-shape. Therefore, each of the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227 has a U-shaped inside as a slide table passing space 359.
  • the slide table 127 is stopped only by advancing in the horizontal direction. Therefore, as the magazine storage rack 223 moves up and down, the stopped slide table 127 passes relatively to each of the first magazine holding table 225 and the first magazine holding table 225 that move up and down. It will be. That is, the slide table 127 and each of the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227 can be crossed in the vertical direction so as to be able to support the magazine 41 without interfering with each other.
  • the advancing / retreating driving unit 129 uses the slide table 127 supporting the magazine 41 as a vacant first magazine holding table 225 or a second magazine in which the magazine 41 is not placed.
  • the second region F2 of the magazine 41 is positioned "above" the first magazine holding table 225 or the second magazine holding table 227.
  • the advancing / retreating drive unit 129 moves the empty slide table 127 toward the first magazine holding table 225 or the second magazine holding table 227 to move the slide table 127 toward the first magazine holding table 225 or the second magazine holding table 225 or the second. It is located “below" the second region F2 of the magazine 41 supported by the magazine holding table 227.
  • the second support table elevating device is provided in the article transporting device 209.
  • the second support table elevating device is also referred to as a rack elevating device 229 (see FIG. 28).
  • the rack elevating device 229 supports the slide table 127 by moving the first magazine holding table 225 or the second magazine holding table 227 from a position lower than the slide table 127 to a higher position.
  • the magazine 41 is delivered to the first magazine holding table 225 or the second magazine holding table 227.
  • the first magazine holding table 225 or the second magazine holding table 227 is supported by the first magazine holding table 225 or the second magazine holding table 227 by moving it from a position higher than the slide table 127 to a lower position.
  • the magazine 41 is delivered to the slide table 127.
  • the magazine 41 has a plurality of first alignment portions in the first region F1.
  • the first alignment unit is the above-mentioned first alignment group 103 shown in FIG. 39. As shown in FIG. 7, the first alignment group 103 has four X alignment rollers 93 and four Y alignment rollers 99.
  • FIG. 42 is an enlarged perspective view of a main part showing a second alignment portion provided in the magazine 41 and a second alignment guide 361 provided in the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227.
  • the magazine 41 has a plurality of second alignment portions in the second region F2.
  • the second alignment unit is the above-mentioned second alignment group 107.
  • the second alignment group 107 has four Y alignment units 95 and two X alignment units 105, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 42.
  • the slide table 127 has a plurality of first alignment guides 363 shown in FIG. 39 which are in contact with the plurality of first alignment groups 103 to adjust the position of the magazine 41 with respect to the slide table 127.
  • the first alignment guide 363 has the four X alignment guides 181 shown in FIG. 17 and the four Y alignment guides 187.
  • the first magazine holding table 225 or the second magazine holding table 227 contacts a plurality of second alignment groups 107 to adjust the position of the magazine 41 with respect to the first magazine holding table 225 or the second magazine holding table 227. It has a plurality of second alignment guides 361 shown in FIG. 41. As shown in FIG. 42, the second alignment guide 361 has an X alignment roller 255 and a Y alignment member 259.
  • At least one of the plurality of first alignment guides 363 shown in FIG. 39 adjusts the position of the magazine 41 with respect to the slide table 127 in the horizontal first direction (direction along the X axis), and at least one of the other.
  • the position of the magazine 41 is adjusted with respect to the slide table 127 in the second direction (direction along the Y axis) orthogonal to the first direction in the horizontal plane.
  • At least one of the plurality of second alignment guides 361 positions the magazine 41 in the horizontal third direction (for example, along the X-axis) on the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227.
  • the position of the magazine 41 is adjusted with respect to the position of the magazine 41 in the fourth direction (for example, the direction along the Y axis) orthogonal to the third direction in the horizontal plane, the first magazine holding table 225, and the second magazine. Adjust for retention table 227.
  • FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the magazine storage rack 223.
  • the holding tables for example, the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227) are laterally oriented with respect to the storage rack (for example, along the Y axis). It is mounted so that it can slide freely.
  • Each of the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227 can be pulled out from the magazine storage rack 223 by a pair of table slide rails 365 fixed to the facing inner walls of the magazine storage rack 223. ing.
  • the storage rack (for example, the magazine storage rack 223) is provided with a slide lock portion 367 for preventing the holding table from sliding.
  • FIG. 44 is an enlarged plan view of a main part for explaining the operation of the slide lock portion 367 shown in FIG. 43.
  • a lever column 369 corresponding to each holding table projects vertically from the inner wall.
  • the lever column 369 is swingable because the central portion of the table lock lever 371 is rotatably supported.
  • the swing end of the table lock lever 371 on the side facing the opening 221 serves as the lock operation portion 373.
  • the table lock lever 371 is rotatably supported by a rocking roller 375 which is rotatable about a rotation center axis in the direction along the Z axis at a swing end on the opposite side of the lock operation unit 373.
  • the table lock lever 371 is urged in the rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 44) in which the locking roller 375 approaches the holding table by the lever urging spring 377 sandwiched between the table lock lever 371 and the magazine storage rack 223. There is.
  • the table lock lever 371 urged counterclockwise by the lever urging spring 377 abuts on the regulation pin 379 provided on the lever strut 369 to restrict further counterclockwise rotation.
  • the table lock lever 371 is in a rotational position where the locking roller 375 abuts on the regulation pin 379, and the lock roller 375 abuts on the tip 381 of the table movable plate 355 in the pull-out direction.
  • the holding table in which the locking roller 375 is in contact with the tip 381 in the pulling direction is in a locked state in which the pulling is restricted.
  • the lock operation unit 373 of the table lock lever 371 is rotated in the rotation direction (for example, the clockwise direction in FIG. 44) away from the inner wall of the magazine storage rack 223, the lock roller 375 is the tip of the table movable plate 355 in the pull-out direction. It deviates from 381.
  • the lock roller 375 rolls on the outer surface of the table movable plate 355, and the table movable plate 355 (that is, the holding table) can be pulled out.
  • the article transfer device 209 can manually unlock the slide lock portion 367.
  • the holding table becomes slidable when the slide lock portion 367 is released.
  • the storage rack can easily collect and replenish the magazine 41 manually by the operator by pulling out the holding table at the collection / replenishment place.
  • the article transporting device 209 may be one in which the magazine 41 is automatically collected / replenished by the collection / replenishment device installed in the collection / replenishment place or the like.
  • FIG. 45 is a block diagram showing a control system of the article transport device 209.
  • the article transfer device 209 includes a magazine transfer device control unit 247.
  • the magazine transfer device control unit 247 includes a reference height detection unit (for example, a reference height detection sensor 251), four slide table detection sensors 253, a first magazine detection sensor 263, and a second magazine detection sensor 265.
  • the wireless communication unit 249, the other connector 287, the power power supply unit 383, the motor driver 385 of the rack elevating device 229, and the rack elevating motor 231 and the encoder 387 connected to the motor driver 385 are connected.
  • the power power supply unit 383 is connected to the other connector 287 and the motor driver 385 via the power supply cable 391.
  • a battery 393 is connected to the magazine transfer device control unit 247.
  • the battery 393 supplies electric power to the magazine transfer device control unit 247 and the wireless communication unit 249.
  • the battery 393 is charged when the connector is connected.
  • the magazine transfer device control unit 247 includes a power reception control unit 395, a reference height setting unit 397, a positioning height calculation unit 399, a first carry-in unit 401, a first carry-out unit 403, and a second carry-in unit 405. , A second carry-out unit 407 and a transfer device storage unit 409.
  • the transport device storage unit 409 has a height difference storage unit 411, a Z0 storage unit 413, and a positioning height storage unit 415.
  • the power receiving control unit 395 performs a power input process after the tray parts stock device 29 and the parts mounting device 13 are docked, and shuts down before the docking is released.
  • the reference height setting unit 397 detects the reference height Lv0 shown in FIG. 48, which will be described later, and executes a process of setting the positioning height (for example, Z coordinate).
  • the positioning height calculation unit 399 calculates the positioning height (for example, Z coordinate) of the first level Lv1, the second level Lv2, the third level Lv3, and the fourth level Lv4 shown in FIG. 48, which will be described later.
  • the first loading unit 401 executes a process of loading the magazine 41 into the first magazine holding table 225.
  • the first unloading unit 403 executes a process of unloading the magazine 41 from the first magazine holding table 225.
  • the second carry-in unit 405 executes a process of carrying the magazine 41 into the second magazine holding table 227.
  • the second unloading unit 407 executes a process of unloading the magazine 41 from the second magazine holding table 227.
  • the height difference storage unit 411 stores the height difference (for example, design value) of the first level Lv1 to the fourth level Lv4 with respect to the reference height Lv0.
  • the Z0 storage unit 413 acquires the positioning height (for example, Z coordinate) of the rack elevating device 229 with the reference height Lv0 by the reference height setting unit 397.
  • the positioning height storage unit 415 stores the positioning heights (for example, Z coordinates) of the first level Lv1 to the fourth level Lv4 obtained by the positioning height calculation unit 399.
  • FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a procedure until the power supply for power is turned on after docking.
  • the magazine transfer device control unit 247 determines whether or not there is docking (Ast1).
  • the magazine transfer device control unit 247 confirms the docking state by the self-diagnosis function (Ast2).
  • the magazine transfer device control unit 247 determines whether the docking state is normal or abnormal (Ast3). When the docking state is abnormal, the magazine transfer device control unit 247 notifies the abnormality (Ast4) and ends the process without turning on the power supply for power. When the docking state is normal, the magazine transfer device control unit 247 transmits a power request command for power to the tray component stock device 29 (Ast5). The magazine transfer device control unit 247 determines whether or not power is received from the tray component stock device 29 (Ast6). When the power reception is confirmed, the magazine transfer device control unit 247 turns on the power supply for power (Ast7) and ends the process.
  • FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the article transport device 209 and the tray parts stock device 29 after docking.
  • the article transfer device 209 includes a position detection unit (for example, an encoder 387), a reference height detection unit (for example, a reference height detection sensor 251), and a control unit (for example, a magazine transfer device control unit 247).
  • a position detection unit for example, an encoder 387
  • a reference height detection unit for example, a reference height detection sensor 251
  • a control unit for example, a magazine transfer device control unit 247.
  • the encoder 387 detects the position of the magazine storage rack 223 in the height direction.
  • the reference height detection sensor 251 moves up and down together with the magazine storage rack 223 to detect a reference point (for example, a hole 419 of the reference height sign 417) provided in the tray component stock device 29.
  • the magazine transfer device control unit 247 operates the rack elevating device 229 with the base unit 217 docked to the docking base 115 of the tray parts stock device 29 by the docking unit 269 to detect a reference point (for example, a hole 419) as a reference height. It is detected by a unit (for example, a reference height detection sensor 251).
  • the magazine transfer device control unit 247 sets the position obtained by the encoder 387 to the reference height when the reference height detection sensor 251 detects the hole 419, and operates the rack elevating device 229 based on the reference height.
  • the magazine 41 is transferred between the holding table and the manufacturing equipment.
  • the delivery work between the article transfer device 209 and the tray parts stock device 29 is the work of delivering the magazine 41 between the holding table and the slide table 127 protruding into the internal space of the magazine storage rack 223.
  • the magazine transfer device control unit 247 obtains the positioning height at which the holding table is located at the first level Lv1 lower than the slide table 127 and the second level Lv2 higher than the slide table 127 based on the reference height.
  • the magazine transfer device control unit 247 moves the magazine storage rack 223 from the first level Lv1 to the second level Lv2 by the rack elevating device 229.
  • the magazine transfer device control unit 247 moves the magazine storage rack 223 from the second level Lv2 to the first level Lv1 by the rack elevating device 229.
  • the magazine transfer device control unit 247 has a reference height setting unit 397, a positioning height calculation unit 399, and a delivery work execution unit (for example, a first carry-in unit 401 and a first carry-out unit 403).
  • the reference height setting unit 397 operates the rack elevating device 229 with the base unit 217 docked to the manufacturing equipment by the docking unit 269, and detects the reference point with the reference height detection sensor 251.
  • the reference height setting unit 397 sets the position obtained by the encoder 387 when the reference height detection sensor 251 detects the reference point to the reference height.
  • the positioning height calculation unit 399 calculates a plurality of positioning heights of the magazine storage rack 223 for transferring the magazine 41 to and from the tray component stock device 29 based on the reference height.
  • the delivery work execution unit controls the rack elevating device 229 based on a plurality of positioning heights to execute the delivery work.
  • the positioning height calculation unit 399 obtains at least the positioning height for positioning the holding table at the first level Lv1 lower than the slide table 127 and the second level Lv2 higher than the slide table 127.
  • the delivery work execution unit includes the first carry-in unit 401 and the first carry-out unit 403.
  • the first carry-in unit 401 moves the magazine storage rack 223 from the first level Lv1 to the second level Lv2 by the rack elevating device 229, and transfers the magazine 41 from the slide table 127 to the holding table.
  • the first carry-out unit 403 moves the storage rack from the second level to the first level by the rack elevating device 229, and transfers the magazine 41 from the holding table to the slide table 127.
  • FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram of the positioning height of the magazine storage rack 223.
  • the reference height detection sensor 251 sets the position obtained from the rack elevating device 229 when the reference height sign 417 (for example, hole 419) of the tray component stock device 29 is detected as the reference height Lv0, and sets the rack elevating device at that time.
  • the positioning height (for example, Z coordinate) Zo at 229 is stored.
  • the height difference between the positioning height (for example, Z coordinate) Zo and each of the first level Lv1 to the fourth level Lv4 is stored in advance in the transport device storage unit 409 as setting data (for example, h1 to h4). Therefore, the positioning height calculation unit 399 uses the positioning height Z0 corresponding to the reference height Lv0 and the setting data (for example, h1 to h4) to obtain the respective positioning heights of the first level Lv1 to the fourth level Lv4 (for example, h1 to h4). For example, the Z coordinate) is calculated, and each of Z1 to Z4 (see FIG. 48) is stored.
  • FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram of the magazine delivery operation.
  • the magazine storage rack 223 is raised and lowered by the rack raising and lowering device 229, and the reference height indicator of the tray parts stock device 29 is used by the reference height detection sensor 251. 417 (hole 419) is detected.
  • FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the positioning height setting process.
  • the positioning height setting process first, the magazine storage rack 223 moves to the search operation start height (Bst1). The search for the reference height is started (Bst2).
  • FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram of the detection principle of the reference height sign 417.
  • the reference height detection sensor 251 provided in the magazine storage rack 223 has a light emitting unit 421 and a light receiving unit 423.
  • the reference height sign 417 is provided on the pallet stock portion 43 facing the locus in which the reference height detection sensor 251 moves as the magazine storage rack 223 moves up and down.
  • the reference height sign 417 has a hole 419 located at the reference height position. As the magazine storage rack 223 descends, the reference height detection sensor 251 irradiates the pallet stock unit 43 with the light from the light emitting unit 421.
  • the reference height detection sensor 251 reflects the light emitted from the light emitting unit 421 to the pallet stock unit 43 and receives the light by the light receiving unit 423. Since this operation is continuously performed as the magazine storage rack 223 moves up and down, the reference height sign 417 is searched.
  • the reference height detection sensor 251 when the light from the light emitting unit 421 is applied to the hole 419 of the reference height marker 417, the reflected light from the pallet stock unit 43 is not detected by the light receiving unit 423.
  • the reference height detection sensor 251 detects the reference height Lv0 with this.
  • the reference height setting unit 397 stores the positioning height (for example, Z coordinate) Z0 in the transport device storage unit 409 (Bst4).
  • the positioning height calculation unit 399 calculates each of the first level Lv1 to the fourth level Lv4 of the positioning height (for example, Z coordinate) based on the setting data (for example, h1 to h4) and the positioning height (for example, Z coordinate) Z0. (Bst5), the processing by the positioning height calculation unit 399 is completed.
  • the magazine loading operation from the manufacturing equipment to the article transporting device 209 is a collecting operation of the magazine 41 that has consumed the article and is emptied.
  • the magazine unloading operation from the article transport device 209 to the manufacturing equipment is a supply operation of the magazine 41 containing the articles.
  • FIG. 52 is a flowchart of a magazine delivery operation showing a procedure for carrying in the first magazine holding table 225.
  • the magazine unloading operation from the tray component stock device 29 for example, the processing of the first loading section 401
  • the magazine storage rack 223 is first moved to the first level Lv1 by the rack elevating device 229 (Cst1).
  • the first magazine detection sensor 263 confirms that the magazine 41 does not exist in the first magazine holding table 225 (Cst2), and if it does not exist, the slide table 127 advance permission is transmitted to the tray parts stock device 29 (Cst3). If there is, the worker is notified and the process is terminated (Cst4).
  • FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram of the unloading operation from the tray component stock device 29 by the processing of the first loading unit 401.
  • the slide table device 123 is driven to advance the slide table 127 holding the magazine 41 to the upper side of the first magazine holding table 225 (state of FIG. 53).
  • FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram of the loading operation to the first magazine holding table 225 by the processing of the first loading unit 401. If there is a notification of the completion of advancement of the slide rail 167 (Cst5), the magazine storage rack 223 is moved to the second level Lv2 by the rack elevating device 229, and the first magazine holding table 225 is positioned higher than the slide table 127. Move to (Cst6). When the first magazine holding table 225 and the slide table 127 pass each other up and down, the magazine 41 is transferred from the slide table 127 to the first magazine holding table 225 (state of FIG. 54).
  • the first level Lv1 is a height position lower than the height position where the slide table 127 is located, and is at a height at which the magazine 41 held and moved by the slide table 127 and the holding table do not interfere with each other.
  • the second level Lv2 is a height position higher than the height position where the slide table 127 is located, and is a height at which the slide table 127 can slide without interfering with the magazine 41 held by the holding table.
  • the holding table rises from the first level Lv1 to the second level Lv2.
  • the operation of passing the magazine 41 from the holding table to the slide table 127 is the opposite operation.
  • FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram of the loading operation to the first magazine holding table 225 by the processing of the first loading unit 401.
  • the storage permission of the slide table 127 is transmitted from the magazine transfer device control unit 247 to the tray parts stock device 29 (Cst7).
  • the magazine transfer device control unit 247 determines whether or not there is a storage completion notification of the slide table 127 from the tray parts stock device 29 (Cst8).
  • the magazine transfer device control unit 247 detects the presence / absence of the slide table 127 with the slide table detection sensor 253 (Cst9).
  • the magazine transfer device control unit 247 ends the process if the magazine storage rack 223 does not have the slide table 127. If the magazine storage rack 223 has a slide table 127, the magazine transfer device control unit 247 notifies the operator and ends the work. This completes the magazine unloading operation from the tray component stock device 29 to the first magazine holding table 225.
  • FIG. 56 is a flowchart of a magazine delivery operation showing a procedure for carrying in the second magazine holding table 227.
  • the magazine unloading operation processing of the second loading unit 405) from the tray component stock device 29, first, the magazine storage rack 223 is moved to the third level Lv3 by the rack elevating device 229 (Dst1).
  • the second magazine detection sensor 265 confirms that the magazine 41 does not exist in the second magazine holding table 227 (Dst2), and if there is none, the slide table 127 advance permission is transmitted to the tray parts stock device 29 (Dst3). If there is, the worker is notified and the process is terminated (Dst4).
  • the slide table device 123 is driven to advance the slide table 127 holding the magazine 41 above the second magazine holding table 227.
  • the magazine storage rack 223 is moved to the fourth level Lv4 by the rack elevating device 229, and the second magazine holding table 227 is positioned higher than the slide table 127. Move to (Dst6).
  • the magazine 41 is transferred from the slide table 127 to the second magazine holding table 227.
  • the third level Lv3 is a height position lower than the height position where the slide table 127 is located, and is at a height at which the magazine 41 held and moved by the slide table 127 and the holding table do not interfere with each other.
  • the fourth level Lv4 is a height position higher than the height position where the slide table 127 is located, and is a height at which the slide table 127 can slide without interfering with the magazine 41 held by the holding table.
  • the holding table rises from the third level Lv3 to the fourth level Lv4.
  • the operation of passing the magazine 41 from the holding table to the slide table 127 is the opposite operation.
  • the storage permission of the slide table 127 is transmitted from the magazine transfer device control unit 247 to the tray parts stock device 29 (Dst7).
  • the magazine transfer device control unit 247 determines whether or not there is a storage completion notification of the slide table 127 from the tray parts stock device 29 (Dst8).
  • the magazine transfer device control unit 247 detects the presence / absence of the slide table 127 with the slide table detection sensor 253 (Dst9).
  • the magazine transfer device control unit 247 ends the process if the magazine storage rack 223 does not have the slide table 127. If the magazine storage rack 223 has a slide table 127, the magazine transfer device control unit 247 notifies the operator and ends the work. This completes the magazine unloading operation from the tray component stock device 29 to the second magazine holding table 227.
  • FIG. 57 is a flowchart of a magazine delivery operation showing a procedure for carrying out from the second magazine holding table 227.
  • the magazine storage rack 223 is moved to the fourth level Lv4 by the rack elevating device 229. (Est1).
  • the second magazine detection sensor 265 confirms that the magazine 41 is on the second magazine holding table 227 (Est2), and if there is, the slide table advance permission is transmitted to the tray parts stock device 29 (Est3). If not, the worker is notified and the process is terminated (Est4).
  • FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram of the unloading operation from the second magazine holding table 227 by the processing of the second unloading unit 407.
  • the slide table device 123 is driven to advance the slide table 127 to the lower side of the second magazine holding table 227 holding the magazine 41 (state of FIG. 58).
  • FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram of the unloading operation to the tray parts stock device 29 by the processing of the second unloading unit 407. If there is a notification of the completion of advancement of the slide rail 167 (Cst5), the magazine storage rack 223 is moved to the third level Lv3 by the rack elevating device 229, and the second magazine holding table 227 is positioned lower than the slide table 127. Move to (Est6). When the second magazine holding table 227 and the slide table 127 pass each other up and down, the magazine 41 is transferred from the second magazine holding table 227 to the slide table 127 (state in FIG. 59).
  • the fourth level Lv4 is a height position higher than the height position where the slide table 127 is located, and is at a height at which the magazine 41 held and moved by the slide table 127 and the holding table do not interfere with each other.
  • the third level Lv3 is a height position lower than the height position where the slide table 127 is located, and is a height at which the slide table 127 can slide without interfering with the magazine 41 held by the holding table. In the operation of passing the magazine 41 from the holding table to the slide table 127, the holding table descends from the fourth level Lv4 to the third level Lv3. The operation of passing the magazine 41 from the slide table 127 to the holding table is the opposite operation.
  • FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram of the loading operation into the tray parts stock device 29 by the processing of the second unloading unit 407.
  • the storage permission of the slide table 127 is transmitted from the magazine transfer device control unit 247 to the tray parts stock device 29 (Est7).
  • the magazine transfer device control unit 247 determines whether or not there is a storage completion notification of the slide table 127 from the tray parts stock device 29 (Est 8).
  • the magazine transfer device control unit 247 detects the presence / absence of the slide table 127 with the slide table detection sensor 253 (Est9).
  • the magazine transfer device control unit 247 ends the process if the magazine storage rack 223 does not have the slide table 127. If the magazine storage rack 223 has a slide table 127, the magazine transfer device control unit 247 notifies the operator and ends the work. This completes the magazine unloading operation from the second magazine holding table 227 to the tray parts stock device 29.
  • FIG. 61 is a flowchart of a magazine delivery operation showing a procedure for carrying out from the first magazine holding table 225.
  • the magazine storage rack 223 is first moved to the second level Lv2 by the rack elevating device 229 (Fst1).
  • the first magazine detection sensor 263 confirms that the magazine 41 is on the first magazine holding table 225 (Fst2), and if there is, the slide table advance permission is transmitted to the tray parts stock device 29 (Fst3). If not, the worker is notified and the process is terminated (Fst4).
  • the slide table device 123 is driven to advance the slide table 127 below the first magazine holding table 225 holding the magazine 41.
  • the magazine storage rack 223 is moved to the first level Lv1 by the rack elevating device 229, and the first magazine holding table 225 is positioned lower than the slide table 127. Move to (Fst6).
  • the magazine 41 is transferred from the first magazine holding table 225 to the slide table 127.
  • the second level Lv2 is a height position higher than the height position where the slide table 127 is located, and is at a height at which the magazine 41 held and moved by the slide table 127 and the holding table do not interfere with each other.
  • the first level Lv1 is a height position lower than the height position where the slide table 127 is located, and is a height at which the slide table 127 can slide without interfering with the magazine 41 held by the holding table.
  • the holding table descends from the second level Lv2 to the first level Lv1.
  • the operation of passing the magazine 41 from the slide table 127 to the holding table is the opposite operation.
  • the storage permission of the slide table 127 is transmitted from the magazine transfer device control unit 247 to the tray parts stock device 29 (Fst7).
  • the magazine transfer device control unit 247 determines whether or not there is a storage completion notification of the slide table 127 from the tray parts stock device 29 (Fst8).
  • the magazine transfer device control unit 247 detects the presence / absence of the slide table 127 with the slide table detection sensor 253 (Fst9).
  • the magazine transfer device control unit 247 ends the process if the magazine storage rack 223 does not have the slide table 127. If the magazine storage rack 223 has a slide table 127, the magazine transfer device control unit 247 notifies the operator and ends the work. This completes the magazine unloading operation from the first magazine holding table 225 to the tray parts stock device 29.
  • the article transport device 209 is an article transport device 209 that transports articles used in at least one manufacturing facility installed on the factory floor on the factory floor, and is an article storage body (magazine 41) that stores at least one article.
  • a holding table (first magazine holding table 225, second magazine) that can be raised and lowered with respect to the base portion 217 having wheels 215 for traveling on the factory floor and holding the article storage body.
  • a storage rack (magazine storage rack 223) having at least one holding table 227) and an opening 221 that allows the article storage body to be taken in and out from the lateral direction of the holding table, and a rack elevating device 229 for raising and lowering the storage rack. Be prepared.
  • the article transfer device 209 travels in the passage 15 on the factory floor by the wheels 215 provided on the base portion 217.
  • the article transfer device 209 includes a storage rack.
  • the storage rack has a holding table for holding the magazine 41.
  • This storage rack has an opening 221. In the storage rack, the magazine 41 held on the holding table can be taken in and out from the opening 221.
  • the storage rack can be raised and lowered by the rack raising and lowering device 229 with respect to the base portion 217 of the article transporting device 209.
  • the magazine 41 held by the holding table exposed from the opening 221 is moved up and down by driving the rack elevating device 229.
  • the article transfer device 209 moves the magazine 41 up and down for each storage rack so that the magazine 41 can be easily delivered to the slide table 127 from the manufacturing equipment that has entered the storage rack through the opening 221. It is possible.
  • the manufacturing equipment has a slide table 127 that only advances and retreats in the horizontal direction in the storage rack of the article transport device 209.
  • the article transfer device 209 raises and lowers the storage rack only up and down.
  • the manufacturing equipment and the article transporting device 209 each have an extremely simple mechanism that is the minimum necessary, and the magazine 41 can be collected and supplied.
  • the article transfer device 209 can automatically replenish and collect the magazine 41 with the manufacturing equipment by using a simple mechanism.
  • the base portion 217 is docked to the docking base 115 of the manufacturing equipment by moving the base portion 217 in the first direction (direction along the Y axis) and approaching the manufacturing equipment. It further has a portion 269.
  • the article transfer device 209 has a docking unit 269.
  • the manufacturing equipment is provided with a docking base 115.
  • the article transfer device 209 approaches the manufacturing equipment in the direction along the Y axis when docked with the manufacturing equipment.
  • the docking section 269 matches the docking base 115 of the manufacturing facility
  • the article transport device 209 close to the manufacturing facility has the docking section 269 docked to the docking base 115 and is interconnected with the manufacturing facility. After that, the article transfer device 209 is maintained in a state of being connected to the manufacturing equipment unless the docking unit 269 is undocked.
  • the docking portion 269 is in contact with at least one alignment member (X guide 271, positioning pin guide hole 273) provided on the docking base 115 in a first direction (direction along the Y axis).
  • At least one aligned member (X guide roller 277,) that adjusts the position of the base portion 217 in the second direction (direction along the X axis) orthogonal to the first direction and the horizontal direction by moving to and approaching. It has a positioning pin 279).
  • this article transfer device 209 when the docking portion 269 approaches the docking base 115 from the direction along the Y axis, the aligned member of the docking portion 269 comes into contact with the alignment member provided on the docking base 115. When the docking portion 269 further approaches the docking base 115, the aligned member is displaced along the alignment member, and the docking portion 269 is aligned with the docking base 115 and docked. As a result, the article transfer device 209 is adjusted in position with respect to the manufacturing equipment via the docking unit 269 aligned with the docking base 115.
  • two aligned members (X guide roller 277, positioning pin 279) are arranged at a distance in a second direction (direction along the X axis), and each aligned member is arranged. Individually contacts two alignment members (X guide 271, positioning pin guide hole 273) provided on the docking base 115 at intervals in the second direction.
  • the base portion 217 of the article transfer device 209 includes two aligned members including an X guide roller 277 and a positioning pin 279.
  • the two X-guide rollers 277 and the two positioning pins 279 are two X-guides 271 separated along the X-axis and two positioning pin guides separated along the X-axis from the docking base 115 of the manufacturing equipment. Positioned in each of the holes 273.
  • the docking portion 269 can be positioned more reliably (with high accuracy) with respect to the docking base 115 as compared with the case where the alignment member and the alignment member are one.
  • the base portion 217 further has a held member held by the docking holding portion 281 provided on the docking base 115.
  • a docking holding portion 281 is provided on the docking base 115 of the manufacturing equipment.
  • the docking holding portion 281 has a hook insertion port 283, a hook holding portion 321, and a cushioning portion 303.
  • the held member provided in the docking portion 269 of the article transport device 209 has a hook 285 and a protrusion 319.
  • the hook 285 is engaged with and held by the hook holding portion 321.
  • the protrusion 319 receives the reaction force from the cushioning portion 303 by pressing the cushioning portion 303.
  • the reaction force presses the docking portion 269 in a direction away from the docking base 115, but the docking portion 269 in which the hook 285 is held by the hook holding portion 321 is restricted from being docked from the docking base 115.
  • the position of the article transport device 209 is adjusted in the direction along the Y axis without causing rattling with respect to the manufacturing equipment.
  • the docking unit 269 has a other connector 287 for communication or power supply that is electrically connected to one connector 117 provided on the docking base 115.
  • the docking unit 269 includes the other connector 287.
  • the docking base 115 is provided with one connector 117.
  • the other connector 287 provided on the docking portion 269 is provided on the docking base 115 by adjusting the position of the docking portion 269 with respect to the docking base 115 in the direction along the X axis and the direction along the Y axis. The position is adjusted so that it can be coupled to one of the connectors 117.
  • the docking unit 269 has a connector position adjusting mechanism 289 that adjusts the vertical position of the other connector 287 at the time of docking, or a connector position adjusting mechanism 289 provided on the docking base 115. It has an alignment member (cam follower 295) to be operated.
  • the docking unit 269 or the docking base 115 has a connector position adjusting mechanism 289.
  • the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 adjusts the vertical position of the other connector 287 provided in the docking portion 269.
  • the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 is provided in the docking portion 269.
  • the docking portion 269 includes an alignment member (cam follower 295). As a result, the position of the other connector 287 in the vertical direction with respect to the one connector 117 of the docking base 115 is automatically adjusted.
  • the docking portion 269 has a connector position adjusting mechanism 289, and the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 moves up and down together with the other connector 287 and comes into contact with an alignment member (cam 297) provided in the manufacturing equipment.
  • the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 moves up and down together with the other connector 287 and comes into contact with an alignment member (cam 297) provided in the manufacturing equipment.
  • it has an elevating member 291 whose height position is adjusted by the alignment member by moving in the first direction (direction along the Y axis).
  • the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 has an elevating member 291.
  • the height position of the elevating member 291 is adjusted by moving the elevating member 291 in the direction along the Y axis while the cam follower 295 is in contact with the cam 297 provided in the manufacturing equipment. That is, since the other connector 287 is provided on the elevating member 291, when the docking portion 269 is docked to the docking base 115, the cam follower 295 that follows the cam 297 causes the direction along the Z axis (that is, the height). Position) is adjusted.
  • the holding tables (first magazine holding table 225, second magazine holding table 227) slide in the lateral direction (direction along the Y axis) with respect to the storage rack (magazine storage rack 223). It is freely mounted, and the storage rack is provided with a slide lock portion 367 that prevents the holding table from sliding.
  • the storage rack is provided with a sliding holding table.
  • the slide of the holding table is restricted by the slide lock portion 367 provided in the storage rack.
  • the slide lock portion 367 can be manually unlocked.
  • the holding table becomes slidable when the slide lock portion 367 is released.
  • the storage rack can easily collect and replenish the magazine 41 manually by the operator by pulling out the holding table at the collection / replenishment place.
  • the article transport system 211 includes at least one manufacturing facility (tray parts stock device 29) installed on the factory floor and an article transport device that moves the factory floor to transport articles (pallets 39) used in the manufacturing facility.
  • the article transport device 209 is docked to the manufacturing facility by the docking device 299 including the docking base 115 of the manufacturing facility and the docking unit 269 of the article transport device 209, and the article transport device 209 and the manufacturing facility.
  • the docking device 299 is in the first direction of the article transport device 209 approaching the manufacturing equipment from the first direction (direction along the Y axis).
  • the manufacturing equipment is equipped with a docking base 115.
  • the article transfer device 209 includes a docking unit 269.
  • the docking base 115 and the docking unit 269 form a docking device 299 for joining the article transport device 209 to the manufacturing equipment. Therefore, the docking device 299 can be said to be a joint portion between the manufacturing equipment and the article transport device 209.
  • the docking unit 269 has a guiding unit 301.
  • the guiding unit 301 guides docking while adjusting the position of the article transporting device 209 approaching the manufacturing equipment from the direction along the Y axis in the direction along the X axis.
  • the docking device 299 includes a docking holding portion 281 that prevents the article transporting device 209 docked in the direction along the Y axis from separating from the manufacturing equipment due to the repulsive force of the cushion member. That is, the positions of the docking base 115 and the docking portion 269 are adjusted in the horizontal plane by the guiding portion 301 and the docking holding portion 281 after docking.
  • the docking device 299 includes a connector connecting portion 305.
  • the connector connecting portion 305 connects the other connector 287 of the article transporting device 209 and the one connector 117 of the manufacturing facility by relatively adjusting the positions as the article transporting device 209 approaches the manufacturing equipment. That is, the docking device 299 adjusts the position in the horizontal plane, and after the position adjustment in the horizontal plane is completed, the connector connecting portion 305 intersects the horizontal plane with one connector 117 and the other connector 287. Adjust the position in the direction (direction along the Z axis) and connect. Thereby, in the article transport system 211, the docking device 299 (joint portion) can absorb the variation in height between the manufacturing equipment and the article transport device 209 by using a simple mechanism.
  • the guide portion 301 has at least one alignment member (for example, X guide 271 and positioning pin guide hole 273) provided on the docking base 115 and at least one aligned portion (for example) provided on the docking portion 269.
  • the guide portion 301 has an X guide roller 277 and a positioning pin 279).
  • the guide portion 301 corrects the trajectory of the aligned portion by the alignment member by moving the aligned portion in the first direction (direction along the Y axis) while bringing the aligned portion into contact with the alignment member. As a result, the position of the article transport device 209 in the second direction (direction along the X axis) is adjusted.
  • the guide portion 301 includes an alignment member and an aligned member.
  • the alignment member of the docking portion 269 comes into contact with the alignment member provided on the docking base 115.
  • the aligned member is displaced along the alignment member, and the docking portion 269 is aligned with the docking base 115 and docked.
  • the article transfer device 209 is aligned with and connected to the manufacturing equipment via the docking unit 269 aligned with the docking base 115.
  • the aligned portion (for example, X guide roller 277, positioning pin 279) has a roller (for example, X guide roller 277) that comes into contact with the alignment member (for example, X guide 271, positioning pin guide hole 273).
  • the alignment member for example, X guide 271, positioning pin guide hole 273
  • the aligned member of the docking portion 269 has an X guide roller 277.
  • the X guide roller 277 rolls in contact with the X guide 271 provided on the docking base 115.
  • a guide slope 425 (see FIG. 30) is formed on the X guide 271.
  • the X guide roller 277 comes into contact with the X guide 271 as the docking portion 269 approaches the docking base 115, and then rolls the guide slope 425 to displace the docking portion 269 by the reaction force from the guide slope 425.
  • the trajectory of the X guide roller 277 is corrected by the X guide 271, whereby the position of the article transport device 209 in the second direction (direction along the X axis) is adjusted.
  • the cushioning portion 303 is arranged on one of the docking base 115 and the docking portion 269, and the other has a protrusion 319 that abuts on the cushioning portion 303 from the first direction and deforms the cushion member.
  • the cushioning portion 303 is arranged on one of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269, and the protrusion 319 is arranged on the other side.
  • the cushioning portion 303 is arranged on the docking base 115, and the protrusion 319 is arranged on the docking portion 269.
  • the cushioning portion 303 is brought into contact with the protruding portion 319 when the docking portion 269 approaches.
  • the cushioning portion 303 is displaced in a direction ( ⁇ Y direction) opposite to the approaching direction (direction along the Y axis) of the protrusion 319, and absorbs the impact when the protrusion 319 collides. Further, the cushioning portion 303 is displaced in the direction opposite to the approaching direction of the protruding portion 319, and then pushes back the protruding portion 319 by the elastic rebound force.
  • the docking holding portion 281 is arranged on one of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269, and at least one held member (hook 285) held by the docking holding portion 281 is arranged on the other side. Will be done.
  • the docking holding portion 281 is arranged on one of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269, and the held member is arranged on the other.
  • the docking holding portion 281 is arranged on the docking base 115, and the held member is arranged on the docking portion 269.
  • the held member is held by the docking portion 269.
  • the protrusion 319 receives a reaction force from the cushioning portion 303 by pressing the cushioning portion 303.
  • the reaction force presses the docking portion 269 in a direction away from the docking base 115, but the docking portion 269 in which the held member is held by the docking holding portion 281 is restricted from being docked from the docking base 115.
  • the position of the article transfer device 209 is adjusted in the direction along the Y axis without causing rattling with respect to the manufacturing equipment.
  • the docking holding portion 281 abuts on the held member (for example, hook 285) from a third direction intersecting with the first direction (direction along the Y axis).
  • the held member includes a holding force generating portion 325 that swivels the lever 323 and presses the docking roller 331 against the held member, and the held member is manufactured by moving the article transporting device 209 in the first direction. It has a roller operating surface (for example, a rear taper 337) that displaces the docking roller 331 in a direction opposite to the third direction and then displaces it in a third direction as it approaches.
  • the docking roller 331 provided in the manufacturing facility abuts on the hook 285 of the article transport device 209 from the third direction.
  • the docking roller 331 is supported by the lever 323.
  • the lever 323 presses the docking roller 331 against the lever 323 by the holding force generating portion 325.
  • the hook 285 comes into contact with the docking roller 331, the hook 285 displaces the docking roller 331 in a direction opposite to the third direction.
  • the docking roller 331 displaced in the direction opposite to the third direction reaches the roller operation surface (for example, the rear taper 337) of the hook 285, and the holding force generating portion 325. It is displaced in the third direction again by the urging force of.
  • the connector connecting portion 305 includes a connector position adjusting mechanism 289 arranged on one of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269 and an alignment member arranged on the other, and the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 includes. It has an elevating member 291 whose height position is adjusted by the alignment member by moving up and down together with the other connector 287 and moving in the first direction (direction along the Y axis) while contacting the alignment member (cam follower 295). ..
  • the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 has an elevating member 291.
  • the elevating member 291 moves in the vertical direction when the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 moves in the direction along the Y axis and comes into contact with the alignment member. That is, the other connector 287 provided on the elevating member 291 also moves in the vertical direction.
  • the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 and the alignment member are provided on the docking portion 269. As a result, the other connector 287 moves in the vertical direction together with the elevating member 291 as the docking portion 269 approaches the docking base 115, and the position in the vertical direction with respect to one connector 117 of the docking base 115 is set. It will be adjusted automatically.
  • the connector connecting portion 305 includes a connector pressing portion 339 which is arranged on one of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269 and presses one of the arranged connectors 117 against the other connector 287.
  • the connector connecting portion 305 has a connector pressing portion 339.
  • the connector pressing portion 339 is arranged on one of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269, and one connector 117 arranged on one of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269 is pressed against the other connector 287.
  • the connector pressing portion 339 is arranged on the docking portion 269. Therefore, the connector pressing portion 339 provided on the docking portion 269 presses the other connector 287 provided on the docking portion 269 against the one connector 117 (see FIG. 35) provided on the docking base 115.
  • the one connector 117 and the other connector 287 are urged in the coupling direction, so that the terminals are kept in a stable contact state.
  • At least one positioning pin 279 protruding in the first direction is provided on one of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269, and the other is provided with the positioning pin from the first direction.
  • a positioning pin guide member 275 having at least one positioning pin guide hole 273 into which the 279 is inserted is provided.
  • the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269 has a positioning pin 279, and the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269 has a positioning pin guide member 275 on the other side.
  • the positioning pin 279 is arranged in the docking portion 269, and the positioning pin guide member 275 is arranged in the docking base 115.
  • the positioning pin guide member 275 has at least one positioning pin guide hole 273 into which the positioning pin 279 is inserted from the first direction.
  • the docking portion 269 is positioned along the X axis with respect to the docking base 115 by inserting the positioning pin 279 into the positioning pin guide hole 273.
  • the article transfer system 211 includes at least one manufacturing facility installed on the factory floor and at least one article transfer device 209 moving on the factory floor, and includes a manufacturing facility (for example, a tray parts stock device 29) and an article transfer device 209.
  • a manufacturing facility for example, a tray parts stock device 29
  • An article eg, pallet 39
  • the article transport system 211 is located in an article storage body (for example, a magazine 41) capable of storing at least one article and a first region provided in the manufacturing facility and which is a part of a plan-projected region of the article storage body.
  • a first support table (for example, a slide table 127) that supports a plurality of parts of the article storage body from below, and another part of the plane projection area, which is provided on the article transfer device 209 and does not overlap with the first area.
  • a second support table (for example, a first magazine holding table 225, a second magazine holding table 227) that supports other plurality of parts of the article storage body located in the second region from below, and an article storage body are supported.
  • the second area of the article storage body is positioned above the second support table by moving the first support table to the empty second support table, or the empty first support table is moved to the second support table.
  • a first support table moving device (advance / retreat drive unit 129) and a second support table that position the first support table below the second region of the article storage body supported by the second support table by moving toward. Is transferred from a position lower than the first support table to a higher position to deliver the article storage body supported by the first support table to the second support table, or the second support table is transferred from the first support table. It is provided with a rack elevating device 229 that transfers an article storage body supported by the second support table to the first support table by moving it from a high position to a low position.
  • the manufacturing equipment has a first support table that moves back and forth in the horizontal plane.
  • the article transfer device 209 has a second support table that moves up and down in a direction orthogonal to the horizontal plane.
  • the first support table and the second support table are arranged in one plane projection region in a state where the first support table is advanced into the article transport device.
  • the first support table arranged in one plane projection area is located in the first area.
  • the second support table arranged in one plane projection area is located in the second area which does not overlap with the first area.
  • the second support table can move up and down relative to the first support table by driving the rack elevating device 229 while the first support table is in the article transport device.
  • the second support table is formed in a U shape having a slide table passage space 359.
  • the second support table allows the slide table passage space 359 to pass (pass) the first support table from above and below.
  • the article transfer system 211 is mounted on the first support table by raising and lowering the second support table by the rack elevating device 229 and passing the first support table through the slide table passage space 359 of the second support table.
  • the magazine 41 can be delivered to the second support table. Further, the magazine 41 placed on the second support table can be delivered to the first support table.
  • the manufacturing equipment needs only be provided with the minimum necessary advance / retreat drive unit 129 for advancing / retreating the slide table 127 in the horizontal plane.
  • the article transporting device 209 also needs to be provided with only the minimum required rack lifting device 229 for raising and lowering the first support table.
  • the rack lifting device 229 is provided in the article transport device 209, the load of the load (for example, the magazine 41) does not move in the horizontal plane.
  • the article transporting device 209 can be driven by suppressing the fall with the base portion 217 having a small area, as compared with the case where the robot arm or the crane that moves the load in the horizontal plane is adopted. That is, the article transport device 209 can be made compact.
  • the magazine 41 can be delivered between the manufacturing equipment and the automatic guided vehicle (for example, the article transport device 209) by using a simple mechanism. Further, since the article transfer system 211 only needs to be provided with the rack lifting device 229 as the transfer mechanism, the article transfer system 211 is significantly smaller than a system using an expensive and complicated device such as a robot arm or a crane. It becomes possible to change.
  • the article accommodating body (for example, the magazine 41) has a plurality of first alignment portions (for example, the first alignment group 103) in the first region F1 and a plurality of first alignment portions in the second region F2. It has two alignment portions (for example, a second alignment group 107), and a first support table (for example, a slide table 127) contacts a plurality of first alignment portions to adjust the position of the article storage body with respect to the first support table.
  • the second support table (for example, the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227) has a plurality of first alignment guides 363 and comes into contact with the plurality of second alignment portions to make the article storage body first. 2 It has a plurality of second alignment guides 361 for adjusting the position with respect to the support table.
  • the slide table 127 has a plurality of first alignment guides 363.
  • the plurality of first alignment guides 363 come into contact with the plurality of first alignment portions to adjust the position of the magazine 41 with respect to the slide table 127.
  • the second support table has a plurality of second alignment guides 361.
  • the second alignment guide 361 contacts the plurality of second alignment portions and adjusts the position of the magazine 41 with respect to the second support table.
  • At least one of the plurality of first alignment guides 363 adjusts the position of the article accommodating body in the horizontal first direction (direction along the X axis), and at least one of the other is.
  • the position of the article storage body is adjusted in the second direction (direction along the Y axis) orthogonal to the first direction in the horizontal plane, and at least one of the plurality of second alignment guides 361 is the article in the horizontal third direction.
  • the position of the housing is adjusted, and at least the other one adjusts the position of the article storage in the fourth direction orthogonal to the third direction in the horizontal plane.
  • the first alignment guide 363 has four X alignment guides 181 and four Y alignment guides 187 shown in FIG. At least one of the first alignment guides 363 (X alignment guide 181) adjusts the position of the magazine 41 with respect to the slide table 127 in the horizontal first direction (direction along the X axis). At least one of the first alignment guides 363 (Y alignment guide 187) positions the magazine 41 on the slide table 127 in the second direction (direction along the Y axis) orthogonal to the first direction in the horizontal plane. Adjust for.
  • the second alignment guide 361 has an X alignment roller 255 and a Y alignment member 259. At least one of the plurality of second alignment guides 361 (X alignment roller 93) positions the magazine 41 in a horizontal third direction (for example, a direction along the X axis), the first magazine holding table 225, and the second. Adjust with respect to the magazine holding table 227. At least one of the plurality of second alignment guides 361 (Y alignment member 259) positions the magazine 41 in a fourth direction (for example, a direction along the Y axis) orthogonal to the third direction in the horizontal plane. The magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227 are adjusted.
  • the article is a pallet 39 holding a tray 31 containing the parts 33
  • the article storage body is a magazine 41 storing a plurality of pallets 39.
  • the article is a pallet 39 holding a tray 31 containing a plurality of components 33 (for example, board-mounted components).
  • the article storage body is a magazine 41 that stores a plurality of pallets 39. Therefore, the magazine 41 accommodates a large number of parts 33.
  • the article transport system 211 delivers this large number of articles in magazine units. That is, the article transport system 211 enables the supply of articles in magazine units and the collection of magazines 41.
  • the article transport device 209 includes a base portion 217 having wheels 215 for traveling on the factory floor, and the base portion 217 is a manufacturing facility in which the base portion 217 moves in the first direction. Further has a docking section 269 that docks to the docking base 115 of the manufacturing equipment by approaching.
  • the article transfer device 209 includes a docking unit 269.
  • the docking unit 269 can be docked to the docking base 115 of the manufacturing equipment.
  • the article transport system 211 is a simple mechanism because the article transport device 209 provided with the rack lifting device 229 and the manufacturing equipment provided with the slide table 127 are positioned with high accuracy by the docking device 299.
  • the magazine 41 can be delivered between the manufacturing equipment and the automatic guided vehicle (article transport device 209).
  • the article transport device 209 is an article transport device 209 that transports articles (pallets 39) used in at least one manufacturing facility (tray parts stock device 29) installed on the factory floor on the factory floor. It can be raised and lowered with respect to the base portion 217 having wheels 215 for traveling on the floor, the docking portion 269 for docking the base portion 217 to the manufacturing equipment, and the base portion 217, and holds the article storage body (magazine 41).
  • a storage rack (magazine storage rack 223) having at least one holding table (first magazine holding table 225, second magazine holding table 227), a rack elevating device 229 for raising and lowering the storage rack, and the height of the storage rack.
  • a position detection unit encoder 387) that detects the position in the direction, and a reference height detection unit (reference height) that detects a reference point (hole 419 of the reference height marker 417) provided in the manufacturing equipment by moving up and down together with the storage rack.
  • the rack elevating device 229 is operated with the base unit 217 docked to the manufacturing equipment by the detection sensor 251) and the docking unit 269 to detect the reference point by the reference height detection unit, and the reference height detection unit detects the reference point.
  • the position obtained by the position detection unit at the time of detection is set to the reference height, and the rack elevating device 229 is operated based on the reference height to transfer the article storage body between the holding table and the manufacturing equipment. It includes a control unit (magazine transfer device control unit 247) for execution.
  • the base unit 217 is docked to the manufacturing equipment by the docking unit 269.
  • the article transfer device 209 can freely travel in the passage 15 on the factory floor by the wheels 215 provided on the base portion 217.
  • the article transport device 209 that travels on the factory floor and arrives at the manufacturing equipment is integrally connected to the manufacturing equipment by docking with the docking unit 269.
  • the article transfer device 209 includes a storage rack for holding the magazine 41 on the holding table.
  • the storage rack can be raised and lowered by driving the rack raising and lowering device 229 while holding the magazine 41 on the holding table.
  • the article transfer device 209 has a position detection unit that detects a position in the height direction of the storage rack that moves up and down. Further, the article transfer device 209 includes a reference height setting unit 397 for detecting a reference point provided in the manufacturing equipment.
  • the article transfer device 209 includes a control unit that operates the rack elevating device 229 and detects a reference point by the reference height detection unit in a state where the base unit 217 is docked to the manufacturing equipment by the docking unit 269.
  • the control unit sets the position obtained by the position detection unit to the reference height when the reference height detection unit detects the reference point.
  • the control unit operates the rack elevating device 229 to a predetermined height (1st level Lv1 to 4th level Lv4) based on the reference height, and transfers the article storage body between the holding table and the manufacturing equipment. To execute.
  • the manufacturing equipment and the article transport device 209 which are not necessarily located on the same plane, are first aligned in the horizontal plane by the docking unit 269, and then the relative position in the height direction with the manufacturing equipment. Can be obtained as the reference height.
  • the delivery height of the magazine 41 can be adjusted between the manufacturing equipment and the automatic guided vehicle (article transfer device 209) by using a simple mechanism.
  • the manufacturing equipment has a slide table 127 that holds the article storage body and moves in the horizontal direction, and the delivery work is performed by the slide table 127 projecting into the internal space of the holding table and the storage rack.
  • the control unit (magazine transfer device control unit 247) transfers the holding table to and from the first level Lv1 lower than the slide table 127 and the second level Lv2 higher than the slide table 127.
  • the positioning height to be positioned is determined based on the reference height and the article storage body is transferred from the slide table 127 to the holding table, the storage rack is moved from the first level to the second level by the rack lifting device 229 and held.
  • the storage rack is moved from the second level to the first level by the rack elevating device 229.
  • the manufacturing equipment includes a slide table 127 for holding the magazine 41.
  • the slide table 127 can move forward and backward into the internal space of the storage rack provided in the article transport device 209.
  • the magazine 41 is delivered between the slide table 127 protruding into the internal space and the holding table of the storage rack.
  • the transfer from the slide table 127 to the holding table can be performed by moving the storage rack from the first level to the second level.
  • the transfer from the holding table to the slide table 127 can be performed by moving the storage rack from the second level to the first level.
  • the height of the holding table (for example, the first level Lv1 and the second level Lv2) set at the time of these delivery is obtained by the control unit.
  • the article transport device 209 is an article transport device 209 that transports articles (for example, pallets 39) used in at least one manufacturing facility (for example, tray parts stock device 29) installed on the factory floor on the factory floor.
  • An article storage body for example, a magazine 41 for storing at least one article, a base portion 217 having wheels 215 for traveling on the factory floor, a docking portion 269 for docking the base portion 217 to a manufacturing facility, and a base portion.
  • a storage rack for example, magazine storage rack 223 that can be raised and lowered with respect to 217 and has at least one holding table (for example, a first magazine holding table 225 and a second magazine holding table 227) for holding an article storage body.
  • a rack lifting device 229 that raises and lowers the storage rack, a position detection unit (for example, encoder 387) that detects the position of the storage rack in the height direction, and a reference that moves up and down together with the storage rack to detect a reference point provided in the manufacturing equipment.
  • a height detection unit for example, a reference height detection sensor 251
  • a control unit for example, a magazine transfer device control unit 247 that is connected to the position detection unit and the reference height detection unit and controls the rack elevating device 229 are provided.
  • the control unit operates the rack elevating device 229 with the base unit 217 docked to the manufacturing equipment by the docking unit 269 to detect the reference point by the reference height detection unit, and the reference height detection unit detects the reference point.
  • the positioning height calculation unit 399 that calculates a plurality of positioning heights
  • the delivery work execution unit for example, the first carry-in unit 401, the first carry-in unit 401, No. 1 that controls the rack elevating device 229 based on the plurality of positioning heights to execute the delivery work. 1 Carrying out unit 403) and.
  • the base unit 217 is docked to the manufacturing equipment by the docking unit 269.
  • the article transfer device 209 can freely travel in the passage 15 on the factory floor by the wheels 215 provided on the base portion 217.
  • the article transport device 209 that travels on the factory floor and arrives at the manufacturing equipment is integrally connected to the manufacturing equipment by docking with the docking unit 269.
  • the article transfer device 209 includes a storage rack for holding the magazine 41 on the holding table.
  • the storage rack can be raised and lowered by driving the rack raising and lowering device 229 while holding the magazine 41 on the holding table.
  • the article transfer device 209 has a position detection unit that detects a position in the height direction of the storage rack that moves up and down.
  • the article transfer device 209 includes a reference height setting unit 397 for detecting a reference point provided in the manufacturing equipment.
  • the article transfer device 209 has a plurality of positioning heights (for example, first) of the storage rack for transferring the article storage body to and from the manufacturing equipment based on the reference height set by the reference height setting unit 397. Level Lv1 to 4th level Lv4) are calculated by the positioning height calculation unit 399.
  • the rack elevating device 229 is controlled by the delivery work execution unit, and the delivery work of the magazine 41 is executed at a plurality of positioning heights.
  • the article transporting device 209 first aligns the manufacturing equipment and the article transporting device 209, which are not necessarily located on the same plane, in the horizontal plane by the docking unit 269, and then positions relative to the manufacturing equipment in the height direction. Can be obtained as the reference height.
  • the delivery height of the magazine 41 can be adjusted between the manufacturing equipment and the automatic guided vehicle (for example, the article transfer device 209) by using a simple mechanism.
  • the manufacturing equipment has a slide table 127 that holds the article storage body and moves in the horizontal direction, and the delivery work is performed by the slide table 127 projecting into the internal space of the holding table and the storage rack. It is a work of handing over the article storage body to and from, and the positioning height calculation unit 399 at least holds the holding table at the first level lower than the slide table 127 (for example, the first level Lv1) and higher than the slide table 127.
  • the positioning height to be positioned at the second level for example, the second level Lv2
  • the delivery work execution unit moves the storage rack from the first level to the second level by the rack elevating device 229, and slides the article storage body 127.
  • the storage rack is moved from the second level to the first level by the loading unit (for example, the first loading unit 401) to be delivered from the holding table to the holding table, and the storage rack is transferred from the holding table to the slide table 127 by the rack elevating device 229.
  • the loading unit for example, the first loading unit 401
  • the storage rack is transferred from the holding table to the slide table 127 by the rack elevating device 229.
  • It includes a carry-out unit (for example, a first carry-out unit 403).
  • the manufacturing equipment includes a slide table 127 for holding the magazine 41.
  • the slide table 127 can move forward and backward into the internal space of the storage rack provided in the article transport device 209.
  • the magazine 41 is delivered between the slide table 127 protruding into the internal space and the holding table of the storage rack.
  • the transfer from the slide table 127 to the holding table can be performed by moving the storage rack from the first level to the second level.
  • the transfer from the holding table to the slide table 127 can be performed by moving the storage rack from the second level to the first level.
  • the height of the holding table (for example, the first level Lv1 and the second level Lv2) set at the time of these delivery is obtained by the control unit.
  • the carrying-in unit executes a process of loading the magazine 41 into the holding table
  • the carrying-out unit executes a process of carrying out the magazine 41 from the holding table.
  • the article transport device 209 allows the slide table 127 that has entered the internal space of the magazine storage rack 223 to pass (pass) the holding table of the magazine storage rack 223 from above and below, and the slide table 127 and the holding table
  • the transfer of the magazine 41 between the two is realized by using a simple mechanism.
  • This disclosure is useful as an article transporting device that can automatically replenish and collect parts storage bodies with manufacturing equipment using a simple mechanism.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Supply And Installment Of Electrical Components (AREA)

Abstract

This article conveyor conveys, over a plant floor, articles used in at least one piece of manufacturing equipment installed on the plant floor. This article conveyor comprises: an article accommodation body that accommodates at least one article; a base part having wheels for traveling over the plant floor; an accommodation rack that can be raised and lowered in relation to the base part, that has at least one holding table that holds the article accommodation body, and that has an opening through which the article accommodation body can be taken out and inserted from the lateral direction of the holding table; and a rack raising and lowering device that raises and lowers the accommodation rack.

Description

物品搬送装置Goods transfer device
 本開示は、物品搬送装置に関する。 This disclosure relates to an article transport device.
 部品を適切に管理できる部品搬送装置が提案されている(特許文献1参照)。この部品搬送装置は、部品を支持するトレイが搭載される搭載部と、走行面に接触可能な車輪とを有するカートと、連結機構を介してカートと相対移動可能に連結され、走行面を走行する無人搬送車とを備える。カートは、トレイを支持可能な昇降部材を有するエレベータ装置に設けられた通路空間に進入して、昇降部材との間でトレイを搬送する。 A parts transfer device capable of appropriately managing parts has been proposed (see Patent Document 1). This parts transfer device is connected to a cart having a mounting portion on which a tray for supporting parts is mounted and wheels that can contact the traveling surface, and is movably connected to the cart via a connecting mechanism, and travels on the traveling surface. It is equipped with an automatic guided vehicle. The cart enters the aisle space provided in the elevator device having the elevating member capable of supporting the tray, and conveys the tray to and from the elevating member.
日本国特開2019-91770号公報Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-91770
 しかしながら、従来の部品搬送装置を有する部品実装システムでは、無人搬送車を使った物品の受け渡しの自動化が試みられているが、大掛かりなエレベータ装置を設置しなければならず、複雑で高価な設備が必要となった。また、製造設備と無人搬送車との間で物品を受け渡しするための実用的な技術は開示されていない。 However, in the conventional component mounting system having a component transfer device, an attempt is made to automate the delivery of goods using an automatic guided vehicle, but a large-scale elevator device must be installed, which requires complicated and expensive equipment. It became necessary. In addition, practical techniques for delivering goods between manufacturing equipment and automatic guided vehicles are not disclosed.
 本開示は、上述した従来の状況に鑑みて案出され、単純な機構を用いて製造設備との間で部品収納体を自動で補給および回収できる物品搬送装置を提供することを目的とする。 The present disclosure is devised in view of the above-mentioned conventional situation, and an object of the present disclosure is to provide an article transporting device capable of automatically replenishing and collecting a component storage body with a manufacturing facility by using a simple mechanism.
 本開示は、工場フロアに設置された少なくとも一つの製造設備で使用する物品を工場フロア上で搬送する物品搬送装置であって、少なくとも一つの物品を収納する物品収納体と、前記工場フロアを走行するための車輪を有するベース部と、前記ベース部に対して昇降可能であり、前記物品収納体を保持する保持テーブルを少なくとも一つ有し、前記保持テーブルの横方向から前記物品収納体を出し入れ可能な開口を有する収納ラックと、前記収納ラックを昇降させるラック昇降装置と、を備える、物品搬送装置を提供する。 The present disclosure is an article transport device for transporting articles used in at least one manufacturing facility installed on a factory floor on the factory floor, the article storage body for accommodating at least one article, and traveling on the factory floor. It has at least one holding table that can move up and down with respect to the base portion and holds the article storage body, and the article storage body is taken in and out from the lateral direction of the holding table. Provided is an article transport device including a storage rack having a possible opening and a rack elevating device for raising and lowering the storage rack.
 本開示によれば、単純な機構を用いて製造設備との間で部品収納体を自動で補給および回収できる。 According to the present disclosure, the parts storage body can be automatically replenished and collected from the manufacturing equipment by using a simple mechanism.
実施の形態1に係る部品装着システムを設置した工場フロアの平面図Top view of the factory floor where the component mounting system according to the first embodiment is installed. 図1に示した部品装着システムの全体構成図Overall configuration diagram of the component mounting system shown in FIG. 図2に示した部品装着システムの断面構造を示す概念図Conceptual diagram showing the cross-sectional structure of the component mounting system shown in FIG. トレイが載置されたパレットの斜視図Perspective view of the pallet on which the tray is placed 図4に示したパレットの分解斜視図An exploded perspective view of the pallet shown in FIG. パレットを収納したマガジンの斜視図Perspective view of the magazine containing the pallets マガジンを斜め下方から見た斜視図Perspective view of the magazine from diagonally below 図2に示したトレイ部品ストック装置の斜視図Perspective view of the tray component stocking apparatus shown in FIG. トレイ部品ストック装置の内部を通路側より見た概略の構成図Schematic configuration diagram of the inside of the tray parts stock device as seen from the aisle side トレイ部品ストック装置とトレイ部品供給装置のレイアウトを示す平面図Plan view showing layout of tray parts stocking device and tray parts supply device トレイ部品ストック装置のブロック図Block diagram of tray parts stock equipment パレットストック部からパレットを引き出す直前のパレット搬送部の動作説明図Operation explanatory diagram of the pallet transport section immediately before pulling out the pallet from the pallet stock section パレットストック部からパレットを引き出し終えたパレット搬送部の動作説明図Operation explanatory diagram of the pallet transport unit that has finished pulling out the pallet from the pallet stock unit. 時計回りに引き出し装置が回転したパレット搬送部の動作説明図Operational illustration of the pallet carrier with the drawer device rotated clockwise トレイ部品供給装置にパレットを挿入したパレット搬送部の動作説明図Operational illustration of the pallet carrier with the pallet inserted in the tray parts supply device スライドテーブルが収納されたスライドテーブル装置の平面図Plan view of the slide table device in which the slide table is housed スライドテーブルの斜視図Side view of slide table スライドテーブルが進出したスライドテーブル装置の平面図Plan view of the slide table device in which the slide table has advanced スライドテーブル装置を通路側より見た正面図Front view of the slide table device from the aisle side 進退駆動源にエアシリンダを用いた進退機構の概念図Conceptual diagram of an advancing / retreating mechanism using an air cylinder as an advancing / retreating drive source 進退駆動源にモータを用いた進退機構の概念図Conceptual diagram of the advancing / retreating mechanism using a motor as the advancing / retreating drive source 進退機構のストローク可変構造を示す概念図Conceptual diagram showing the variable stroke structure of the advancing / retreating mechanism スライドテーブルに位置決めされて載置されたマガジンの斜視図Perspective view of the magazine positioned and placed on the slide table スライドテーブルにおける主にXアライメントガイドによる位置決め動作の説明図Explanatory drawing of positioning operation mainly by X alignment guide on slide table スライドテーブルにおける主にYアライメントガイドによる位置決め動作の説明図Explanatory drawing of positioning operation mainly by Y alignment guide on slide table 実施の形態2に係る物品搬送装置を備えた物品搬送システムの全体構成図Overall configuration diagram of the article transport system including the article transport device according to the second embodiment. 物品搬送装置の斜視図Perspective view of the article transfer device 物品搬送装置の側断面図Side sectional view of the article transfer device 図28のB-B断面図BB sectional view of FIG. 28 ドッキングベースの斜視図Docking base perspective ドッキング部の斜視図Perspective view of the docking part 物品搬送装置に設けられるドッキング部の平面図Plan view of the docking part provided in the article transporting device 図32のC-C断面図FIG. 32 is a sectional view taken along the line CC. ドッキング前の緩衝部およびドッキング保持部の概念図Conceptual diagram of cushioning part and docking holding part before docking ドッキングによる水平方向の位置決め動作の説明図Explanatory drawing of horizontal positioning operation by docking ドッキングによる上下方向の位置決め動作の説明図Explanatory drawing of vertical positioning operation by docking ドッキング後におけるドッキング保持部の概念図Conceptual diagram of the docking holding part after docking マガジン収納ラックの斜視図Perspective view of magazine storage rack 第1支持テーブルと第2支持テーブルの支持領域を示す説明図Explanatory drawing which shows the support area of the 1st support table and the 2nd support table スライドテーブルがマガジン収納ラックに進出した状態を示す平面図Plan view showing the state where the slide table has advanced to the magazine storage rack 保持テーブルの斜視図Perspective view of holding table マガジンに設けられる第2アライメント部と保持テーブルに設けられる第2アライメントガイドとを示す要部拡大斜視図Enlarged perspective view of the main part showing the second alignment part provided in the magazine and the second alignment guide provided in the holding table. マガジン収納ラックを透視した斜視図Perspective view of the magazine storage rack 図43に示したスライドロック部の動作を説明する要部拡大平面図An enlarged plan view of a main part for explaining the operation of the slide lock part shown in FIG. 43. 物品搬送装置の制御系を示すブロック図Block diagram showing the control system of the article transfer device ドッキング後に動力用電源パワーがONされるまでの手順を示すフローチャートFlow chart showing the procedure until the power supply for power is turned on after docking ドッキング後の物品搬送装置とトレイ部品ストック装置の位置関係を示す説明図Explanatory drawing showing the positional relationship between the article transporting device and the tray parts stocking device after docking. マガジン収納ラックの位置決め高さの説明図Explanatory drawing of positioning height of magazine storage rack マガジン受渡し動作の説明図Explanatory diagram of magazine delivery operation 位置決め高さ設定処理を示すフローチャートFlowchart showing positioning height setting process 基準高さ標識の検出原理の説明図Explanatory diagram of the detection principle of the reference height sign 第1のマガジン保持テーブルへの搬入の手順を示すマガジン受渡し動作のフローチャートFlow chart of magazine delivery operation showing the procedure of carrying in to the first magazine holding table 第1搬入部の処理によるトレイ部品ストック装置からの搬出動作の説明図Explanatory drawing of the unloading operation from the tray parts stocking device by the processing of the first loading section 第1搬入部の処理による第1のマガジン保持テーブルへの搬入動作の説明図Explanatory drawing of the loading operation to the first magazine holding table by the processing of the first loading section 第1搬入部の処理による第1のマガジン保持テーブルへの搬入動作の説明図Explanatory drawing of the loading operation to the first magazine holding table by the processing of the first loading section 第2のマガジン保持テーブルへの搬入の手順を示すマガジン受渡し動作のフローチャートFlow chart of magazine delivery operation showing the procedure of carrying in to the second magazine holding table 第2のマガジン保持テーブルからの搬出の手順を示すマガジン受渡し動作のフローチャートFlow chart of magazine delivery operation showing the procedure of carrying out from the second magazine holding table 第2搬出部の処理による第2のマガジン保持テーブルからの搬出動作の説明図Explanatory drawing of the operation of carrying out from the second magazine holding table by the processing of the second carrying out unit. 第2搬出部の処理による第2のマガジン保持テーブルからの搬出動作の説明図Explanatory drawing of the operation of carrying out from the second magazine holding table by the processing of the second carrying out unit. 第2搬出部の処理によるトレイ部品ストック装置への搬入動作の説明図Explanatory drawing of the loading operation to the tray parts stock device by the processing of the second unloading section 第1のマガジン保持テーブルからの搬出の手順を示すマガジン受渡し動作のフローチャートFlow chart of magazine delivery operation showing the procedure of carrying out from the first magazine holding table
 以下、適宜図面を参照しながら、本開示に係るトレイ部品ストック装置、部品装着システム、物品搬送装置および物品搬送システムを具体的に開示した実施の形態を詳細に説明する。但し、必要以上に詳細な説明は省略する場合がある。例えば、既によく知られた事項の詳細説明や実質的に同一の構成に対する重複説明を省略する場合がある。これは、以下の説明が不必要に冗長になることを避け、当業者の理解を容易にするためである。なお、添付図面および以下の説明は、当業者が本開示を十分に理解するために提供されるものであり、これらにより特許請求の範囲に記載の主題を限定することは意図されていない。 Hereinafter, embodiments in which the tray parts stock device, the parts mounting system, the article transfer device, and the article transfer system according to the present disclosure are specifically disclosed will be described in detail with reference to the drawings as appropriate. However, more detailed explanation than necessary may be omitted. For example, detailed explanations of already well-known matters and duplicate explanations for substantially the same configuration may be omitted. This is to avoid unnecessary redundancy of the following description and to facilitate the understanding of those skilled in the art. It should be noted that the accompanying drawings and the following description are provided for those skilled in the art to fully understand the present disclosure, and are not intended to limit the subject matter described in the claims.
(実施の形態1)
 先ず、実施の形態1について説明する。
(Embodiment 1)
First, the first embodiment will be described.
 図1は、実施の形態1に係る部品装着システム11を設置した工場フロアの平面図である。以下、方向を示す矢印が記された図において、X軸は部品装着装置13の左右方向、Y軸は部品装着装置13の前後方向、Z軸は部品装着装置13の上下方向を示す。X軸およびY軸は直交して水平面に含まれる。Z軸は水平面に直交する鉛直面に含まれる。 FIG. 1 is a plan view of a factory floor on which the component mounting system 11 according to the first embodiment is installed. Hereinafter, in the figure with arrows indicating the directions, the X-axis indicates the left-right direction of the component mounting device 13, the Y-axis indicates the front-rear direction of the component mounting device 13, and the Z-axis indicates the vertical direction of the component mounting device 13. The X-axis and Y-axis are orthogonal to each other and are included in the horizontal plane. The Z axis is included in the vertical plane orthogonal to the horizontal plane.
 図1に示すように、工場フロアには、複数の部品装着装置13のそれぞれが通路幅W1の通路15に沿うように近接させて並べて設けられる。それぞれの部品装着装置13には、X軸方向を基板17の搬送方向とした複数の平行な基板搬送コンベア19が、複数の部品装着装置13のそれぞれに渡って設けられる。部品装着装置13には、スティックフィーダ21、トレイ部品供給装置23、或いはテープ部品供給装置25等が一体的に接続される。 As shown in FIG. 1, on the factory floor, each of the plurality of component mounting devices 13 is provided side by side so as to be close to each other along the passage 15 having the passage width W1. Each component mounting device 13 is provided with a plurality of parallel substrate transport conveyors 19 having the X-axis direction as the transport direction of the substrate 17 across each of the plurality of component mounting devices 13. A stick feeder 21, a tray component supply device 23, a tape component supply device 25, and the like are integrally connected to the component mounting device 13.
 並設される複数の部品装着装置13は、工場フロアにおける実装ライン27を構成する。特に生産量の大きい工場フロアでは、部品装着装置13の前後を通るX軸に沿う方向の通路15を挟んで複数の実装ライン27が平行に設置される。並設される複数の部品装着装置13のうち、トレイ部品ストック装置29がトレイ部品供給装置23に一体的に接続された部品装着装置13は、部品装着システム11を構成する。 The plurality of component mounting devices 13 installed side by side constitute a mounting line 27 on the factory floor. Especially on the factory floor where the production volume is large, a plurality of mounting lines 27 are installed in parallel with the passage 15 in the direction along the X axis passing in front of and behind the component mounting device 13 interposed therebetween. Of the plurality of component mounting devices 13 installed side by side, the component mounting device 13 in which the tray component stock device 29 is integrally connected to the tray component supply device 23 constitutes the component mounting system 11.
 部品装着システム11では、トレイ部品ストック装置29の長手方向が通路15に沿って設置されることから、隣接する実装ライン27との間における有効な通路幅W2の縮小率が最小限に抑制されている。 In the component mounting system 11, since the longitudinal direction of the tray component stock device 29 is installed along the passage 15, the reduction rate of the effective passage width W2 between the tray component stocking device 29 and the adjacent mounting line 27 is minimized. There is.
 図2は、図1に示した部品装着システム11の全体構成図である。実施の形態1に係る部品装着システム11は、トレイ31(図4参照)に収納された部品33(図4参照)を部品装着部である装着ヘッド35(図3参照)によって取り出して基板17に搭載する部品装着装置13と、トレイ31を装着ヘッド35によって取り出し可能な位置に供給するトレイ部品供給装置23と、トレイ部品供給装置23にトレイ31を補充するトレイ部品ストック装置29と、を備える。 FIG. 2 is an overall configuration diagram of the component mounting system 11 shown in FIG. In the component mounting system 11 according to the first embodiment, the component 33 (see FIG. 4) housed in the tray 31 (see FIG. 4) is taken out by the mounting head 35 (see FIG. 3), which is a component mounting portion, and is mounted on the substrate 17. It includes a component mounting device 13 to be mounted, a tray component supply device 23 that supplies the tray 31 to a position that can be taken out by the mounting head 35, and a tray component stock device 29 that replenishes the tray 31 to the tray component supply device 23.
 部品装着装置13は、部品装着装置本体部37を有する。部品装着装置本体部37は、通路側の面に、トレイ部品供給装置23と、テープ部品供給装置25とが接続される。部品装着装置本体部37には、トレイ部品供給装置23を介してトレイ部品ストック装置29が一体的に接続される。 The component mounting device 13 has a component mounting device main body 37. The tray component supply device 23 and the tape component supply device 25 are connected to the surface of the component mounting device main body 37 on the passage side. The tray component stock device 29 is integrally connected to the component mounting device main body 37 via the tray component supply device 23.
 部品ストック装置の一例としてのトレイ部品ストック装置29は、部品33(図4参照)を格納したトレイ31を載置するパレット39(図4参照)を第1の軸(例えばX軸)に沿って抜き差し可能とするマガジン41を備える。トレイ部品ストック装置29は、ストッカとしての役割を有するパレットストック部43を有する。パレットストック部43は、水平面に沿う面内でX軸と交差する第2の軸(例えばY軸)に沿ってマガジン41を出し入れ可能としている。トレイ部品ストック装置29は、パレット搬送部45を有する。パレット搬送部45は、パレットストック部43に収納されたマガジン41からX軸に沿ってパレット39を搬送する。パレットストック部43からパレット搬送部45により搬送されるパレット39は、トレイ部品供給装置23へ供給される。また、パレット搬送部45は、トレイ部品供給装置23から部品33の消費された(つまりパレット39上の全ての部品33が基板17への搭載に使用された)パレット39を回収のためにパレットストック部43にパレット39を搬送する。 A tray as an example of a component stock device The component stock device 29 has a pallet 39 (see FIG. 4) on which a tray 31 containing a component 33 (see FIG. 4) is placed along a first axis (for example, an X axis). A magazine 41 that can be inserted and removed is provided. The tray component stock device 29 has a pallet stock section 43 that serves as a stocker. The pallet stock portion 43 allows the magazine 41 to be taken in and out along a second axis (for example, the Y axis) that intersects the X axis in a plane along the horizontal plane. The tray component stock device 29 has a pallet transport unit 45. The pallet transport section 45 transports the pallet 39 along the X-axis from the magazine 41 stored in the pallet stock section 43. The pallet 39 conveyed from the pallet stock unit 43 by the pallet transfer unit 45 is supplied to the tray parts supply device 23. Further, the pallet transport unit 45 collects the consumed pallet 39 of the component 33 from the tray component supply device 23 (that is, all the components 33 on the pallet 39 are used for mounting on the substrate 17) for collecting the pallet stock. The pallet 39 is conveyed to the unit 43.
 図3は、図2に示した部品装着システム11の断面構造を示す概念図である。部品装着装置本体部37には、基台47の上面に、基板17をX軸に沿う方向(基板搬送方向)に搬送するための基板搬送コンベア19を有する基板搬送部49が設けられる。基板搬送部49は、部品の装着対象となる基板17を搬送して部品装着装置本体部37の作業位置に位置決めして保持する。基台47の通路側には、トレイ部品供給装置23が配置される。 FIG. 3 is a conceptual diagram showing a cross-sectional structure of the component mounting system 11 shown in FIG. The component mounting device main body 37 is provided with a substrate transfer section 49 having a substrate transfer conveyor 19 for transporting the substrate 17 in a direction along the X axis (board transfer direction) on the upper surface of the base 47. The board transporting unit 49 transports the board 17 to which the component is mounted, positions it at the working position of the component mounting device main body 37, and holds it. A tray component supply device 23 is arranged on the passage side of the base 47.
 トレイ部品供給装置23は、交換用パレット収納部51を有する。交換用パレット収納部51は、複数のマガジン41を上下方向(Z軸に沿う方向)に配置して保持する。トレイ部品供給装置23では、交換用パレット収納部51と基台47との間に、パレットチェンジャ53が設けられる。パレットチェンジャ53は、チェンジャ昇降テーブル55を、パレットチェンジャ昇降部57(図11参照)により昇降する。トレイ部品供給装置23は、パレットチェンジャ53を作動させることにより、交換用パレット収納部51と部品取り出し位置との間でパレット39を移動する。トレイ部品供給装置23は、部品33(図4参照)が格子状配列で格納されたトレイ31を載置しているパレット39を、部品取り出し位置に移動させることにより、部品33を装着ヘッド35に供給する。 The tray parts supply device 23 has a replacement pallet storage unit 51. The replacement pallet storage unit 51 arranges and holds a plurality of magazines 41 in the vertical direction (direction along the Z axis). In the tray component supply device 23, a pallet changer 53 is provided between the replacement pallet storage unit 51 and the base 47. The pallet changer 53 raises and lowers the changer elevating table 55 by the pallet changer elevating portion 57 (see FIG. 11). The tray component supply device 23 moves the pallet 39 between the replacement pallet storage section 51 and the component take-out position by operating the pallet changer 53. The tray component supply device 23 attaches the component 33 to the mounting head 35 by moving the pallet 39 on which the tray 31 in which the component 33 (see FIG. 4) is stored in a grid pattern is placed to the component take-out position. Supply.
 装着ヘッド35は、複数の単位移載ヘッドを備えた多連型ヘッドであり、それぞれの単位移載ヘッドの下端部には吸着ノズルが交換自在に装着される。装着ヘッド35は、リニア駆動機構等からなるY軸に沿う方向のXYテーブル59によってXY方向に移動自在に取り付けられている。装着ヘッド35は、XYテーブル59により、部品取り出し位置と基板搬送部49上の部品装着位置との間を移動自在となっている。 The mounting head 35 is a multi-unit type head provided with a plurality of unit transfer heads, and a suction nozzle is interchangeably mounted on the lower end of each unit transfer head. The mounting head 35 is movably mounted in the XY direction by an XY table 59 in a direction along the Y axis including a linear drive mechanism or the like. The mounting head 35 is movable between the component take-out position and the component mounting position on the board transfer unit 49 by the XY table 59.
 トレイ部品ストック装置29は、パレットストック部43と、パレット搬送部45とを有する。パレットストック部43には、上下方向(Z軸に沿う方向)に所定の間隔を空けて複数のマガジン41が収納されている。上下方向(Z軸に沿う方向)に収納されたそれぞれのマガジン41からは、任意のパレット39がパレット搬送部45によりX軸に沿う方向で抜き差しが可能となっている。パレットストック部43からパレット搬送部45により引き出されたパレット39は、パレット搬送部45によりトレイ部品供給装置23へと移動される。また、パレット搬送部45は、その反対方向のパレット39の移動も可能とする。 The tray parts stock device 29 has a pallet stock unit 43 and a pallet transport unit 45. A plurality of magazines 41 are stored in the pallet stock portion 43 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction (direction along the Z axis). Any pallet 39 can be inserted and removed from each magazine 41 stored in the vertical direction (direction along the Z axis) in the direction along the X axis by the pallet transport unit 45. The pallet 39 pulled out from the pallet stock unit 43 by the pallet transport unit 45 is moved to the tray component supply device 23 by the pallet transport unit 45. Further, the pallet transport unit 45 allows the pallet 39 to move in the opposite direction.
 図4は、トレイ31が載置されたパレット39の斜視図である。図5は、図4に示したパレット39の分解斜視図である。 FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the pallet 39 on which the tray 31 is placed. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the pallet 39 shown in FIG.
 パレット39について説明する。パレット39は、パレット本体61が、平面視で長方形の板状に形成される。パレット39は、一対の平行な長辺部の一方が第1長辺部63となり他方が第2長辺部65となる。実施の形態1では、第1長辺部63がパレット前部となり、第2長辺部65がパレット後部となる。パレット39は、この第1長辺部63または第2長辺部65のいずれか一方が搬送方向の先端側となって搬送される。 The pallet 39 will be described. In the pallet 39, the pallet body 61 is formed in a rectangular plate shape in a plan view. In the pallet 39, one of the pair of parallel long side portions is the first long side portion 63, and the other is the second long side portion 65. In the first embodiment, the first long side portion 63 is the front portion of the pallet, and the second long side portion 65 is the rear portion of the pallet. The pallet 39 is transported with either the first long side portion 63 or the second long side portion 65 being the tip end side in the transport direction.
 パレット39は、少なくとも上面を含む部分が磁性体材料により構成される。パレット39の上面には、樹脂等の非磁性体材料により構成されたトレイ31が載置される。トレイ31には複数の部品33が整列状態に並べられる。トレイ31は、位置決め装置67によって、パレット39の所定の位置に位置決めされた状態で保持される。トレイ31を載置したパレット39は、部品収納体69を構成する。なお、部品収納体69としては、パレット39に部品を載置して収納するものでも良い。また、トレイ31の外形をパレット39と同様にしてトレイ31そのものを部品収納体69として利用しても良い。 The pallet 39 is made of a magnetic material at least in a portion including the upper surface. A tray 31 made of a non-magnetic material such as resin is placed on the upper surface of the pallet 39. A plurality of parts 33 are arranged in an aligned state on the tray 31. The tray 31 is held in a state of being positioned at a predetermined position on the pallet 39 by the positioning device 67. The pallet 39 on which the tray 31 is placed constitutes the component storage body 69. The parts storage body 69 may be one in which parts are placed and stored on the pallet 39. Further, the outer shape of the tray 31 may be the same as that of the pallet 39, and the tray 31 itself may be used as the component storage body 69.
 パレット39の上面には、第1長辺部63と第1長辺部63に隣接する一方の短辺部とのそれぞれに平行な2つのトレイ位置決め片71が直交して固定されている。2つのトレイ位置決め片71は、直交方向に配置されることにより入隅部を有する。トレイ31は、一つの角部をパレット39の入隅部に一致させるようにして、2つの側面をトレイ位置決め片71に押し当てて、パレット39に対する相対位置が位置決めされる。 Two tray positioning pieces 71 parallel to each of the first long side portion 63 and one short side portion adjacent to the first long side portion 63 are orthogonally fixed to the upper surface of the pallet 39. The two tray positioning pieces 71 have an inside corner because they are arranged in the orthogonal direction. The tray 31 is positioned relative to the pallet 39 by pressing the two sides against the tray positioning piece 71 so that one corner is aligned with the inside corner of the pallet 39.
 このようにして位置決めされたパレット上のトレイ31は、トレイ位置決め片71に押し当てられた面と反対側の面に、位置決め装置67が押し当てられてパレット39に固定される。位置決め装置67は、例えばマグネットを有する。位置決め装置67は、磁性体材料からなるパレット39の上面に磁力で強力に固定された状態となる。これにより、トレイ31は、パレット39上での移動が規制されて固定される。このとき位置決め装置67は、2つのレバー部73を両端側に有し(図5参照)、それぞれのレバー部73がパレット39の上面よりも上方に位置する。位置決め装置67は、これらのレバー部73をパレット39の上面に向けて押下することにより、てこの原理でパレット39から容易に取り外しが可能となっている。 The tray 31 on the pallet positioned in this way is fixed to the pallet 39 by pressing the positioning device 67 against the surface opposite to the surface pressed against the tray positioning piece 71. The positioning device 67 has, for example, a magnet. The positioning device 67 is in a state of being strongly fixed to the upper surface of the pallet 39 made of a magnetic material by a magnetic force. As a result, the tray 31 is restricted from moving on the pallet 39 and fixed. At this time, the positioning device 67 has two lever portions 73 on both ends (see FIG. 5), and each lever portion 73 is located above the upper surface of the pallet 39. By pressing these lever portions 73 toward the upper surface of the pallet 39, the positioning device 67 can be easily removed from the pallet 39 by the principle of the lever.
 また、パレット39は、第1長辺部63に第1係合部75が設けられ、第2長辺部65に第2係合部77が設けられる。第1係合部75と第2係合部77は、平面視コ字状に形成された係合爪の開口側が向かいあうようにして配置される。第1係合部75は、第2係合部77よりも係合爪の間隔が大きい。実施の形態1においては、第1係合部75がパレットチェンジャ53のチェンジャ係合ロッド79(図10参照)と係合し、第2係合部77がパレット搬送部45の図10に示す牽引部であるハンドラ係合ロッド81と係合する。 Further, in the pallet 39, the first engaging portion 75 is provided on the first long side portion 63, and the second engaging portion 77 is provided on the second long side portion 65. The first engaging portion 75 and the second engaging portion 77 are arranged so that the opening sides of the engaging claws formed in a U-shape in a plan view face each other. The distance between the engaging claws of the first engaging portion 75 is larger than that of the second engaging portion 77. In the first embodiment, the first engaging portion 75 engages with the changer engaging rod 79 (see FIG. 10) of the pallet changer 53, and the second engaging portion 77 pulls the pallet transporting portion 45 as shown in FIG. It engages with the handler engagement rod 81, which is a portion.
 図6は、パレット39を収納したマガジン41の斜視図である。図7は、マガジン41を斜め下方から見た斜視図である。 FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the magazine 41 containing the pallet 39. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the magazine 41 as viewed from diagonally below.
 マガジン41について説明する。マガジン41は、一対の平行な側板83の上端同士が天板85により連結されるとともに、一対の平行な側板83の下端同士が底板87(図7参照)により連結されて内側収納空間が両側に抜き差し開口部89となって開放した角筒形に形成される。このマガジン41は、X軸に沿う方向の両端が開放側となる向きでパレットストック部43に収納される。換言すれば、一対の側板83は、Y軸に沿う方向に離間した向きでパレットストック部43に収納される。 The magazine 41 will be explained. In the magazine 41, the upper ends of the pair of parallel side plates 83 are connected to each other by the top plate 85, and the lower ends of the pair of parallel side plates 83 are connected to each other by the bottom plate 87 (see FIG. 7), so that the inner storage space is on both sides. It is formed into an open square tube shape as an insertion / removal opening 89. The magazine 41 is stored in the pallet stock portion 43 so that both ends in the direction along the X axis are on the open side. In other words, the pair of side plates 83 are housed in the pallet stock portion 43 in a direction separated from each other along the Y axis.
 それぞれの側板83の内側面には、両端が抜き差し開口部89に渡って延在するリブ91が設けられている。上下方向(Z軸に沿う方向)で隣接するリブ91同士の間隙は、パレット39の一対の平行な短辺部のそれぞれを挿入する。これにより、マガジン41は、内側収納空間(上述参照)において、複数枚のパレット39を上下方向(Z軸に沿う方向)に多段状に収納し、かつ抜き差し開口部89からの抜き差しを可能としている。 On the inner surface of each side plate 83, ribs 91 having both ends extending over the insertion / removal opening 89 are provided. The gap between the ribs 91 adjacent to each other in the vertical direction (direction along the Z axis) inserts each of the pair of parallel short sides of the pallet 39. As a result, the magazine 41 stores a plurality of pallets 39 in a multi-stage shape in the vertical direction (direction along the Z axis) in the inner storage space (see above), and enables insertion and removal from the insertion / removal opening 89. ..
 図6に示すように、それぞれの側板83の外側には、下部側に一対のXアライメントローラ93が設けられている。一対のXアライメントローラ93のそれぞれは、側板83に垂直な回転中心周りに回転自在となる。また、一対の側板83の内側には、両端の抜き差し開口部89に近接する下側に、Yアライメント部95が設けられている。Yアライメント部95にはテーパ面97が形成され、テーパ面97は下側に向かって側板83を薄厚に形成した斜面で形成される。 As shown in FIG. 6, a pair of X alignment rollers 93 are provided on the lower side on the outside of each side plate 83. Each of the pair of X alignment rollers 93 is rotatable around a center of rotation perpendicular to the side plate 83. Further, inside the pair of side plates 83, a Y alignment portion 95 is provided on the lower side close to the insertion / removal openings 89 at both ends. A tapered surface 97 is formed on the Y alignment portion 95, and the tapered surface 97 is formed by a slope formed with a thin side plate 83 toward the lower side.
 図7に示すように、底板87の下面には、4つのYアライメントローラ99が設けられている。それぞれのYアライメントローラ99は、底板87の下面から側板83に垂直な向きで垂下した載置片101に対し、この載置片101に垂直な回転中心周りで回転自在に支持される。上述のXアライメントローラ93と、Yアライメントローラ99とは、第1アライメントグループ103を構成する。 As shown in FIG. 7, four Y alignment rollers 99 are provided on the lower surface of the bottom plate 87. Each Y alignment roller 99 is rotatably supported around a rotation center perpendicular to the mounting piece 101 with respect to the mounting piece 101 hanging from the lower surface of the bottom plate 87 in a direction perpendicular to the side plate 83. The X alignment roller 93 and the Y alignment roller 99 described above form a first alignment group 103.
 底板87の両端の抜き差し開口部89における平行な一対の開口下辺部が、Xアライメント部105となる。上述したテーパ面97を有するYアライメント部95と、Xアライメント部105とは、第2アライメントグループ107を構成する。 The lower side portions of the pair of parallel openings in the insertion / removal openings 89 at both ends of the bottom plate 87 form the X alignment portion 105. The Y alignment unit 95 having the tapered surface 97 and the X alignment unit 105 as described above form a second alignment group 107.
 図8は、図2に示したトレイ部品ストック装置29の斜視図である。パレットストック部43は、マガジン41の収納を可能とした内部空間を形成する筐体(例えばカバー109)を有する。このカバー109は、第2の軸(Y軸)に沿ってマガジン41を出し入れ可能な開口部(例えばマガジン交換用窓111)を備えている。パレットストック部43のマガジン交換用窓111の下部がストックベース部113となる。このストックベース部113には、ドッキングベース115が設けられる。ドッキングベース115は、例えば自走式のマガジン搬送装置(図示略)が使用される場合の接続部分となる。ドッキングベース115は、一方のコネクタ117を備えることにより、トレイ部品ストック装置制御部119(図11参照)と電気的に接続される。また、パレット搬送部45の通路側の外面には、トレイ部品ストック装置制御部119(図11参照)に電気的に接続されたタッチパネル等の操作部121が設けられている。なお、この操作部121は、トレイ部品ストック装置29の構成として省略されてもよい。 FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the tray component stock device 29 shown in FIG. The pallet stock portion 43 has a housing (for example, a cover 109) that forms an internal space that allows the magazine 41 to be stored. The cover 109 is provided with an opening (for example, a magazine replacement window 111) through which the magazine 41 can be taken in and out along the second axis (Y axis). The lower part of the magazine replacement window 111 of the pallet stock portion 43 is the stock base portion 113. A docking base 115 is provided on the stock base portion 113. The docking base 115 is, for example, a connection portion when a self-propelled magazine transfer device (not shown) is used. The docking base 115 is electrically connected to the tray component stock device control unit 119 (see FIG. 11) by providing one connector 117. Further, on the outer surface of the pallet transport unit 45 on the aisle side, an operation unit 121 such as a touch panel electrically connected to the tray component stock device control unit 119 (see FIG. 11) is provided. The operation unit 121 may be omitted as a configuration of the tray component stock device 29.
 トレイ部品ストック装置29には、カバー109の内部空間に、スライドテーブル装置123が配置される。スライドテーブル装置123は、マガジン41を載置し、第2の軸(Y軸)に沿ってマガジン交換用窓111を通過することにより、カバー109の内部空間とカバー109の外側との間でマガジン41を移動(つまり出し入れ)させることができる。 In the tray parts stock device 29, the slide table device 123 is arranged in the internal space of the cover 109. The slide table device 123 mounts the magazine 41 and passes through the magazine replacement window 111 along the second axis (Y axis) so that the magazine can be placed between the internal space of the cover 109 and the outside of the cover 109. 41 can be moved (that is, put in and out).
 図9は、トレイ部品ストック装置29の内部を通路側より見た概略の構成図である。トレイ部品ストック装置29は、上下方向(Z方向に沿う方向)に離間した複数(例えば4段)の固定棚125を有する。このうち、例えば下から2段目の固定棚125には、スライドテーブル装置123が固定される。すなわち、パレットストック部43では、上下4段に収納されたマガジン41のうち、下から2段目のマガジン41がスライドテーブル装置123に載置される。実施の形態1では、下から2段目にスライドテーブル装置123が設置される例を説明するが、スライドテーブル装置123は、上下方向の任意の段に設置されてもよい。また、実施の形態1では、下から2段目のみにスライドテーブル装置123が設置される例を説明するが、スライドテーブル装置123は、複数段に設置されてもよい。 FIG. 9 is a schematic configuration diagram of the inside of the tray parts stock device 29 as viewed from the aisle side. The tray component stock device 29 has a plurality of (for example, four stages) fixed shelves 125 separated in the vertical direction (direction along the Z direction). Of these, for example, the slide table device 123 is fixed to the fixed shelf 125 on the second stage from the bottom. That is, in the pallet stock unit 43, among the magazines 41 stored in the upper and lower four stages, the magazine 41 in the second stage from the bottom is placed on the slide table device 123. In the first embodiment, an example in which the slide table device 123 is installed in the second stage from the bottom will be described, but the slide table device 123 may be installed in any stage in the vertical direction. Further, in the first embodiment, an example in which the slide table device 123 is installed only in the second stage from the bottom will be described, but the slide table device 123 may be installed in a plurality of stages.
 スライドテーブル装置123は、手動によりマガジン41が載るスライドテーブル127(図17参照)を進退駆動することができる。また、スライドテーブル装置123は、進退駆動部129を備えることにより、マガジン41が載るスライドテーブル127を自動でカバー109の外側に突出させるように構成してもよい。この場合、進退駆動部129は、例えば進退駆動源であるエアシリンダ131(図18参照)と、エアシリンダ131へ動作用エアを供給するバルブ等とを含む。 The slide table device 123 can manually drive the slide table 127 (see FIG. 17) on which the magazine 41 is placed. Further, the slide table device 123 may be configured to automatically project the slide table 127 on which the magazine 41 is placed to the outside of the cover 109 by providing the advance / retreat drive unit 129. In this case, the advancing / retreating drive unit 129 includes, for example, an air cylinder 131 (see FIG. 18) which is an advancing / retreating drive source, a valve for supplying operating air to the air cylinder 131, and the like.
 トレイ部品ストック装置29に設けられるパレット搬送部45は、パレットストック部43とトレイ部品供給装置23との間でパレット39を移動するパレットハンドラ133を備える。パレット搬送部45は、上下方向(Z方向に沿う方向)に昇降するパレットハンドラ昇降部135を備える。パレットハンドラ昇降部135は、ストックベース部113に立設されて、パレットストック部43とほぼ同等の高さを有する。パレットハンドラ昇降部135には、起立するストッカ送りねじ(図示略)が設けられる。このストッカ送りねじは、ハンドラ昇降モータ(図示略)により回転される。ストッカ送りねじには、昇降ベースナット部(図示略)が螺合される。 The pallet transport unit 45 provided in the tray parts stock device 29 includes a pallet handler 133 that moves the pallet 39 between the pallet stock unit 43 and the tray parts supply device 23. The pallet transport unit 45 includes a pallet handler elevating unit 135 that moves up and down in the vertical direction (direction along the Z direction). The pallet handler elevating portion 135 is erected on the stock base portion 113 and has a height substantially equal to that of the pallet stock portion 43. The pallet handler elevating part 135 is provided with an upright stocker feed screw (not shown). This stocker feed screw is rotated by a handler elevating motor (not shown). An elevating base nut portion (not shown) is screwed into the stocker feed screw.
 昇降ベースナット部には、昇降ベース137が固定される。昇降ベース137の上面には、Z軸に沿うハンドラ軸139を介して引き出し装置141が回転自在に支持される。昇降ベース137の起立ベース部143には、出力軸がZ軸に沿うハンドラモータ145が固定される。このハンドラモータ145の出力軸とハンドラ軸139とには、ベルト147が張架される。ハンドラモータ145、ベルト147、ハンドラ軸139は、旋回機構149(図10参照)を構成する。旋回機構149のハンドラモータ145が駆動されることにより、回転力がハンドラ軸139に伝達され、引き出し装置141はハンドラ軸139周りに回転される。引き出し装置141は、ハンドラ係合ロッド81と、一対の平行なパレットガイド151とを有している。 The elevating base 137 is fixed to the elevating base nut part. A drawer device 141 is rotatably supported on the upper surface of the elevating base 137 via a handler shaft 139 along the Z axis. A handler motor 145 whose output axis is along the Z axis is fixed to the upright base portion 143 of the elevating base 137. A belt 147 is stretched between the output shaft of the handler motor 145 and the handler shaft 139. The handler motor 145, the belt 147, and the handler shaft 139 constitute a swivel mechanism 149 (see FIG. 10). By driving the handler motor 145 of the swivel mechanism 149, the rotational force is transmitted to the handler shaft 139, and the pull-out device 141 is rotated around the handler shaft 139. The pull-out device 141 has a handler engaging rod 81 and a pair of parallel pallet guides 151.
 パレットハンドラ133は、例えばパレット搬送制御部153(図11参照)によりハンドラ昇降モータ(図示略)が駆動されることによって、パレットストック部43に沿って昇降する。このとき、パレットハンドラ133は、パレットストック部43のパレット収納部に付された収納アドレスを指定することにより、この収納アドレスに対応したパレット39の高さ位置に引き出し装置141を配置できる。パレット搬送部45の下部には、これらの制御を行うためのトレイ部品ストック装置制御部119が設けられている。 The pallet handler 133 moves up and down along the pallet stock unit 43 by driving a handler elevating motor (not shown), for example, by a pallet transfer control unit 153 (see FIG. 11). At this time, the pallet handler 133 can arrange the drawer device 141 at the height position of the pallet 39 corresponding to this storage address by designating the storage address attached to the pallet storage unit of the pallet stock unit 43. At the lower part of the pallet transport unit 45, a tray component stock device control unit 119 for performing these controls is provided.
 図10は、トレイ部品ストック装置29とトレイ部品供給装置23のレイアウトを示す平面図である。パレットストック部43とパレット搬送部45とは、通路15(図1参照)に沿って並ぶ。すなわち、トレイ部品ストック装置29は、長辺側が通路15に沿う向きで設置される。そして、トレイ部品ストック装置29のパレット搬送部45は、トレイ部品供給装置23を介して、部品装着装置13とY軸に沿う方向で接続される。その結果、部品装着システム11は、X軸に沿う方向で長辺側のパレットストック部43とパレット搬送部45とが並べられ、パレットストック部43とパレット搬送部45とが、X軸に交差する方向でトレイ部品供給装置23に接続された、平面視でL字形状のスペースで設置される。 FIG. 10 is a plan view showing the layout of the tray parts stock device 29 and the tray parts supply device 23. The pallet stock portion 43 and the pallet transport portion 45 are arranged along the passage 15 (see FIG. 1). That is, the tray component stock device 29 is installed with the long side side facing along the passage 15. The pallet transport unit 45 of the tray component stock device 29 is connected to the component mounting device 13 in the direction along the Y axis via the tray component supply device 23. As a result, in the component mounting system 11, the pallet stock portion 43 and the pallet transport portion 45 on the long side are arranged side by side in the direction along the X axis, and the pallet stock portion 43 and the pallet transport portion 45 intersect the X axis. It is installed in an L-shaped space in a plan view connected to the tray component supply device 23 in the direction.
 したがって、実施の形態1に係る部品装着システム11は、トレイ31に収納された部品33を部品装着部(例えば装着ヘッド35)によって取り出して基板17に搭載する部品装着装置13と、トレイ31を部品装着部(例えば装着ヘッド35)によって取り出し可能な位置に供給するトレイ部品供給装置23と、トレイ部品供給装置23にトレイ31を補充するトレイ部品ストック装置29と、を備える。トレイ部品ストック装置29は、部品33を格納したトレイ31を載置するパレット39を第1の軸(例えばX軸)に沿って抜き差し可能とするマガジン41をカバー109の内部空間に収納可能なパレットストック部43と、パレットストック部43と部品供給装置(例えばトレイ部品供給装置23)との間でパレット39を搬送する部品収納体搬送部(例えばパレット搬送部45)と、マガジン41を載置し、水平面に沿う面内で第1の軸と交差する第2の軸(例えばY軸)に沿ってカバー109の内側と外側との間でマガジン41を移動させ、カバー109の内側から外側に突出可能なスライドテーブル127を有するスライドテーブル装置123と、を有して構成される。 Therefore, in the component mounting system 11 according to the first embodiment, the component mounting device 13 for taking out the component 33 stored in the tray 31 by the component mounting unit (for example, the mounting head 35) and mounting the component 33 on the board 17, and the tray 31 are components. It includes a tray component supply device 23 that supplies the tray component to a position that can be taken out by a mounting unit (for example, a mounting head 35), and a tray component stock device 29 that replenishes the tray component supply device 23 with the tray 31. The tray parts stock device 29 is a pallet that can store a magazine 41 that allows the pallet 39 on which the tray 31 that stores the parts 33 is placed to be inserted and removed along the first axis (for example, the X axis) in the internal space of the cover 109. The parts storage body transport unit (for example, the pallet transport unit 45) for transporting the pallet 39 between the stock unit 43, the pallet stock unit 43, and the parts supply device (for example, the tray parts supply device 23), and the magazine 41 are placed. Move the magazine 41 between the inside and outside of the cover 109 along a second axis (eg, the Y axis) that intersects the first axis in a plane along the horizontal plane and project from the inside to the outside of the cover 109. It is configured with a slide table device 123 having a possible slide table 127.
 また、トレイ部品ストック装置29において、スライドテーブル装置123は、スライドテーブル127をカバー109の外側に突出させる進退駆動部129をさらに含んでもよい。 Further, in the tray component stock device 29, the slide table device 123 may further include an advancing / retreating drive unit 129 that projects the slide table 127 to the outside of the cover 109.
 次に、実施の形態1に係るトレイ部品ストック装置29の制御系の構成を説明する。 Next, the configuration of the control system of the tray parts stock device 29 according to the first embodiment will be described.
 図11は、トレイ部品ストック装置29のブロック図である。トレイ部品ストック装置29は、パレット搬送部45、スライドテーブル装置123、操作部121、一方のコネクタ117、トレイ部品ストック装置制御部119を備える。一方のコネクタ117には、トレイ部品ストック装置29に対して外付けの給電ユニット155が給電ケーブル157により接続される。給電ユニット155には外部電源159が給電ケーブル157により接続される。給電ユニット155は、トレイ部品ストック装置制御部119にも信号線161により直接接続される。 FIG. 11 is a block diagram of the tray parts stock device 29. The tray parts stock device 29 includes a pallet transport unit 45, a slide table device 123, an operation unit 121, one connector 117, and a tray parts stock device control unit 119. An external power supply unit 155 is connected to the tray component stock device 29 to one of the connectors 117 by a power supply cable 157. An external power supply 159 is connected to the power supply unit 155 by a power supply cable 157. The power supply unit 155 is also directly connected to the tray component stock device control unit 119 by the signal line 161.
 トレイ部品ストック装置制御部119は、パレット搬送制御部153と、スライドテーブル制御部163と、記憶部165とを備える。 The tray component stock device control unit 119 includes a pallet transfer control unit 153, a slide table control unit 163, and a storage unit 165.
 パレット搬送制御部153は、部品装着装置13から部品33の要求指示を受け取ると、記憶部165に保存される部品ストック情報を参照し、その部品33を保持したトレイ31のパレット39をパレットストック部43から引き出すための指示をパレット搬送部45に送る。パレット搬送部45は、パレット搬送制御部153からの指示に基づいて、パレットストック部43から該当するパレット39を引き出すとともに、その引き出されたパレット39を、トレイ部品供給装置23における交換用パレット収納部51のマガジン41に挿入して、トレイ部品供給装置23へのパレット39の供給を完了させる。パレット搬送制御部153は、記憶部165に保存される部品ストック情報を参照した結果、要求の部品33が無い場合あるいは残量が少ない場合(例えば規定量よりも少ない場合)、トレイ部品ストック装置29への部品33の要求指示を操作部121に表示し、部品切れもしくは部品切れが近々に生じることを報知する。 When the pallet transfer control unit 153 receives the request instruction of the component 33 from the component mounting device 13, the pallet transfer control unit 153 refers to the component stock information stored in the storage unit 165, and sets the pallet 39 of the tray 31 holding the component 33 as the pallet stock unit. Instructions for withdrawing from 43 are sent to the pallet carrier 45. The pallet transfer unit 45 pulls out the corresponding pallet 39 from the pallet stock unit 43 based on the instruction from the pallet transfer control unit 153, and the pulled out pallet 39 is used as a replacement pallet storage unit in the tray parts supply device 23. It is inserted into the magazine 41 of 51 to complete the supply of the pallet 39 to the tray component supply device 23. As a result of referring to the parts stock information stored in the storage unit 165, the pallet transfer control unit 153 does not have the required parts 33 or the remaining amount is low (for example, when the remaining amount is less than the specified amount), the tray parts stock device 29. The request instruction of the component 33 to the operation unit 121 is displayed on the operation unit 121 to notify that the component is out of order or the component is out of order in the near future.
 スライドテーブル制御部163は、例えば操作部121からの引き出し命令が入力されると、エアシリンダ131(図18参照)に接続されたバルブのポートを引き出し作動側に切り替えるための指示を、スライドテーブル装置123に送る。スライドテーブル装置123は、スライドテーブル制御部163からの指示に基づいて、上述したバルブを切り替える。この切り替えにより、エアシリンダ131(図18参照)の駆動軸が進出し、スライドテーブル127がマガジン交換用窓111を通過して通路側へ進出する。また、スライドテーブル制御部163は、操作部121からの収納命令が入力されると、エアシリンダ131(図18参照)に接続されたバルブのポートを収納作動側に切り替えるための指示を、スライドテーブル装置123に送る。スライドテーブル装置123は、スライドテーブル制御部163からの指示に基づいて、上述したバルブを切り替える。この切り替えにより、エアシリンダ131(図18参照)の駆動軸が後退し、スライドテーブル127がパレットストック部43に収納される。なお、スライドテーブル制御部163は、部品装着装置13あるいはマガジン搬送装置(図示略)からの進退命令により、スライドテーブル127を進退駆動させてもよい。 For example, when a withdrawal command is input from the operation unit 121, the slide table control unit 163 gives an instruction to switch the port of the valve connected to the air cylinder 131 (see FIG. 18) to the withdrawal actuating side. Send to 123. The slide table device 123 switches the valve described above based on the instruction from the slide table control unit 163. By this switching, the drive shaft of the air cylinder 131 (see FIG. 18) advances, and the slide table 127 passes through the magazine replacement window 111 and advances to the aisle side. Further, when the storage command from the operation unit 121 is input, the slide table control unit 163 gives an instruction to switch the port of the valve connected to the air cylinder 131 (see FIG. 18) to the storage operation side. Send to device 123. The slide table device 123 switches the valve described above based on the instruction from the slide table control unit 163. By this switching, the drive shaft of the air cylinder 131 (see FIG. 18) is retracted, and the slide table 127 is housed in the pallet stock portion 43. The slide table control unit 163 may advance / retreat the slide table 127 by an advance / retreat command from the component mounting device 13 or the magazine transfer device (not shown).
 記憶部165は、フラッシュメモリ、HDD(Hard Disk Drive)あるいはSSD(Solid State Drive)等のデータ記録装置を用いて構成され、ストック情報を保存する。記憶部165は、部品装着装置13に補給されるべき部品33の数量、収納アドレス(例えば、それぞれの部品33が載置された、マガジン41、パレット39、トレイ31の番号等の組み合わせ)および部品装着装置13への補給の有無を示す部品ストック情報を保存する。 The storage unit 165 is configured by using a data recording device such as a flash memory, an HDD (Hard Disk Drive), or an SSD (Solid State Drive), and stores stock information. The storage unit 165 includes a quantity of parts 33 to be replenished to the parts mounting device 13, a storage address (for example, a combination of a magazine 41, a pallet 39, a tray 31 number, etc. on which each part 33 is placed) and parts. Parts stock information indicating whether or not the mounting device 13 is replenished is stored.
 次に、パレット搬送時の具体的な動作の一例を説明する。 Next, an example of a specific operation during pallet transfer will be described.
 図12は、パレットストック部43からパレット39を引き出す直前のパレット搬送部45の動作説明図である。パレットストック部43には、パレット搬送部45に臨む側の面に、第2係合部77が配置されるようにしてパレット39が収容される。パレット39をトレイ部品供給装置23へ供給するには、パレット搬送部45の引き出し装置141が上下方向(Z軸に沿う方向)に移動して、引き出し装置141に設けられたハンドラ係合ロッド81が、所望のパレット39に設けられる第2係合部77に係合される。 FIG. 12 is an operation explanatory view of the pallet transport unit 45 immediately before pulling out the pallet 39 from the pallet stock unit 43. The pallet stock portion 43 accommodates the pallet 39 so that the second engaging portion 77 is arranged on the surface facing the pallet transport portion 45. In order to supply the pallet 39 to the tray component supply device 23, the pull-out device 141 of the pallet transport unit 45 moves in the vertical direction (direction along the Z axis), and the handler engaging rod 81 provided in the pull-out device 141 moves. , Is engaged with a second engaging portion 77 provided on the desired pallet 39.
 図13は、パレットストック部43からパレット39を引き出し終えたパレット搬送部45の動作説明図である。ハンドラ係合ロッド81を第2係合部77に係合した引き出し装置141は、牽引モータ(図示略)が駆動されることにより、ハンドラ係合ロッド81とともに、パレット39をX方向で引き出す。引き出し装置141に引き出されたパレット39は、一対のパレットガイド151により、両側の短辺部が下方より支持される。 FIG. 13 is an operation explanatory view of the pallet transport unit 45 in which the pallet 39 has been pulled out from the pallet stock unit 43. The pull-out device 141 in which the handler engaging rod 81 is engaged with the second engaging portion 77 pulls out the pallet 39 together with the handler engaging rod 81 in the X direction by driving a traction motor (not shown). The pallet 39 pulled out to the pull-out device 141 is supported by a pair of pallet guides 151 at short sides on both sides from below.
 図14は、時計回りに引き出し装置141が回転したパレット搬送部45の動作説明図である。次に、パレット39を支持した引き出し装置141が、ハンドラモータ145の駆動により時計回りに90度回転する。時計回りに90度回転したパレット39は、ハンドラ係合ロッド81が係合していない第1係合部75が、交換用パレット収納部51の側に配置される。引き出し装置141は、第2係合部77に係合しているハンドラ係合ロッド81が、Y軸に沿う方向の通路側となって配置される。 FIG. 14 is an operation explanatory view of the pallet transport unit 45 in which the drawer device 141 is rotated clockwise. Next, the drawer device 141 supporting the pallet 39 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise by the drive of the handler motor 145. In the pallet 39 rotated 90 degrees clockwise, the first engaging portion 75 with which the handler engaging rod 81 is not engaged is arranged on the side of the replacement pallet accommodating portion 51. In the pull-out device 141, the handler engaging rod 81 engaged with the second engaging portion 77 is arranged on the passage side in the direction along the Y axis.
 図15は、トレイ部品供給装置23にパレット39を挿入したパレット搬送部45の動作説明図である。引き出し装置141は、ハンドラ係合ロッド81をY方向へ移動する。パレット39は、ハンドラ係合ロッド81がY方向へ移動されることにより、パレットガイド151をスライドしながら、トレイ部品供給装置23における交換用パレット収納部51に挿入される。なお、この際、異なる高さでパレット39を挿入するときは、パレットハンドラ昇降部135により昇降ベース137が所望の高さに昇降される。トレイ部品供給装置23へパレット39を挿入した引き出し装置141は、パレットハンドラ昇降部135の駆動により上または下に移動されて、第2係合部77との係合を解除した後、トレイ部品供給装置23から離反する方向へ退避する。パレット搬送部45は、ハンドラ係合ロッド81を退避位置へ戻し、トレイ部品供給装置23へのパレット39の供給を完了する。 FIG. 15 is an operation explanatory view of the pallet transport unit 45 in which the pallet 39 is inserted into the tray parts supply device 23. The pull-out device 141 moves the handler engaging rod 81 in the Y direction. The pallet 39 is inserted into the replacement pallet storage unit 51 in the tray component supply device 23 while sliding the pallet guide 151 by moving the handler engaging rod 81 in the Y direction. At this time, when the pallets 39 are inserted at different heights, the elevating base 137 is moved up and down to a desired height by the pallet handler elevating unit 135. The drawer device 141 having the pallet 39 inserted into the tray component supply device 23 is moved up or down by the drive of the pallet handler elevating section 135 to disengage the engagement with the second engaging section 77, and then supplies the tray component. Evacuate in the direction away from the device 23. The pallet transport unit 45 returns the handler engaging rod 81 to the retracted position, and completes the supply of the pallet 39 to the tray component supply device 23.
 なお、トレイ部品供給装置23において、部品33の消費された空のパレット39をパレットストック部43へ回収するには、上記と逆の動作手順により、空のパレット39がパレットストック部43へと移動される。 In the tray component supply device 23, in order to collect the consumed empty pallet 39 of the component 33 to the pallet stock section 43, the empty pallet 39 is moved to the pallet stock section 43 by the reverse operation procedure as described above. Will be done.
 次に、スライドテーブル装置123についてさらに説明する。 Next, the slide table device 123 will be further described.
 図16は、スライドテーブル127が収納されたスライドテーブル装置123の平面図である。トレイ部品ストック装置29は、パレットストック部43と、スライドテーブル装置123とを有する。パレットストック部43は、部品33を格納したトレイ31を載置するパレット39を、第1の軸(例えばX軸)に沿って抜き差し可能とするマガジン41をカバー109の内部空間に収納可能としている。スライドテーブル装置123は、スライドテーブル127を有する。スライドテーブル127は、マガジン41を載置し、水平面に沿う面内で第1の軸と交差する第2の軸(例えばY軸)に沿ってカバー109の内側と外側との間でマガジン41を移動させる。すなわち、スライドテーブル127は、カバー109の内側から外側に突出可能となっている。 FIG. 16 is a plan view of the slide table device 123 in which the slide table 127 is housed. The tray component stock device 29 has a pallet stock section 43 and a slide table device 123. The pallet stock unit 43 allows the magazine 41, which allows the pallet 39 on which the tray 31 containing the parts 33 to be placed, to be inserted and removed along the first axis (for example, the X axis), to be stored in the internal space of the cover 109. .. The slide table device 123 has a slide table 127. The slide table 127 rests the magazine 41 and places the magazine 41 between the inside and outside of the cover 109 along a second axis (eg, the Y axis) that intersects the first axis in a plane along the horizontal plane. Move it. That is, the slide table 127 can protrude from the inside to the outside of the cover 109.
 スライドテーブル装置123は、スライドテーブル127を支持し、第2の軸(例えばY軸)に沿って伸縮するスライドレール167を有する。スライドテーブル127は、スライドレール167の伸縮に伴ってカバー109の外側と内側を移動する。スライドレール167は、固定レール169(図18参照)と、連結レール171(図18参照)と、可動レール173(図18参照)と、を有する。 The slide table device 123 supports a slide table 127 and has a slide rail 167 that expands and contracts along a second axis (for example, the Y axis). The slide table 127 moves outside and inside the cover 109 as the slide rail 167 expands and contracts. The slide rail 167 has a fixed rail 169 (see FIG. 18), a connecting rail 171 (see FIG. 18), and a movable rail 173 (see FIG. 18).
 スライドレール167は、固定レール169がパレットストック部43の固定棚125にL金具175により固定される。連結レール171は、固定レール169に平行に連結されかつ固定レール169の延在方向にスライド自在となる。連結レール171は、全長のほぼ半分が固定レール169からY方向に進出可能となる。ほぼ半分が固定レール169から進出した連結レール171は、ストッパ機構(図示略)によりそれ以上の進出が規制される。可動レール173は、連結レール171に平行に連結されかつ連結レール171の延在方向にスライド自在となる。可動レール173は、全長のほぼ半分が連結レール171からY方向に進出可能となる。ほぼ半分が連結レール171から進出した可動レール173は、ストッパ機構(図示略)によりそれ以上の進出が規制される。 In the slide rail 167, the fixed rail 169 is fixed to the fixed shelf 125 of the pallet stock portion 43 by the L metal fitting 175. The connecting rail 171 is connected in parallel with the fixed rail 169 and is slidable in the extending direction of the fixed rail 169. About half of the total length of the connecting rail 171 can advance from the fixed rail 169 in the Y direction. Almost half of the connecting rail 171 that has advanced from the fixed rail 169 is restricted from further advance by the stopper mechanism (not shown). The movable rail 173 is connected in parallel with the connecting rail 171 and is slidable in the extending direction of the connecting rail 171. About half of the total length of the movable rail 173 can advance in the Y direction from the connecting rail 171. The movable rail 173, which is almost half advanced from the connecting rail 171, is restricted from further advancement by the stopper mechanism (not shown).
 したがって、スライドレール167は、可動レール173の進出時、固定レール169と可動レール173から全長のほぼ半分の長さが進出した連結レール171に、可動レール173の全長のほぼ半分の長さが支持される。これにより、可動レール173は、ほぼ全長分の長さで固定レール169から繰り出し可能となる(図18参照)。これにより、スライドレール167は、収納スペースとほぼ同じ繰り出し長が得られるようになっている。 Therefore, when the movable rail 173 is advanced, the slide rail 167 is supported by the connecting rail 171 which is advanced from the fixed rail 169 and the movable rail 173 by almost half the total length, and is supported by the connecting rail 171 which is approximately half the total length of the movable rail 173. Will be done. As a result, the movable rail 173 can be extended from the fixed rail 169 with a length corresponding to almost the entire length (see FIG. 18). As a result, the slide rail 167 can have almost the same extension length as the storage space.
 スライドテーブル装置123は、スライドレール167が一本でもよく、複数本でもよい。実施の形態1において、スライドテーブル装置123は、第2の軸(例えばY軸)に沿って延在し、第1の軸(例えばX軸)に沿う方向に間隔を空けて平行に配置された2つのスライドレール167を有する。平行な2つのスライドレール167は、それぞれの可動レール173が、内側となって対向する。それぞれの可動レール173の内側には、可動レール173の長手方向に渡って断面L字形のスライドベース177(図17参照)が固定される。平行となった一対のスライドベース177は、複数の連結板179により相互に連結される。スライドベース177および連結板179は、スライドテーブル127を構成する。スライドテーブル127は、少なくとも一つのマガジン41が載置されるサイズを有している。 The slide table device 123 may have one slide rail 167 or a plurality of slide rails 167. In the first embodiment, the slide table device 123 extends along the second axis (for example, the Y axis) and is arranged in parallel at intervals in the direction along the first axis (for example, the X axis). It has two slide rails 167. The two parallel slide rails 167 face each other with their movable rails 173 inside. Inside each movable rail 173, a slide base 177 (see FIG. 17) having an L-shaped cross section is fixed over the longitudinal direction of the movable rail 173. The pair of parallel slide bases 177 are connected to each other by a plurality of connecting plates 179. The slide base 177 and the connecting plate 179 constitute the slide table 127. The slide table 127 has a size in which at least one magazine 41 is placed.
 図17は、スライドテーブル127の斜視図である。スライドベース177には、マガジン41のスライドテーブル127に対する第1の軸(例えばX軸)方向の位置を規制する第1規制部と、マガジン41のスライドテーブル127に対する第2の軸(例えばY軸)方向の位置を規制する第2規制部と、が設けられる。それぞれのスライドベース177は、水平片が内側となり、起立片が外側で起立する断面L字形となる。 FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the slide table 127. The slide base 177 has a first regulating unit that regulates the position of the magazine 41 in the direction of the first axis (for example, the X axis) with respect to the slide table 127, and a second axis (for example, the Y axis) for the magazine 41 with respect to the slide table 127. A second regulatory unit that regulates the position in the direction is provided. Each slide base 177 has an L-shaped cross section in which the horizontal piece is on the inside and the standing piece is on the outside.
 第1規制部は、Xアライメントガイド181となる。Xアライメントガイド181は、それぞれのスライドベース177の延在方向に離間して一対のものが合計4つ固定される。このXアライメントガイド181は、マガジン41の側板83(図6参照)に垂直な起立板であり、2本のスライドベース177の対向する位置に設けられた一対のものが、上側に向かうにしたがって、相互に離反する傾斜面183を有している。つまり、一対のXアライメントガイド181は、Y軸に沿う方向から見るとY字状に上広がりで傾斜する(図19参照)。一対のXアライメントガイド181の間に、マガジン41の側板83に設けられた上述のXアライメントローラ93(図6参照)が傾斜面183を滑りながら案内されることにより嵌る。 The first regulatory unit is the X alignment guide 181. A total of four X-alignment guides 181 are fixed so as to be separated from each other in the extending direction of each slide base 177. The X alignment guide 181 is an upright plate perpendicular to the side plate 83 (see FIG. 6) of the magazine 41, and a pair of slide bases 177 provided at opposite positions of the two slide bases 177 are arranged so as to move upward. It has inclined surfaces 183 that are separated from each other. That is, the pair of X alignment guides 181 are inclined upward in a Y shape when viewed from the direction along the Y axis (see FIG. 19). The above-mentioned X alignment roller 93 (see FIG. 6) provided on the side plate 83 of the magazine 41 is fitted between the pair of X alignment guides 181 by being guided while sliding on the inclined surface 183.
 第2規制部は、Yアライメントガイド187(図25参照)となる。Yアライメントガイド187は、4つのXアライメントガイド181の内側で、それぞれのスライドベース177の延在方向に離間して一対のものが合計4つ固定される。Yアライメントガイド187は、マガジン41の側板83に垂直な起立板であり、2本のスライドベース177の対向する位置に設けられた一対のものが、Xアライメントガイド181側で四角形の一つの角部を面取りした台形状に形成される。つまり、一対のYアライメントガイド187は、X軸に沿う方向から見るとA字状に末広がりで傾斜する(図25参照)。一対のYアライメントガイド187は、双方の外側に、マガジン41の底板87の下面に設けられた上述のYアライメントローラ99が傾斜面185に案内されることによりスライドテーブル127に対して位置決めされる。 The second regulatory section is the Y alignment guide 187 (see FIG. 25). A total of four Y alignment guides 187 are fixed inside the four X alignment guides 181 so as to be spaced apart from each other in the extending direction of the slide base 177. The Y alignment guide 187 is an upright plate perpendicular to the side plate 83 of the magazine 41, and a pair of slide bases 177 provided at opposite positions is one corner of a quadrangle on the X alignment guide 181 side. Is formed into a chamfered trapezoidal shape. That is, the pair of Y alignment guides 187 are inclined toward an A shape when viewed from the direction along the X axis (see FIG. 25). The pair of Y alignment guides 187 are positioned with respect to the slide table 127 by guiding the above-mentioned Y alignment roller 99 provided on the lower surface of the bottom plate 87 of the magazine 41 to the inclined surface 185 on both outer sides.
 図18は、スライドテーブル127が進出したスライドテーブル装置123の平面図である。トレイ部品ストック装置29は、スライドテーブル装置123に、進退駆動部129が設けられてもよい。進退駆動部129は、スライドテーブル127をカバー109の外側と内部空間との間を自動で進退可能とする。 FIG. 18 is a plan view of the slide table device 123 to which the slide table 127 has advanced. The tray component stock device 29 may be provided with an advance / retreat drive unit 129 in the slide table device 123. The advance / retreat drive unit 129 automatically allows the slide table 127 to advance / retreat between the outside of the cover 109 and the internal space.
 実施の形態1において、進退駆動部129は、2つのスライドレール167の間に配置されている(図18参照)。 In the first embodiment, the advance / retreat drive unit 129 is arranged between the two slide rails 167 (see FIG. 18).
 進退駆動部129は、第1ラックギア189と、第2ラックギア191と、ピニオンギア193と、進退駆動源と、を有する。 The advance / retreat drive unit 129 has a first rack gear 189, a second rack gear 191, a pinion gear 193, and an advance / retreat drive source.
 第1ラックギア189は、第2の軸(例えばY軸)に平行に長手方向を向けた状態でカバー109の内部に固定される。より具体的には、第1ラックギア189は、固定棚125に固定される。第2ラックギア191は、スライドテーブル127に装着され、第1ラックギア189と向かい合って平行に配置される。ピニオンギア193は、第1ラックギア189と第2ラックギア191に噛みあう。進退駆動源は、ピニオンギア193を第2の軸(例えばY軸)に沿って移動させる。 The first rack gear 189 is fixed inside the cover 109 with the longitudinal direction oriented parallel to the second axis (for example, the Y axis). More specifically, the first rack gear 189 is fixed to the fixed shelf 125. The second rack gear 191 is mounted on the slide table 127 and is arranged parallel to the first rack gear 189. The pinion gear 193 meshes with the first rack gear 189 and the second rack gear 191. The advancing / retreating drive source moves the pinion gear 193 along a second axis (eg, the Y axis).
 実施の形態1において、進退駆動源は、例えばシリンダから進退駆動軸を進退させるエアシリンダ131となる。エアシリンダ131には、動作用エアを供給するバルブ等が接続される。バルブは、複数のポートを切り替えることにより、エアシリンダ131の進退駆動軸を進出または後退させる方向に駆動が可能となる。 In the first embodiment, the advancing / retreating drive source is, for example, an air cylinder 131 that advances / retreats the advancing / retreating drive shaft from the cylinder. A valve or the like for supplying operating air is connected to the air cylinder 131. By switching a plurality of ports, the valve can be driven in a direction in which the advancing / retreating drive shaft of the air cylinder 131 is advanced or retracted.
 エアシリンダ131は、進退駆動軸の先端に、スライダ195が固定される。スライダ195は、固定棚125に固定されたY軸に沿う方向のスライダレール197に案内されて直線運動する。スライダ195には、Z軸に沿う方向が回転中心となって上記のピニオンギア193が回転自在に支持される。 In the air cylinder 131, a slider 195 is fixed to the tip of the advancing / retreating drive shaft. The slider 195 moves linearly guided by the slider rail 197 in the direction along the Y axis fixed to the fixed shelf 125. The pinion gear 193 is rotatably supported on the slider 195 with the direction along the Z axis as the center of rotation.
 図19は、スライドテーブル装置123を通路側より見た正面図である。スライドテーブル装置123は、Y軸に沿う方向から見ると、外側にY軸に沿う方向に延在する一対の平行なスライドレール167が固定棚125に固定されて配置される。一対のスライドレール167のそれぞれの内側(すなわち、可動レール側)には、スライドベース177が固定される。一対のスライドベース177は、連結板179により固定されたスライドテーブル127を構成する。進退駆動源であるエアシリンダ131は、一対のスライドベース177と連結板179とに包囲された空間内に収容されて、固定棚125に固定される。そして、エアシリンダ131の進退駆動軸により進退されるピニオンギア193は、固定棚125に固定された第1ラックギア189と、スライドベース177に固定された第2ラックギア191とに挟まれた状態で双方のラックギアに噛みあっている。 FIG. 19 is a front view of the slide table device 123 as viewed from the aisle side. When viewed from the direction along the Y axis, the slide table device 123 has a pair of parallel slide rails 167 extending outward along the Y axis fixedly arranged on the fixed shelf 125. A slide base 177 is fixed to the inside of each of the pair of slide rails 167 (that is, on the movable rail side). The pair of slide bases 177 constitutes a slide table 127 fixed by a connecting plate 179. The air cylinder 131, which is an advancing / retreating drive source, is housed in a space surrounded by a pair of slide bases 177 and a connecting plate 179, and is fixed to a fixed shelf 125. The pinion gear 193, which is moved forward and backward by the moving shaft of the air cylinder 131, is sandwiched between the first rack gear 189 fixed to the fixed shelf 125 and the second rack gear 191 fixed to the slide base 177. It is meshing with the rack gear of.
 図20は、進退駆動源にエアシリンダ131を用いた進退機構の概念図である。進退駆動部129は、スライダ195にピニオンギア193を回転自在に支持させながら、第2の軸(Y軸)に沿って移動する。ピニオンギア193は、スライドベース177がカバー109の内側に収納されているとき、第1ラックギア189の奥側(スライドテーブル進出側と反対側)に位置して噛みあっている。このとき、スライドベース177に固定された第2ラックギア191は、進出方向の先端側がピニオンギア193に噛みあっている。 FIG. 20 is a conceptual diagram of an advancing / retreating mechanism using an air cylinder 131 as an advancing / retreating drive source. The advancing / retreating drive unit 129 moves along the second axis (Y axis) while rotatably supporting the pinion gear 193 on the slider 195. When the slide base 177 is housed inside the cover 109, the pinion gear 193 is located on the back side (opposite side of the slide table advance side) of the first rack gear 189 and meshes with the pinion gear 193. At this time, the tip side of the second rack gear 191 fixed to the slide base 177 in the advancing direction meshes with the pinion gear 193.
 スライドテーブル装置123では、エアシリンダ131が駆動され、ピニオンギア193が第1ラックギア189に噛みあいながら進出方向にAだけ移動すると、ピニオンギア193に噛みあっている第2ラックギア191が、ピニオンギア193の移動量の2倍(A+A=2A)の移動量で進出方向へ繰り出されることになる。 In the slide table device 123, when the air cylinder 131 is driven and the pinion gear 193 moves by A in the advancing direction while engaging with the first rack gear 189, the second rack gear 191 meshing with the pinion gear 193 changes to the pinion gear 193. The movement amount is twice the movement amount of (A + A = 2A), and the movement amount is set in the advance direction.
 図21は、進退駆動源にモータを用いた進退機構の概念図である。進退駆動部129は、進退駆動源に進退駆動モータ199を用いた構成としてもよい。この場合、固定棚125には、回転中心がX軸に沿う方向となり、Y軸に沿う方向に離間した一対のスプロケット201を回転自在に支持する。一対のスプロケット201には無端状のチェーン203が掛け渡される。チェーン203は、第1ラックギア189と第2ラックギア191との双方に噛みあうピニオンギア193を回転自在に支持する。一方のスプロケット201を進退駆動モータ199により駆動することにより、チェーン203の移動と共にピニオンギア193を移動させる。これにより、エアシリンダ131による移動の場合と同様にして、ピニオンギア193を双方のラックギアに噛みあわせた状態でY軸に沿う方向で移動させることができる。進退駆動モータ199を進退駆動源に用いた進退駆動部129によれば、空圧設備を使用せずにスライドテーブル127を進退させることができる。 FIG. 21 is a conceptual diagram of an advancing / retreating mechanism using a motor as an advancing / retreating drive source. The advancing / retreating drive unit 129 may be configured by using the advancing / retreating drive motor 199 as the advancing / retreating drive source. In this case, the fixed shelf 125 rotatably supports a pair of sprockets 201 whose rotation center is in the direction along the X axis and is separated in the direction along the Y axis. An endless chain 203 is hung on the pair of sprockets 201. The chain 203 rotatably supports the pinion gear 193 that meshes with both the first rack gear 189 and the second rack gear 191. By driving one sprocket 201 with the advance / retreat drive motor 199, the pinion gear 193 is moved along with the movement of the chain 203. As a result, the pinion gear 193 can be moved in the direction along the Y axis in a state of being meshed with both rack gears in the same manner as in the case of movement by the air cylinder 131. According to the advancing / retreating drive unit 129 using the advancing / retreating drive motor 199 as the advancing / retreating drive source, the slide table 127 can be advanced / retreated without using pneumatic equipment.
 図22は、進退機構のストローク可変構造を示す概念図である。また、進退駆動部129は、大径ピニオンギア205と小径ピニオンギア207とを同軸で固定してもよい。この場合、例えば小径ピニオンギア207(外周長さA)を第1ラックギア189に噛みあわせ、同軸に固定された大径ピニオンギア205(外周長さ2A)に第2ラックギア191を噛みあわせる。この進退駆動部129によれば、小径ピニオンギア207の移動距離をAとすれば、第2ラックギア191の繰り出し距離は、A+2A=3Aとなる。このように、進退駆動部129は、直径(外周長さ)を変えた複数のピニオンギア193を組み合わせることにより、ストロークの拡大率を自由に設定することが可能となる。これにより、進退駆動部129は、異なる引き出し長のスライドテーブル装置123に対応が可能となる汎用性の高い進退機構を実現できる。 FIG. 22 is a conceptual diagram showing a variable stroke structure of the advancing / retreating mechanism. Further, the advance / retreat drive unit 129 may coaxially fix the large-diameter pinion gear 205 and the small-diameter pinion gear 207. In this case, for example, the small diameter pinion gear 207 (outer peripheral length A) is meshed with the first rack gear 189, and the second rack gear 191 is meshed with the large diameter pinion gear 205 (outer peripheral length 2A) fixed coaxially. According to the advancing / retreating drive unit 129, if the moving distance of the small diameter pinion gear 207 is A, the feeding distance of the second rack gear 191 is A + 2A = 3A. In this way, the advance / retreat drive unit 129 can freely set the stroke expansion ratio by combining a plurality of pinion gears 193 having different diameters (outer peripheral lengths). As a result, the advancing / retreating drive unit 129 can realize a highly versatile advancing / retreating mechanism capable of supporting slide table devices 123 having different drawer lengths.
 次に、スライドテーブル装置123の位置決め動作を説明する。 Next, the positioning operation of the slide table device 123 will be described.
 図23は、スライドテーブル127に位置決めされて載置されたマガジン41の斜視図である。マガジン41は、スライドテーブル127に載置されることにより、X軸方向、Y軸方向およびZ軸方向の各方向が位置決めされる。 FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the magazine 41 positioned and placed on the slide table 127. By placing the magazine 41 on the slide table 127, each direction of the X-axis direction, the Y-axis direction, and the Z-axis direction is positioned.
 図24は、スライドテーブル127における主にXアライメントガイド181による位置決め動作の説明図である。スライドテーブル装置123では、マガジン41がZ軸に沿う方向で下方へ移動されることにより、スライドテーブル127に載置される。この載置動作は、手動(つまり作業員に行われる)であっても自動であってもよい。マガジン41は、スライドテーブル127に接近する方向に下降されると、第1規制部(例えばXアライメントガイド181)に、マガジン41のXアライメントローラ93が接触する。マガジン41は、Xアライメントローラ93がXアライメントガイド181に案内されることにより、第1の軸方向(例えばX軸方向)の位置が、スライドテーブル127に対して位置決めされる。 FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram of the positioning operation mainly by the X alignment guide 181 on the slide table 127. In the slide table device 123, the magazine 41 is placed on the slide table 127 by being moved downward in the direction along the Z axis. This mounting operation may be manual (that is, performed by the worker) or automatic. When the magazine 41 is lowered in a direction approaching the slide table 127, the X alignment roller 93 of the magazine 41 comes into contact with the first regulating portion (for example, the X alignment guide 181). The position of the magazine 41 in the first axial direction (for example, the X-axis direction) is positioned with respect to the slide table 127 by guiding the X alignment roller 93 to the X alignment guide 181.
 図25は、スライドテーブル127における主にYアライメントガイド187による位置決め動作の説明図である。マガジン41は、Xアライメントガイド181とXアライメントローラ93の接触とほぼ同時に、第2規制部(例えばYアライメントガイド187)にYアライメントローラ99が接触する。マガジン41は、Yアライメントローラ99がYアライメントガイド187の傾斜面185に案内されることにより、第2の軸方向(例えばY軸方向)の位置が、スライドテーブル127に対して位置決めされる。 FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram of the positioning operation mainly by the Y alignment guide 187 on the slide table 127. In the magazine 41, the Y alignment roller 99 comes into contact with the second regulating portion (for example, the Y alignment guide 187) almost at the same time as the contact between the X alignment guide 181 and the X alignment roller 93. In the magazine 41, the position in the second axial direction (for example, the Y-axis direction) is positioned with respect to the slide table 127 by guiding the Y alignment roller 99 to the inclined surface 185 of the Y alignment guide 187.
 マガジン41は、最終下降位置まで移動して載置されると、底板87の下面がYアライメントガイド187に接触する。マガジン41は、4つのYアライメントガイド187に底板87の下面が当接することにより、Z軸の位置が、スライドテーブル127に対して位置決めされる。これにより、マガジン41は、スライドテーブル127に載置が完了すると同時に、スライドテーブル127に対するXYZ方向の位置決めがなされることになる。 When the magazine 41 is moved to the final lowering position and placed, the lower surface of the bottom plate 87 comes into contact with the Y alignment guide 187. The position of the Z-axis of the magazine 41 is positioned with respect to the slide table 127 by abutting the lower surface of the bottom plate 87 on the four Y alignment guides 187. As a result, the magazine 41 is positioned in the XYZ direction with respect to the slide table 127 at the same time when the magazine 41 is placed on the slide table 127.
 次に、実施の形態1に係るトレイ部品ストック装置29の作用を説明する。 Next, the operation of the tray parts stock device 29 according to the first embodiment will be described.
 部品ストック装置(例えばトレイ部品ストック装置29)は、部品33を格納した部品収納体69(例えばトレイ31を載置するパレット39)を第1の軸(例えばX軸)に沿って抜き差し可能とするマガジン41と、水平面に沿う面内で第1の軸と交差する第2の軸(例えばY軸)に沿ってマガジン41を出し入れ可能なストッカ(例えばパレットストック部43)と、ストッカに収納されたマガジン41から第1の軸に沿って部品収納体69(例えばパレット39)を搬送する部品収納体搬送部(例えばパレット搬送部45)と、を備える。ストッカは、マガジン41の収納を可能とした内部空間を形成する筐体(例えばカバー109)を有する。筐体は、第2の軸に沿ってマガジン41を出し入れ可能な開口部(例えばマガジン交換用窓111)を有する。 The parts stock device (for example, the tray parts stock device 29) allows the parts storage body 69 (for example, the pallet 39 on which the tray 31 is placed) containing the parts 33 to be inserted and removed along the first axis (for example, the X axis). The magazine 41 is housed in a stocker (for example, a pallet stock portion 43) in which the magazine 41 can be taken in and out along a second axis (for example, the Y axis) that intersects the first axis in a plane along the horizontal plane. A parts storage body transport unit (for example, a pallet transport unit 45) for transporting a parts storage body 69 (for example, a pallet 39) from the magazine 41 along a first axis is provided. The stocker has a housing (for example, a cover 109) that forms an internal space that allows the magazine 41 to be stored. The housing has an opening (for example, a magazine replacement window 111) through which the magazine 41 can be taken in and out along the second axis.
 実施の形態1に係るトレイ部品ストック装置29では、部品33を格納したトレイ31がパレット39に載置される。パレット39は、第1の軸に沿って抜き差し可能となって、マガジン41に収納される。マガジン41には、複数のパレット39が、上下方向に多段状に収納される。マガジン41は、収納した複数枚のパレット39を一度に搬送可能とする。マガジン41は、複数個がストッカ(例えばパレットストック部43)に収納される。パレットストック部43には、複数のマガジン41が、上下方向に多段状に収納される。パレットストック部43には、第1の軸に沿ってパレット搬送部45が一体的に接続される。パレット搬送部45は、パレットストック部43に収納されているマガジン41から第1の軸に沿ってパレット39を抜き差ししながら一枚ずつ搬送する。 In the tray parts stock device 29 according to the first embodiment, the tray 31 in which the parts 33 are stored is placed on the pallet 39. The pallet 39 can be inserted and removed along the first axis and is stored in the magazine 41. A plurality of pallets 39 are stored in the magazine 41 in a multi-stage manner in the vertical direction. The magazine 41 makes it possible to convey a plurality of stored pallets 39 at one time. A plurality of magazines 41 are stored in a stocker (for example, a pallet stock unit 43). A plurality of magazines 41 are stored in the pallet stock section 43 in a multi-stage manner in the vertical direction. The pallet transport section 45 is integrally connected to the pallet stock section 43 along the first axis. The pallet transport section 45 transports the pallets 39 one by one from the magazine 41 stored in the pallet stock section 43 along the first axis while inserting and removing the pallets 39.
 トレイ部品ストック装置29では、パレットストック部43とパレット搬送部45とが一体的に接続される。パレットストック部43とパレット搬送部45とは、トレイ部品ストック装置29を構成する。少なくともパレットストック部43は、パレット一枚分の設置スペースが必要となる。また、パレット搬送部45においても、少なくともパレット一枚分の設置スペースが必要となる。したがって、パレットストック部43とパレット搬送部45とで構成されるトレイ部品ストック装置29は、平面視で少なくともパレット二枚分の設置スペースが必要な長方形となる。 In the tray parts stock device 29, the pallet stock unit 43 and the pallet transport unit 45 are integrally connected. The pallet stock unit 43 and the pallet transport unit 45 form a tray parts stock device 29. At least the pallet stock portion 43 requires an installation space for one pallet. Further, the pallet transport unit 45 also requires an installation space for at least one pallet. Therefore, the tray component stock device 29 composed of the pallet stock unit 43 and the pallet transport unit 45 has a rectangular shape that requires at least two pallet installation spaces in a plan view.
 このトレイ部品ストック装置29は、パレットストック部43とパレット搬送部45とが、通路15に沿って並ぶ。すなわち、トレイ部品ストック装置29は、平面視で長方形の長辺側が通路15に沿う向きで設置される。 In this tray parts stock device 29, the pallet stock unit 43 and the pallet transport unit 45 are lined up along the aisle 15. That is, the tray component stock device 29 is installed so that the long side of the rectangle is oriented along the passage 15 in a plan view.
 トレイ部品ストック装置29は、パレットストック部43の筐体(例えばカバー109)に、開口部(例えばマガジン交換用窓111)が設けられる。パレットストック部43は、このマガジン交換用窓111を介して第2の軸(Y軸)に沿ってマガジン41の出し入れが可能となる。第2の軸とは、通路15に沿う第1の軸に対し交差する方向となる。すなわち、上述のように、通路15に沿って長辺側が設置されたトレイ部品ストック装置29は、通路15に沿って並んだパレットストック部43とパレット搬送部45のうち、パレットストック部43の通路15に面した側面にマガジン交換用窓111が向けられ、通路15から第2の軸(Y軸)に沿う方向(前後方向)でパレットストック部43に対するマガジン41の出し入れが可能となる。 The tray parts stock device 29 is provided with an opening (for example, a magazine replacement window 111) in the housing (for example, the cover 109) of the pallet stock portion 43. The pallet stock portion 43 allows the magazine 41 to be taken in and out along the second axis (Y axis) through the magazine replacement window 111. The second axis is a direction that intersects the first axis along the passage 15. That is, as described above, the tray component stock device 29 having the long side installed along the passage 15 is the passage of the pallet stock portion 43 among the pallet stock portion 43 and the pallet transport portion 45 arranged along the passage 15. The magazine replacement window 111 is directed to the side surface facing the 15, and the magazine 41 can be taken in and out of the pallet stock portion 43 in the direction (front-back direction) along the second axis (Y-axis) from the passage 15.
 トレイ部品ストック装置29は、通路側からY軸に沿う方向でマガジン41の交換を可能とすることにより、通路上の広い空間を利用してマガジン41の交換作業が容易に可能となる。また、台車搭載のフィーダへのアクセス(スプライシング作業、フィーダ交換あるいは台車交換)の作業の邪魔にならない。また、搬送ロボットでのマガジン自動交換時に、トレイ部品ストック装置29の横(左右)に回り込む必要がなくなる。 The tray parts stock device 29 enables the magazine 41 to be replaced in the direction along the Y axis from the aisle side, so that the magazine 41 can be easily replaced by utilizing the wide space on the aisle. In addition, it does not interfere with the work of accessing the feeder mounted on the bogie (splicing work, feeder replacement or bogie replacement). Further, when the magazine is automatically replaced by the transfer robot, it is not necessary to wrap around to the side (left and right) of the tray parts stock device 29.
 また、トレイ部品ストック装置29は、内部空間に配置され、マガジン41を載置し、第2の軸に沿って開口部を通って内部空間と筐体の外側との間でマガジン41を移動させるスライドテーブル装置123を備える。 Further, the tray component stock device 29 is arranged in the internal space, mounts the magazine 41, and moves the magazine 41 between the internal space and the outside of the housing through the opening along the second axis. A slide table device 123 is provided.
 このトレイ部品ストック装置29では、パレットストック部43が、カバー109に覆われた内部空間に、スライドテーブル装置123を備える。スライドテーブル装置123は、マガジン交換用窓111の位置に対応して設けられる。スライドテーブル装置123は、第2の軸(Y軸)に沿ってマガジン交換用窓111を通ることにより、カバー109の内部空間とカバー109の外側との間でマガジン41を移動可能とする。 In this tray parts stock device 29, the pallet stock unit 43 is provided with the slide table device 123 in the internal space covered by the cover 109. The slide table device 123 is provided corresponding to the position of the magazine replacement window 111. The slide table device 123 makes the magazine 41 movable between the internal space of the cover 109 and the outside of the cover 109 by passing through the magazine replacement window 111 along the second axis (Y axis).
 パレットストック部43には、複数のマガジン41が、上下方向に多段状に収納される。それぞれのマガジン41に収納されたパレット39は、パレット搬送部45によりX軸に沿う方向で出し入れが可能となる。 A plurality of magazines 41 are stored in the pallet stock section 43 in multiple stages in the vertical direction. The pallets 39 stored in the respective magazines 41 can be taken in and out in the direction along the X axis by the pallet transport unit 45.
 スライドテーブル装置123には、上下方向に多段状に収納された複数のマガジン41のうち、その一つが載置される。この一つのマガジン41は、スライドテーブル装置123により、マガジン交換用窓111からカバー109の内外へ移動可能となる。つまり、トレイ部品ストック装置29は、スライドテーブル装置123に載置されたこの一つのマガジン41のみが、交換可能となる。スライドテーブル装置123は、パレットストック部43の外側と内部空間との間でマガジン41を一つずつ交換する受け渡し部(すなわち、交換部)となる。 One of a plurality of magazines 41 stored in multiple stages in the vertical direction is placed on the slide table device 123. The magazine 41 can be moved in and out of the cover 109 from the magazine replacement window 111 by the slide table device 123. That is, in the tray parts stock device 29, only this one magazine 41 mounted on the slide table device 123 can be replaced. The slide table device 123 serves as a transfer unit (that is, an exchange unit) for exchanging magazines 41 one by one between the outside of the pallet stock unit 43 and the internal space.
 スライドテーブル装置123に載置されたマガジン41からは、部品33をトレイ31に格納したパレット39が、順次にパレット搬送部45により引き出される。パレット39が引き出されたマガジン41の空きスペースには、部品33が消費されて空となったトレイ31を載置したパレット39がパレット搬送部45により収納される。つまり、スライドテーブル装置123に載置された部品33の補充済みマガジン41は、パレット搬送部45により空のパレット39と順次に入れ替えられて行く。 From the magazine 41 mounted on the slide table device 123, the pallets 39 in which the parts 33 are stored in the tray 31 are sequentially pulled out by the pallet transport unit 45. In the empty space of the magazine 41 from which the pallet 39 is pulled out, the pallet 39 on which the tray 31 emptied by consuming the parts 33 is placed is stored by the pallet transport unit 45. That is, the replenished magazine 41 of the parts 33 mounted on the slide table device 123 is sequentially replaced with the empty pallet 39 by the pallet transport unit 45.
 スライドテーブル装置123に載置されたマガジン41は、収納されたパレット39が、全て空のパレット39に入れ替えられると、スライドテーブル装置123により、カバー109の外側(通路上)へと移動される。スライドテーブル装置123が繰り出されることにより、通路上に移動された部品消費済みのマガジン41は、人手やマガジン搬送装置により、マガジン41ごと部品33の補充済みのマガジン41と交換される。 The magazine 41 mounted on the slide table device 123 is moved to the outside (on the aisle) of the cover 109 by the slide table device 123 when all the stored pallets 39 are replaced with empty pallets 39. By feeding out the slide table device 123, the magazine 41 whose parts have been consumed moved onto the aisle is replaced with the magazine 41 which has been replenished with the parts 33 together with the magazine 41 by hand or by the magazine transfer device.
 このトレイ部品ストック装置29では、パレットストック部43の通路側に設けられたマガジン交換用窓111から、さらにスライドテーブル装置123によりマガジン41が通路上に繰り出されるので、例えば20kg程度の重量を有するマガジン41を、容易に交換することが可能となる。 In the tray parts stock device 29, the magazine 41 is further extended onto the aisle by the slide table device 123 from the magazine replacement window 111 provided on the passage side of the pallet stock portion 43, so that the magazine has a weight of, for example, about 20 kg. The 41 can be easily replaced.
 なお、スライドテーブル装置123は、人手により通路側から引き出すものであってもよい。この場合、通路側に引き出されたスライドテーブル装置123は、棚として働き、通路上の広いスペースが作業スペースとなって、人手による交換作業を容易にすることができる。 The slide table device 123 may be manually pulled out from the aisle side. In this case, the slide table device 123 pulled out to the aisle side functions as a shelf, and a large space on the aisle becomes a work space, which facilitates manual replacement work.
 また、トレイ部品ストック装置29において、スライドテーブル装置123は、マガジン41が載るスライドテーブル127を筐体の外側に突出させる進退駆動部129をさらに備える。 Further, in the tray parts stock device 29, the slide table device 123 further includes an advancing / retreating drive unit 129 that projects the slide table 127 on which the magazine 41 is placed to the outside of the housing.
 このトレイ部品ストック装置29では、スライドテーブル装置123に、進退駆動部129が設けられる。進退駆動部129は、作動することにより、マガジン交換用窓111を介してスライドテーブル127を自動でカバー109の外側と内部空間との間で進退させる。これにより、トレイ部品ストック装置29は、自走式のマガジン搬送装置を通路上で走行させた際のマガジン41の交換が、大掛かりなエレベータ装置等を必要とせずに、安価な設備コストで自動化しやすくなる。 In this tray parts stock device 29, the slide table device 123 is provided with an advance / retreat drive unit 129. The advancing / retreating drive unit 129 automatically advances / retreats the slide table 127 between the outside and the inside space of the cover 109 via the magazine replacement window 111 by operating the advancing / retreating drive unit 129. As a result, the tray parts stock device 29 automates the replacement of the magazine 41 when the self-propelled magazine transfer device is run on the aisle at a low equipment cost without the need for a large-scale elevator device or the like. It will be easier.
 また、実施の形態1に係る部品装着システム11は、部品収納体69(例えばトレイ31)に収納された部品33を部品装着部(例えば装着ヘッド35)によって取り出して基板17に搭載する部品装着装置13と、部品収納体69(例えばトレイ31)を部品装着部(例えば装着ヘッド35)によって取り出し可能な位置に供給する部品供給装置(例えばトレイ部品供給装置23)と、トレイ部品供給装置23にトレイ31を補充する部品ストック装置(例えばトレイ部品ストック装置29)と、を備える。トレイ部品ストック装置29は、部品33を格納した部品収納体69(例えばトレイ31を載置するパレット39)を第1の軸(例えばX軸)に沿って抜き差し可能とするマガジン41と、水平面に沿う面内で第1の軸と交差する第2の軸(例えばY軸)に沿ってマガジン41を出し入れ可能なストッカ(例えばパレットストック部43)と、ストッカに収納されたマガジン41から第1の軸(例えばX軸)に沿って部品収納体69(例えばパレット39)を搬送する部品収納体搬送部(例えばパレット搬送部45)と、を有する。ストッカ(例えばパレットストック部43)は、マガジン41の収納を可能とした内部空間を形成する筐体(例えばカバー109)を有する。筐体は、第2の軸(例えばY軸)に沿ってマガジン41を出し入れ可能な開口部(例えばマガジン交換用窓111)を備える。 Further, the component mounting system 11 according to the first embodiment is a component mounting device that takes out the component 33 stored in the component storage body 69 (for example, the tray 31) by the component mounting unit (for example, the mounting head 35) and mounts the component 33 on the substrate 17. A parts supply device (for example, a tray parts supply device 23) that supplies the parts storage body 69 (for example, a tray 31) to a position where it can be taken out by a parts mounting portion (for example, a mounting head 35), and a tray for the tray parts supply device 23. A parts stocking device (for example, a tray parts stocking device 29) for replenishing 31 is provided. The tray parts stock device 29 has a magazine 41 that allows a parts storage body 69 (for example, a pallet 39 on which a tray 31 is placed) for storing parts 33 to be inserted and removed along a first axis (for example, an X axis), and a horizontal plane. A stocker (for example, a pallet stock portion 43) that allows the magazine 41 to be taken in and out along a second axis (for example, the Y axis) that intersects the first axis in the horizontal plane, and a magazine 41 to the first from the magazine 41 stored in the stocker. It has a parts storage body transport unit (for example, a pallet transport unit 45) that transports a parts storage body 69 (for example, a pallet 39) along an axis (for example, an X-axis). The stocker (for example, the pallet stock portion 43) has a housing (for example, a cover 109) that forms an internal space that allows the magazine 41 to be stored. The housing comprises an opening (eg, magazine replacement window 111) through which the magazine 41 can be taken in and out along a second axis (eg, the Y axis).
 実施の形態1に係る部品装着システム11では、パレット搬送部45は、パレットストック部43と部品装着装置13との間でパレット39を搬送する。パレット39は、パレットストック部43、パレット搬送部45、部品装着装置13の順で供給され、部品装着装置13、パレット搬送部45、パレットストック部43の順で回収される。つまり、パレット39は、パレットストック部43からパレット搬送部45を介して部品装着装置13に供給され、部品33が消費されて空となった後、部品装着装置13からパレット搬送部45を介してパレットストック部43へと回収される。 In the component mounting system 11 according to the first embodiment, the pallet transport section 45 transports the pallet 39 between the pallet stock section 43 and the component mounting device 13. The pallet 39 is supplied in the order of the pallet stock section 43, the pallet transport section 45, and the component mounting device 13, and is collected in the order of the component mounting device 13, the pallet transport section 45, and the pallet stock section 43. That is, the pallet 39 is supplied from the pallet stock unit 43 to the component mounting device 13 via the pallet transport section 45, and after the component 33 is consumed and emptied, the component mounting device 13 via the pallet transport section 45. It is collected in the pallet stock section 43.
 ところで、工場フロアでは、複数の部品装着装置13が左右方向(X軸に沿う方向)に並んで設置されることにより、直線状の実装ライン27が構成される。さらに、生産量の大きい工場フロアでは、部品装着装置13の前後を通るX軸に沿う通路15を挟んで複数の実装ライン27が平行に設置される場合もある。この場合、実装ライン27と通路15とは、相互に平行となって、かつ交互にレイアウトされる。 By the way, on the factory floor, a linear mounting line 27 is configured by installing a plurality of component mounting devices 13 side by side in the left-right direction (direction along the X-axis). Further, on a factory floor having a large production volume, a plurality of mounting lines 27 may be installed in parallel with a passage 15 along the X axis passing in front of and behind the component mounting device 13 interposed therebetween. In this case, the mounting lines 27 and the passages 15 are laid out in parallel with each other and alternately.
 ここで、従来より設置される部品装着装置13に対して、新たにパレットストック部43およびパレット搬送部45を、部品装着装置13の後部に直線状に接続した場合、実装ライン27の延在方向(X軸に沿う方向)と交差する方向(Y軸に沿う方向)にパレットストック部43およびパレット搬送部45が延出することになる。 Here, when the pallet stock unit 43 and the pallet transport unit 45 are newly linearly connected to the rear portion of the component mounting device 13 with respect to the component mounting device 13 conventionally installed, the extending direction of the mounting line 27 The pallet stock portion 43 and the pallet transport portion 45 extend in a direction intersecting (direction along the X axis) and (direction along the Y axis).
 上述のように、実装ライン27の前後には、通路15がレイアウトされるため、部品装着装置13の後部から延出したパレットストック部43およびパレット搬送部45は、通路15に少なからず出っ張ることになる。一方、新設時の工場フロア設計において、通路幅を確保するためにこの出っ張り分の設置スペースを、部品装着装置13に拡張して設ければ、工場フロア面積を肥大化させることになり、面積生産性を低下させる。 As described above, since the passage 15 is laid out before and after the mounting line 27, the pallet stock portion 43 and the pallet transport portion 45 extending from the rear part of the component mounting device 13 are not a little protruding from the passage 15. Become. On the other hand, in the factory floor design at the time of new construction, if the installation space for this protrusion is expanded to the component mounting device 13 in order to secure the passage width, the factory floor area will be enlarged and the area production will be increased. Reduces sex.
 部品装着システム11では、パレットストック部43とパレット搬送部45とが一体的に接続され、トレイ部品ストック装置29を構成している。パレットストック部43は、少なくともパレット一枚分の設置スペースが必要となり、パレット搬送部45も、少なくともパレット一枚分の設置スペースが必要となる。したがって、パレットストック部43とパレット搬送部45とで構成されるトレイ部品ストック装置29は、平面視で少なくともパレット二枚分の設置スペースが必要な長方形となる。 In the parts mounting system 11, the pallet stock unit 43 and the pallet transport unit 45 are integrally connected to form the tray parts stock device 29. The pallet stock unit 43 requires an installation space for at least one pallet, and the pallet transport unit 45 also requires an installation space for at least one pallet. Therefore, the tray component stock device 29 composed of the pallet stock unit 43 and the pallet transport unit 45 has a rectangular shape that requires at least two pallet installation spaces in a plan view.
 そこで、トレイ部品ストック装置29は、パレットストック部43とパレット搬送部45とが、通路15に沿って並ぶ。すなわち、トレイ部品ストック装置29は、長辺側が通路15に沿う向きで設置される。そして、トレイ部品ストック装置29のパレット搬送部45は、トレイ部品供給装置23を介して、部品装着装置13とY軸に沿う方向で接続される。その結果、部品装着システム11は、X軸に沿う方向で長辺側のパレットストック部43とパレット搬送部45とが並べられ、これらが、X軸に交差する方向で部品装着装置側のトレイ部品供給装置23に接続された平面視でL字形状のスペースで設置される。これにより、部品装着システム11は、トレイ部品供給装置23のパレット出し入れ方向を通路15に直交する方向とし、パレットストック部43のパレット出し入れ方向を通路15に平行とすることができる。 Therefore, in the tray parts stock device 29, the pallet stock unit 43 and the pallet transport unit 45 are lined up along the aisle 15. That is, the tray component stock device 29 is installed with the long side side facing along the passage 15. The pallet transport unit 45 of the tray component stock device 29 is connected to the component mounting device 13 in the direction along the Y axis via the tray component supply device 23. As a result, in the component mounting system 11, the pallet stock portion 43 on the long side and the pallet transport portion 45 are arranged side by side in the direction along the X axis, and the tray components on the component mounting device side are arranged in the direction in which they intersect the X axis. It is installed in an L-shaped space in a plan view connected to the supply device 23. As a result, the component mounting system 11 can make the pallet loading / unloading direction of the tray component supply device 23 orthogonal to the aisle 15 and the pallet loading / unloading direction of the pallet stock portion 43 parallel to the aisle 15.
 部品装着システム11は、ストック位置をこのようなL字形状に配置することにより、パレットストック部43、パレット搬送部45およびトレイ部品供給装置23が、設備のライン間の通路15に交差する直線上で直列に配置される場合に比べ、パレットストック部43の位置を直角に折り曲げて配置できる分、通路15への飛出しを抑えることができる(換言すれば、通路幅の拡大が可能となる)。 By arranging the stock positions in such an L shape, the component mounting system 11 arranges the pallet stock section 43, the pallet transport section 45, and the tray component supply device 23 on a straight line intersecting the passage 15 between the lines of the equipment. Compared to the case where the pallet stock portion 43 is arranged in series, the position of the pallet stock portion 43 can be bent at a right angle and arranged, so that the jumping out to the aisle 15 can be suppressed (in other words, the width of the aisle can be expanded). ..
 このように、部品装着システム11では、パレット39が、パレットストック部43とパレット搬送部45とのX軸に沿う方向(左右方向)と、パレットストック部43とトレイ部品供給装置23とのY軸に沿う方向(前後方向)に方向転換されて移載される。これにより、通路幅の確保と、面積生産性の確保との双方が可能となっている。 As described above, in the component mounting system 11, the pallet 39 has a direction (left-right direction) between the pallet stock unit 43 and the pallet transport unit 45 along the X axis and a Y axis between the pallet stock unit 43 and the tray component supply device 23. The direction is changed in the direction along (front-back direction) and reprinted. This makes it possible to secure both the passage width and the area productivity.
 また、実施の形態1に係る部品ストック装置(例えばトレイ部品ストック装置29)は、部品33を格納した部品収納体69(例えばトレイ31を載置するパレット39)を第1の軸(例えばX軸)に沿って抜き差し可能とするマガジン41を筐体(例えばカバー109)の内部空間に収納可能なストッカ(例えばパレットストック部43)と、マガジン41を載置し、水平面に沿う面内で第1の軸と交差する第2の軸(例えばY軸)に沿って筐体の内側と外側との間でマガジン41を移動させ、筐体の内側から外側に突出可能なスライドテーブル127を有するスライドテーブル装置123と、を備える。 Further, in the parts stock device (for example, the tray parts stock device 29) according to the first embodiment, the parts storage body 69 (for example, the pallet 39 on which the tray 31 is placed) in which the parts 33 are stored is placed on the first axis (for example, the X axis). ), A stocker (for example, a pallet stock portion 43) that can store the magazine 41 that can be inserted and removed along the inner space of the housing (for example, the cover 109) and the magazine 41 are placed, and the first in the plane along the horizontal plane. A slide table having a slide table 127 that moves the magazine 41 between the inside and outside of the housing along a second axis (eg, the Y axis) that intersects the axis of the housing and can project from the inside to the outside of the housing. The device 123 is provided.
 実施の形態1に係るトレイ部品ストック装置29では、ストッカ(例えばパレットストック部43)が、筐体(例えばカバー109)に覆われた内部空間に、スライドテーブル装置123を備える。スライドテーブル装置123は、第2の軸(例えばY軸)に沿って、カバー109の内部空間とカバー109の外側との間でマガジン41を移動可能とする。 In the tray parts stock device 29 according to the first embodiment, the stocker (for example, the pallet stock portion 43) is provided with the slide table device 123 in the internal space covered with the housing (for example, the cover 109). The slide table device 123 allows the magazine 41 to be moved between the internal space of the cover 109 and the outside of the cover 109 along a second axis (eg, the Y axis).
 パレットストック部43には、複数のマガジン41が、上下方向に多段状に収納される。それぞれのマガジン41に収納されたパレット39は、X軸に沿う方向で出し入れが可能となる。 A plurality of magazines 41 are stored in the pallet stock section 43 in multiple stages in the vertical direction. The pallets 39 stored in the respective magazines 41 can be taken in and out in the direction along the X axis.
 スライドテーブル装置123には、上下方向に多段状に収納された複数のマガジン41のうち、その一つが載置される。この一つのマガジン41は、スライドテーブル装置123により、カバー109の内外へ移動可能となる。つまり、トレイ部品ストック装置29は、スライドテーブル装置123に載置されたこの一つのマガジン41のみが、交換可能となる。スライドテーブル装置123は、パレットストック部43の外側と内部空間との間でマガジン41を一つずつ交換する受け渡し部(すなわち、交換部)となる。 One of a plurality of magazines 41 stored in multiple stages in the vertical direction is placed on the slide table device 123. This one magazine 41 can be moved in and out of the cover 109 by the slide table device 123. That is, in the tray parts stock device 29, only this one magazine 41 mounted on the slide table device 123 can be replaced. The slide table device 123 serves as a transfer unit (that is, an exchange unit) for exchanging magazines 41 one by one between the outside of the pallet stock unit 43 and the internal space.
 パレットストック部43の内部空間においては、スライドテーブル127に載置されたマガジン41から、部品33をトレイ31に格納したパレット39が順次に引き出される。パレット39が引き出されたマガジン41の空きスペースには、部品33が消費されて空となったトレイ31を載置したパレット39が収納される。つまり、パレットストック部43の内部空間において、スライドテーブル127に載置された部品補充済みのマガジン41は、空のパレット39と順次に入れ替えられて行く。 In the internal space of the pallet stock unit 43, the pallet 39 in which the parts 33 are stored in the tray 31 is sequentially pulled out from the magazine 41 placed on the slide table 127. In the empty space of the magazine 41 from which the pallet 39 is pulled out, the pallet 39 on which the tray 31 emptied by consuming the parts 33 is placed is stored. That is, in the internal space of the pallet stock portion 43, the magazine 41 with the parts replenished placed on the slide table 127 is sequentially replaced with the empty pallet 39.
 スライドテーブル127に載置されたマガジン41は、収納されたパレット39が、全て空のパレット39に入れ替えられると、スライドテーブル装置123により、カバー109の外側(通路上)へと移動される。スライドテーブル127が繰り出されることにより、通路上に移動されたマガジン41は、人手やマガジン搬送装置により、マガジン41ごと部品33の充填された新たな部品補充済みのマガジン41と交換される。 The magazine 41 placed on the slide table 127 is moved to the outside (on the aisle) of the cover 109 by the slide table device 123 when all the stored pallets 39 are replaced with empty pallets 39. By feeding out the slide table 127, the magazine 41 moved onto the aisle is replaced with a new parts-filled magazine 41 in which the parts 33 are filled together with the magazine 41 by hand or a magazine transfer device.
 このトレイ部品ストック装置29では、スライドテーブル装置123によりマガジン41が通路上に繰り出されるので、例えば20kg程度の重量を有するマガジン41を、人手によっても容易に交換することが可能となる。 In this tray parts stock device 29, since the magazine 41 is fed out on the passage by the slide table device 123, the magazine 41 having a weight of, for example, about 20 kg can be easily replaced manually.
 なお、スライドテーブル装置123は、人手により通路側から引き出すものであってもよい。この場合、通路側に引き出されたスライドテーブル装置123は、棚として働き、通路上の広いスペースが作業スペースとなって、人手による交換作業を容易にすることができる。 The slide table device 123 may be manually pulled out from the aisle side. In this case, the slide table device 123 pulled out to the aisle side functions as a shelf, and a large space on the aisle becomes a work space, which facilitates manual replacement work.
 また、トレイ部品ストック装置29において、スライドテーブル装置123は、スライドテーブル127を支持し、第2の軸(例えばY軸)に沿って伸縮するスライドレール167を有する。スライドテーブル127は、スライドレール167の伸縮に伴って筐体の外側と内側を移動する。 Further, in the tray component stock device 29, the slide table device 123 supports the slide table 127 and has a slide rail 167 that expands and contracts along a second axis (for example, the Y axis). The slide table 127 moves between the outside and the inside of the housing as the slide rail 167 expands and contracts.
 このトレイ部品ストック装置29では、スライドテーブル127が、スライドレール167により支持される。スライドレール167は、スライドテーブル127を、カバー109の内部空間と、カバー109の外側との間で移動可能とする。スライドレール167は、例えば単一のものがスライドテーブル127を支持してもよい。すなわち、スライドテーブル127は、1つの伸縮自在なスライドレール167により、パレットストック部43の内外の間で進退されてもよい。スライドレール167は、1つのものを用いた場合、スライドテーブル127の支持構造が簡素となる。 In this tray parts stock device 29, the slide table 127 is supported by the slide rail 167. The slide rail 167 makes the slide table 127 movable between the internal space of the cover 109 and the outside of the cover 109. A single slide rail 167 may support the slide table 127, for example. That is, the slide table 127 may be moved back and forth between the inside and outside of the pallet stock portion 43 by one telescopic slide rail 167. When one slide rail 167 is used, the support structure of the slide table 127 is simplified.
 また、トレイ部品ストック装置29において、スライドテーブル装置123は、第2の軸(例えばY軸)に沿って延在し、第1の軸(例えばX軸)に沿う方向に間隔を空けて平行に配置された2つのスライドレール167を有する。 Further, in the tray component stock device 29, the slide table device 123 extends along the second axis (for example, the Y axis) and is parallel to each other in the direction along the first axis (for example, the X axis). It has two slide rails 167 arranged.
 このトレイ部品ストック装置29では、スライドレール167が、互いに平行であり、X軸に沿う方向で離間した2つのスライドレール167により構成される。トレイ部品ストック装置29は、2つのスライドレール167でスライドテーブル127が支持されることにより、スライドテーブル127の積載許容重量が大きくなる。また、スライドテーブル127は、進退方向に直交する方向で離間した2つのスライドレール167に支持されるので、1つのスライドレール167による支持に比べ、マガジン41が安定して支持可能となる。 In this tray parts stock device 29, the slide rails 167 are composed of two slide rails 167 that are parallel to each other and are separated in the direction along the X axis. In the tray component stock device 29, the slide table 127 is supported by the two slide rails 167, so that the load capacity of the slide table 127 is increased. Further, since the slide table 127 is supported by two slide rails 167 separated in a direction orthogonal to the advancing / retreating direction, the magazine 41 can be stably supported as compared with the support by one slide rail 167.
 また、トレイ部品ストック装置29において、スライドテーブル127には、マガジン41のスライドテーブル127に対する第1の軸方向(例えばX軸方向)の位置を規制する第1規制部(例えばXアライメントガイド181)と、マガジン41のスライドテーブル127に対する第2の軸方向の位置を規制する第2規制部(例えばYアライメントガイド187)と、を備える。 Further, in the tray component stock device 29, the slide table 127 includes a first regulating unit (for example, X alignment guide 181) that regulates the position of the magazine 41 in the first axial direction (for example, the X-axis direction) with respect to the slide table 127. The magazine 41 is provided with a second regulating unit (for example, a Y alignment guide 187) that regulates the position of the magazine 41 in the second axial direction with respect to the slide table 127.
 このトレイ部品ストック装置29では、スライドテーブル127に、第1規制部と第2規制部とが設けられる。第1規制部(例えばXアライメントガイド181)は、マガジン41のスライドテーブル127に対する第1の軸(例えばX軸)方向の位置を規制する。第2規制部(例えばYアライメントガイド187)は、マガジン41のスライドテーブル127に対する第2の軸(例えばY軸)方向の位置を規制する。Yアライメントガイド187は、上方より載置されるマガジン41を受けるマガジン受け187の役割も兼ねる。Yアライメントガイド187は、マガジン受け187としても働くことにより、マガジン41のスライドテーブル127に対するZ軸方向の位置を規制する。これにより、マガジン41は、スライドテーブル127を基準としたXYZ方向の相対位置が位置決めされる。 In this tray parts stock device 29, the slide table 127 is provided with a first regulation unit and a second regulation unit. The first regulation unit (for example, X alignment guide 181) regulates the position of the magazine 41 with respect to the slide table 127 in the first axis (for example, X axis) direction. The second regulation unit (for example, Y alignment guide 187) regulates the position of the magazine 41 in the second axis (for example, Y axis) direction with respect to the slide table 127. The Y alignment guide 187 also serves as a magazine receiver 187 for receiving the magazine 41 placed from above. The Y alignment guide 187 also acts as a magazine receiver 187 to regulate the position of the magazine 41 in the Z-axis direction with respect to the slide table 127. As a result, the magazine 41 is positioned relative to the slide table 127 in the XYZ directions.
 また、部品ストック装置(例えばトレイ部品ストック装置29)は、部品33を格納した部品収納体69(例えばトレイ31を載置するパレット39)を第1の軸(例えばX軸)に沿って抜き差し可能とするマガジン41を筐体の内部空間に収納可能なストッカ(例えばパレットストック部43)と、マガジン41を載置し、水平面に沿う面内で第1の軸と交差する第2の軸(例えばY軸)に沿って筐体の内側と外側との間でマガジン41を移動させ、筐体の内側から外側に突出可能なスライドテーブル127と、スライドテーブル127を筐体の外側に突出させる進退駆動部129と、を有するスライドテーブル装置123と、を備える。 Further, the parts stock device (for example, the tray parts stock device 29) can insert and remove the parts storage body 69 (for example, the pallet 39 on which the tray 31 is placed) storing the parts 33 along the first axis (for example, the X axis). A stocker (for example, a pallet stock portion 43) capable of storing the magazine 41 in the internal space of the housing and a second axis (for example, a second axis) on which the magazine 41 is placed and intersecting the first axis in a plane along the horizontal plane. The magazine 41 is moved between the inside and the outside of the housing along the Y-axis), and the slide table 127 that can project from the inside to the outside of the housing and the slide table 127 that protrudes to the outside of the housing are driven forward and backward. A slide table device 123 including a unit 129 and a slide table device 123.
 このトレイ部品ストック装置29では、スライドテーブル127が、進退駆動部129により駆動される。進退駆動部129は、作動することにより、スライドテーブル127を自動でカバー109の外側と内部空間との間で進退させる。これにより、トレイ部品ストック装置29は、自走式のマガジン搬送装置を通路上で走行させた際のマガジン41の交換が、大掛かりなエレベータ装置等を必要とせずに、安価な設備コストで自動化しやすくなる。 In this tray parts stock device 29, the slide table 127 is driven by the advancing / retreating drive unit 129. The advancing / retreating drive unit 129 automatically advances / retreats the slide table 127 between the outer side and the inner space of the cover 109 by operating. As a result, the tray parts stock device 29 automates the replacement of the magazine 41 when the self-propelled magazine transfer device is run on the aisle at a low equipment cost without the need for a large-scale elevator device or the like. It will be easier.
 また、トレイ部品ストック装置29において、スライドテーブル装置123は、スライドテーブル127を支持し、第2の軸に沿って伸縮するスライドレール167を有する。スライドテーブル127は、スライドレール167の伸縮に伴って筐体(例えばカバー109)の外側と筐体(例えばカバー109)の内側とを移動する。 Further, in the tray component stock device 29, the slide table device 123 supports the slide table 127 and has a slide rail 167 that expands and contracts along the second axis. The slide table 127 moves between the outside of the housing (for example, the cover 109) and the inside of the housing (for example, the cover 109) as the slide rail 167 expands and contracts.
 このトレイ部品ストック装置29では、進退駆動部129を備えたスライドテーブル装置123において、スライドテーブル127が、スライドレール167により支持される。スライドレール167は、スライドテーブル127を、カバー109の内部空間と、カバー109の外側との間で移動可能とする。スライドレール167は、例えば単一のものがスライドテーブル127を支持してもよい。すなわち、スライドテーブル127は、1つの伸縮自在なスライドレール167により、パレットストック部43の内外の間で進退されてもよい。スライドレール167は、1つのものを用いた場合、スライドテーブル127の支持構造が簡素となる。 In this tray parts stock device 29, the slide table 127 is supported by the slide rail 167 in the slide table device 123 provided with the advance / retreat drive unit 129. The slide rail 167 makes the slide table 127 movable between the internal space of the cover 109 and the outside of the cover 109. A single slide rail 167 may support the slide table 127, for example. That is, the slide table 127 may be moved back and forth between the inside and outside of the pallet stock portion 43 by one telescopic slide rail 167. When one slide rail 167 is used, the support structure of the slide table 127 is simplified.
 また、トレイ部品ストック装置29において、スライドテーブル127は、第2の軸に沿って延在し、第1の軸に沿う方向に間隔を空けて平行に配置された2つのスライドレール167を有する。 Further, in the tray component stocking device 29, the slide table 127 has two slide rails 167 extending along the second axis and arranged in parallel at intervals in the direction along the first axis.
 このトレイ部品ストック装置29では、進退駆動部129を備えたスライドテーブル装置123において、スライドレール167が、互いに平行であり、X軸に沿う方向で離間した2つのスライドレール167により構成される。トレイ部品ストック装置29は、2つのスライドレール167でスライドテーブル127が支持されることにより、スライドテーブル127の積載許容重量が大きくなる。また、スライドテーブル127は、進退方向に直交する方向で離間した2つのスライドレール167に支持されるので、1つのスライドレール167による支持に比べ、マガジン41が安定して支持可能となる。 In this tray parts stock device 29, in the slide table device 123 provided with the advance / retreat drive unit 129, the slide rails 167 are parallel to each other and are composed of two slide rails 167 separated in the direction along the X axis. In the tray component stock device 29, the slide table 127 is supported by the two slide rails 167, so that the load capacity of the slide table 127 is increased. Further, since the slide table 127 is supported by two slide rails 167 separated in a direction orthogonal to the advancing / retreating direction, the magazine 41 can be stably supported as compared with the support by one slide rail 167.
 また、トレイ部品ストック装置29において、進退駆動部129は、2つのスライドレール167の間に配置される。 Further, in the tray parts stock device 29, the advance / retreat drive unit 129 is arranged between the two slide rails 167.
 このトレイ部品ストック装置29では、スライドテーブル装置123が、互いに平行であり、X軸に沿う方向で離間した2つのスライドレール167を備える。スライドテーブル装置123は、この2つのスライドテーブル127の間で空いた空間部分を利用して進退駆動部129が設置される。これにより、スライドテーブル装置123は、進退駆動部129を備えた進退駆動機構をコンパクトに構成できる。 In this tray component stock device 29, the slide table device 123 includes two slide rails 167 that are parallel to each other and are separated in the direction along the X axis. In the slide table device 123, the advance / retreat drive unit 129 is installed by utilizing the space portion vacated between the two slide tables 127. As a result, the slide table device 123 can compactly configure the advance / retreat drive mechanism provided with the advance / retreat drive unit 129.
 また、トレイ部品ストック装置29において、進退駆動部129は、第2の軸に平行に長手方向を向けた状態で筐体の内部に固定された第1ラックギア189と、スライドテーブル127に装着され、第1ラックギア189と向かい合って平行に配置された第2ラックギア191と、第1ラックギア189と第2ラックギア191に噛みあうピニオンギア193と、ピニオンギア193を第2の軸に沿って移動させる進退駆動源(例えばエアシリンダ131)と、を有する。 Further, in the tray component stock device 29, the advancing / retreating drive unit 129 is mounted on the first rack gear 189 fixed inside the housing and the slide table 127 in a state where the advancing / retreating drive unit 129 is oriented in the longitudinal direction parallel to the second axis. A second rack gear 191 arranged in parallel facing the first rack gear 189, a pinion gear 193 that meshes with the first rack gear 189 and the second rack gear 191 and an advancing / retreating drive that moves the pinion gear 193 along the second axis. It has a source (eg, an air cylinder 131).
 このトレイ部品ストック装置29では、スライドテーブル127が、進退駆動部129により進退駆動される。進退駆動部129は、ピニオンギア193を回転自在に支持しながら、第2の軸に沿って移動させる。ピニオンギア193は、カバー109の内部に固定される第1ラックギア189に噛みあう。一方、ピニオンギア193は、スライドレール167によりカバー109に対して進退自在に設けられ、第1ラックギア189と向かい合って平行に配置された第2ラックギア191とも噛みあっている。つまり、ピニオンギア193は、カバー内で固定された第1ラックギア189と、進退自在となったスライドテーブル127に装着された第2ラックギア191とに挟まれて双方に噛みあっている。 In this tray parts stock device 29, the slide table 127 is driven forward and backward by the advance / retreat drive unit 129. The advancing / retreating drive unit 129 rotatably supports the pinion gear 193 and moves it along the second axis. The pinion gear 193 meshes with the first rack gear 189 fixed inside the cover 109. On the other hand, the pinion gear 193 is provided so as to be able to move forward and backward with respect to the cover 109 by the slide rail 167, and meshes with the second rack gear 191 arranged in parallel with the first rack gear 189. That is, the pinion gear 193 is sandwiched between the first rack gear 189 fixed in the cover and the second rack gear 191 mounted on the slide table 127 that can be moved forward and backward, and meshes with both of them.
 ピニオンギア193は、進退駆動源(例えばエアシリンダ131)により、双方のラックギアに挟まれた状態で噛みあいながら、Y軸に沿って移動される。ピニオンギア193は、スライドテーブル127がカバー109の内側に後退しているとき、第1ラックギア189の奥側(スライドテーブル進出側と反対側)に位置して噛みあっている。このとき、スライドテーブル127に装着された第2ラックギア191は、進出方向の先端側がピニオンギア193に噛みあっている。 The pinion gear 193 is moved along the Y axis by an advancing / retreating drive source (for example, an air cylinder 131) while being engaged with each other while being sandwiched between both rack gears. The pinion gear 193 is located on the back side (opposite side of the slide table advance side) of the first rack gear 189 and meshes with the slide table 127 when the slide table 127 is retracted inside the cover 109. At this time, the tip side of the second rack gear 191 mounted on the slide table 127 in the advancing direction meshes with the pinion gear 193.
 進退駆動源(例えばエアシリンダ131)が駆動され、ピニオンギア193が第1ラックギア189に噛みあいながら進出方向に転動すると、ピニオンギア193に噛みあっている第2ラックギア191が、ピニオンギア193の移動量の2倍の移動量で進出方向へ繰り出されることになる。 When the advancing / retreating drive source (for example, an air cylinder 131) is driven and the pinion gear 193 rolls in the advancing direction while meshing with the first rack gear 189, the second rack gear 191 meshing with the pinion gear 193 becomes the pinion gear 193. It will be delivered in the direction of advance with twice the amount of movement.
 これにより、トレイ部品供給装置23では、スライドテーブル装置123をコンパクトなサイズに収めつつ、スライドテーブル127に必要な移動ストロークを確保することが可能となる。この進退駆動部129では、ピニオンギア193とラックギアとのギア比を変えることにより、進退駆動源によるピニオンギア193の移動ストロークに対するスライドテーブル127の移動ストロークを変えることが可能となる。 As a result, in the tray parts supply device 23, it is possible to secure the moving stroke required for the slide table 127 while accommodating the slide table device 123 in a compact size. In the advance / retreat drive unit 129, by changing the gear ratio between the pinion gear 193 and the rack gear, it is possible to change the movement stroke of the slide table 127 with respect to the movement stroke of the pinion gear 193 by the advance / retreat drive source.
 また、トレイ部品ストック装置29において、スライドテーブル127には、マガジン41に対する第1の軸方向の位置を規制する第1規制部(例えばXアライメントガイド181)と、マガジン41に対する第2の軸方向の位置を規制する第2規制部(例えばYアライメントガイド187)と、が設けられている。 Further, in the tray component stock device 29, the slide table 127 has a first restricting unit (for example, an X alignment guide 181) that regulates a position in the first axial direction with respect to the magazine 41, and a second axial direction with respect to the magazine 41. A second regulating unit (for example, Y alignment guide 187) that regulates the position is provided.
 このトレイ部品ストック装置29では、マガジン41がZ軸に沿う方向で下方へ移動されることにより、第1規制部(例えばXアライメントガイド181)に、マガジン41のXアライメントローラ93が接触する。マガジン41は、Xアライメントローラ93がXアライメントガイド181に案内されることにより、第1の軸方向(例えばX軸方向)の位置が、スライドテーブル127に対して位置決めされる。 In this tray component stock device 29, the magazine 41 is moved downward in the direction along the Z axis, so that the X alignment roller 93 of the magazine 41 comes into contact with the first regulation unit (for example, the X alignment guide 181). The position of the magazine 41 in the first axial direction (for example, the X-axis direction) is positioned with respect to the slide table 127 by guiding the X alignment roller 93 to the X alignment guide 181.
 マガジン41は、Xアライメントガイド181とXアライメントローラ93の接触と同時に、第2規制部(例えばYアライメントガイド187)にYアライメントローラ99が接触する。マガジン41は、Yアライメントローラ99がYアライメントガイド187の傾斜面185に案内されることにより、第2の軸方向(例えばY軸方向)の位置が、スライドテーブル127に対して位置決めされる。 In the magazine 41, the Y alignment roller 99 comes into contact with the second regulation unit (for example, the Y alignment guide 187) at the same time as the contact between the X alignment guide 181 and the X alignment roller 93. In the magazine 41, the position in the second axial direction (for example, the Y-axis direction) is positioned with respect to the slide table 127 by guiding the Y alignment roller 99 to the inclined surface 185 of the Y alignment guide 187.
 マガジン41は、最終下降位置まで移動して載置されると、4つのYアライメントガイド187に底板87の下面が当接する。これにより、マガジン41は、Z軸の位置が、スライドテーブル127に対して位置決めされる。その結果、マガジン41は、スライドテーブル127に載置が完了すると同時に、スライドテーブル127に対するXYZ方向の位置決めがなされることになる。 When the magazine 41 is moved to the final descending position and placed, the lower surface of the bottom plate 87 abuts on the four Y alignment guides 187. As a result, the position of the Z-axis of the magazine 41 is positioned with respect to the slide table 127. As a result, the magazine 41 is positioned in the XYZ direction with respect to the slide table 127 at the same time when the magazine 41 is placed on the slide table 127.
 また、実施の形態1に係る部品装着システム11は、部品収納体69(例えばトレイ31)に収納された部品33を部品装着部(例えば装着ヘッド35)によって取り出して基板17に搭載する部品装着装置13と、部品収納体69(例えばトレイ31)を部品装着部(例えば装着ヘッド35)によって取り出し可能な位置に供給する部品供給装置(例えばトレイ部品供給装置23)と、トレイ部品供給装置23に部品収納体69(例えばトレイ31)を補充する部品ストック装置(例えばトレイ部品ストック装置29)と、を備える。トレイ部品ストック装置29は、部品33を格納した部品収納体69(例えばトレイ31を載置するパレット39)を第1の軸(例えばX軸)に沿って抜き差し可能とするマガジン41を筐体の内部空間に収納可能なストッカ(例えばパレットストック部43)と、ストッカとトレイ部品供給装置23との間で部品収納体69(例えばパレット39)を搬送する部品収納体搬送部(例えばパレット搬送部45)と、マガジン41を載置し、水平面に沿う面内で第1の軸と交差する第2の軸(例えばY軸)に沿って筐体の内側と外側との間でマガジン41を移動させ、筐体の内側から外側に突出可能なスライドテーブル127を有するスライドテーブル装置123と、を有する。 Further, the component mounting system 11 according to the first embodiment is a component mounting device that takes out the component 33 stored in the component storage body 69 (for example, the tray 31) by the component mounting unit (for example, the mounting head 35) and mounts the component 33 on the substrate 17. 13 and a parts supply device (for example, a tray parts supply device 23) that supplies a parts storage body 69 (for example, a tray 31) to a position where it can be taken out by a parts mounting portion (for example, a mounting head 35), and parts to the tray parts supply device 23. A parts stock device (for example, a tray parts stock device 29) for replenishing the storage body 69 (for example, the tray 31) is provided. The tray parts stock device 29 has a magazine 41 that allows the parts storage body 69 (for example, the pallet 39 on which the tray 31 is placed) for storing the parts 33 to be inserted and removed along the first axis (for example, the X axis). A parts storage body transport unit (for example, a pallet transport unit 45) that transports a parts storage body 69 (for example, a pallet 39) between a stocker (for example, a pallet stock unit 43) that can be stored in the internal space and the stocker and the tray parts supply device 23. ) And the magazine 41 are placed, and the magazine 41 is moved between the inside and the outside of the housing along a second axis (for example, the Y axis) that intersects the first axis in a plane along the horizontal plane. A slide table device 123 having a slide table 127 that can project from the inside to the outside of the housing.
 実施の形態1に係る部品装着システム11では、パレットストック部43が、カバー109に覆われた内部空間に、スライドテーブル装置123を備える。スライドテーブル装置123は、第2の軸(Y軸)に沿ってカバー109の内部空間とカバー109の外側との間でマガジン41を移動可能とする。 In the component mounting system 11 according to the first embodiment, the pallet stock portion 43 is provided with the slide table device 123 in the internal space covered with the cover 109. The slide table device 123 allows the magazine 41 to be moved between the internal space of the cover 109 and the outside of the cover 109 along the second axis (Y axis).
 パレットストック部43には、複数のマガジン41が、上下方向に多段状に収納される。それぞれのマガジン41に収納されたパレット39は、X軸に沿う方向で抜き差しが可能となる。 A plurality of magazines 41 are stored in the pallet stock section 43 in multiple stages in the vertical direction. The pallets 39 stored in the respective magazines 41 can be inserted and removed in the direction along the X axis.
 スライドテーブル装置123には、上下方向に多段状に収納された複数のマガジン41のうち、その一つが載置される。この一つのマガジン41は、スライドテーブル装置123により、カバー109の内外へ移動可能となる。つまり、トレイ部品ストック装置29は、スライドテーブル装置123に載置されたこの一つのマガジン41のみが、交換可能となる。スライドテーブル装置123は、パレットストック部43の外側と内部空間との間でマガジン41を一つずつ交換する受け渡し部(すなわち、交換部)となる。 One of a plurality of magazines 41 stored in multiple stages in the vertical direction is placed on the slide table device 123. This one magazine 41 can be moved in and out of the cover 109 by the slide table device 123. That is, in the tray parts stock device 29, only this one magazine 41 mounted on the slide table device 123 can be replaced. The slide table device 123 serves as a transfer unit (that is, an exchange unit) for exchanging magazines 41 one by one between the outside of the pallet stock unit 43 and the internal space.
 スライドテーブル装置123に載置されたマガジン41からは、部品33をトレイ31に格納したパレット39が、順次にトレイ部品供給装置23へ移動される。パレット39が引き出されたマガジン41の空きスペースには、部品33が消費されて空となったトレイ31を載置したパレット39がトレイ部品供給装置23から戻されて収納される。つまり、スライドテーブル装置123に載置された部品33の補充済みマガジン41は、空のパレット39と順次に入れ替えられて行く。 From the magazine 41 mounted on the slide table device 123, the pallet 39 in which the parts 33 are stored in the tray 31 is sequentially moved to the tray parts supply device 23. In the empty space of the magazine 41 from which the pallet 39 is pulled out, the pallet 39 on which the tray 31 emptied by consuming the parts 33 is placed is returned from the tray parts supply device 23 and stored. That is, the replenished magazine 41 of the parts 33 mounted on the slide table device 123 is sequentially replaced with the empty pallet 39.
 スライドテーブル装置123に載置されたマガジン41は、収納されたパレット39が、全て空のパレット39に入れ替えられると、スライドテーブル装置123により、カバー109の外側(通路上)へと移動される。スライドテーブル装置123が繰り出されることにより、通路上に移動された部品消費済みのマガジン41は、人手やマガジン搬送装置により、マガジン41ごと部品33の補充済みのマガジン41と交換される。 The magazine 41 mounted on the slide table device 123 is moved to the outside (on the aisle) of the cover 109 by the slide table device 123 when all the stored pallets 39 are replaced with empty pallets 39. By feeding out the slide table device 123, the magazine 41 whose parts have been consumed moved onto the aisle is replaced with the magazine 41 which has been replenished with the parts 33 together with the magazine 41 by hand or by the magazine transfer device.
 この部品装着システム11では、パレットストック部43の通路側から、さらにスライドテーブル装置123によりマガジン41が通路上に繰り出されるので、例えば20kg程度の重量を有するマガジン41を、容易に交換することが可能となる。 In this component mounting system 11, the magazine 41 is further extended onto the aisle by the slide table device 123 from the aisle side of the pallet stock portion 43, so that the magazine 41 having a weight of, for example, about 20 kg can be easily replaced. It becomes.
 なお、スライドテーブル装置123は、人手により通路側から引き出すものであってもよい。この場合、通路側に引き出されたスライドテーブル装置123は、棚として働き、通路上の広いスペースが作業スペースとなって、人手による交換作業を容易にすることができる。 The slide table device 123 may be manually pulled out from the aisle side. In this case, the slide table device 123 pulled out to the aisle side functions as a shelf, and a large space on the aisle becomes a work space, which facilitates manual replacement work.
 また、部品装着システム11は、部品収納体69(例えばトレイ31)に収納された部品33を部品装着部(例えば装着ヘッド35)によって取り出して基板17に搭載する部品装着装置13と、部品収納体69(例えばトレイ31)を部品装着部(例えば装着ヘッド35)によって取り出し可能な位置に供給する部品供給装置(例えばトレイ部品供給装置23)と、トレイ部品供給装置23に部品収納体69(例えばトレイ31)を補充する部品ストック装置(例えばトレイ部品ストック装置29)と、を備える。トレイ部品ストック装置29は、部品33を格納した部品収納体69(例えばトレイ31を載置するパレット39)を第1の軸(例えばX軸)に沿って抜き差し可能とするマガジン41を筐体(例えばカバー109)の内部空間に収納可能なストッカ(例えばパレットストック部43)と、ストッカとトレイ部品供給装置23との間で部品収納体69(例えばパレット39)を搬送する部品収納体搬送部(例えばパレット搬送部45)と、マガジン41を載置し、水平面に沿う面内で第1の軸と交差する第2の軸(例えばY軸)に沿って筐体(例えばカバー109)の内側と筐体(例えばカバー109)の外側との間でマガジン41を移動させ、筐体(例えばカバー109)の内側から筐体(例えばカバー109)の外側に突出可能なスライドテーブル127を有するスライドテーブル装置123と、を有する。スライドテーブル装置123は、スライドテーブル127を筐体の外側に突出させる進退駆動部129を含む。 Further, the component mounting system 11 has a component mounting device 13 for taking out the component 33 stored in the component storage body 69 (for example, the tray 31) by the component mounting unit (for example, the mounting head 35) and mounting the component 33 on the board 17, and the component storage body. A parts supply device (for example, a tray parts supply device 23) that supplies 69 (for example, a tray 31) to a position where it can be taken out by a parts mounting portion (for example, a mounting head 35), and a parts storage body 69 (for example, a tray) for the tray parts supply device 23. A parts stocking device (for example, a tray parts stocking device 29) for replenishing 31) is provided. The tray parts stock device 29 has a housing (for example, a magazine 41) that allows a parts storage body 69 (for example, a pallet 39 on which the tray 31 is placed) for storing parts 33 to be inserted and removed along a first axis (for example, an X axis). For example, a stocker (for example, a pallet stock unit 43) that can be stored in the internal space of the cover 109) and a parts storage body transport unit (for example, a parts storage unit transport unit) that conveys the parts storage body 69 (for example, the pallet 39) between the stocker and the tray parts supply device 23. For example, the pallet transport unit 45) and the inside of the housing (for example, the cover 109) along the second axis (for example, the Y axis) where the magazine 41 is placed and intersects with the first axis in the plane along the horizontal plane. A slide table device having a slide table 127 that moves the magazine 41 to and from the outside of the housing (for example, the cover 109) and can project from the inside of the housing (for example, the cover 109) to the outside of the housing (for example, the cover 109). 123 and. The slide table device 123 includes an advancing / retreating driving unit 129 that projects the slide table 127 to the outside of the housing.
 この部品装着システム11では、パレットストック部43が、カバー109に覆われた内部空間に、スライドテーブル装置123を備える。スライドテーブル装置123は、第2の軸(Y軸)に沿ってカバー109の内部空間とカバー109の外側との間でマガジン41を移動可能とする。 In this component mounting system 11, the pallet stock portion 43 is provided with the slide table device 123 in the internal space covered by the cover 109. The slide table device 123 allows the magazine 41 to be moved between the internal space of the cover 109 and the outside of the cover 109 along the second axis (Y axis).
 パレットストック部43には、複数のマガジン41が、上下方向に多段状に収納される。それぞれのマガジン41に収納されたパレット39は、X軸に沿う方向で抜き差しが可能となる。 A plurality of magazines 41 are stored in the pallet stock section 43 in multiple stages in the vertical direction. The pallets 39 stored in the respective magazines 41 can be inserted and removed in the direction along the X axis.
 スライドテーブル装置123には、上下方向に多段状に収納された複数のマガジン41のうち、その一つが載置される。この一つのマガジン41は、スライドテーブル装置123により、カバー109の内外へ移動可能となる。つまり、トレイ部品ストック装置29は、スライドテーブル装置123に載置されたこの一つのマガジン41のみが、交換可能となる。スライドテーブル装置123は、パレットストック部43の外側と内部空間との間でマガジン41を一つずつ交換する受け渡し部(すなわち、交換部)となる。 One of a plurality of magazines 41 stored in multiple stages in the vertical direction is placed on the slide table device 123. This one magazine 41 can be moved in and out of the cover 109 by the slide table device 123. That is, in the tray parts stock device 29, only this one magazine 41 mounted on the slide table device 123 can be replaced. The slide table device 123 serves as a transfer unit (that is, an exchange unit) for exchanging magazines 41 one by one between the outside of the pallet stock unit 43 and the internal space.
 スライドテーブル装置123に載置されたマガジン41からは、部品33をトレイ31に格納したパレット39が、順次にトレイ部品供給装置23へ移動される。パレット39が引き出されたマガジン41の空きスペースには、部品33が消費されて空となったトレイ31を載置したパレット39がトレイ部品供給装置23から戻されて収納される。つまり、スライドテーブル装置123に載置された部品33の補充済みマガジン41は、空のパレット39と順次に入れ替えられて行く。 From the magazine 41 mounted on the slide table device 123, the pallet 39 in which the parts 33 are stored in the tray 31 is sequentially moved to the tray parts supply device 23. In the empty space of the magazine 41 from which the pallet 39 is pulled out, the pallet 39 on which the tray 31 emptied by consuming the parts 33 is placed is returned from the tray parts supply device 23 and stored. That is, the replenished magazine 41 of the parts 33 mounted on the slide table device 123 is sequentially replaced with the empty pallet 39.
 スライドテーブル装置123に載置されたマガジン41は、収納されたパレット39が、全て空のパレット39に入れ替えられると、スライドテーブル装置123により、カバー109の外側(通路上)へと移動される。スライドテーブル装置123が繰り出されることにより、通路上に移動された部品消費済みのマガジン41は、人手やマガジン搬送装置により、マガジン41ごと部品33の補充済みのマガジン41と交換される。 The magazine 41 mounted on the slide table device 123 is moved to the outside (on the aisle) of the cover 109 by the slide table device 123 when all the stored pallets 39 are replaced with empty pallets 39. By feeding out the slide table device 123, the magazine 41 whose parts have been consumed moved onto the aisle is replaced with the magazine 41 which has been replenished with the parts 33 together with the magazine 41 by hand or by the magazine transfer device.
 この部品装着システム11では、パレットストック部43の通路側から、さらにスライドテーブル装置123によりマガジン41が通路上に繰り出されるので、例えば20kg程度の重量を有するマガジン41を、容易に交換することが可能となる。 In this component mounting system 11, the magazine 41 is further extended onto the aisle by the slide table device 123 from the aisle side of the pallet stock portion 43, so that the magazine 41 having a weight of, for example, about 20 kg can be easily replaced. It becomes.
 なお、スライドテーブル装置123は、人手により通路側から引き出すものであってもよい。この場合、通路側に引き出されたスライドテーブル装置123は、棚として働き、通路上の広いスペースが作業スペースとなって、人手による交換作業を容易にすることができる。 The slide table device 123 may be manually pulled out from the aisle side. In this case, the slide table device 123 pulled out to the aisle side functions as a shelf, and a large space on the aisle becomes a work space, which facilitates manual replacement work.
 そして、この部品装着システム11では、スライドテーブル127が、進退駆動部129により駆動される。進退駆動部129は、作動することにより、スライドテーブル127を自動でカバー109の外側と内部空間との間で進退させる。これにより、部品装着システム11は、自走式のマガジン搬送装置を通路上で走行させた際のマガジン41の交換が、大掛かりなエレベータ装置等を必要とせずに、安価な設備コストで自動化しやすくなる。 Then, in this component mounting system 11, the slide table 127 is driven by the advancing / retreating drive unit 129. The advancing / retreating drive unit 129 automatically advances / retreats the slide table 127 between the outer side and the inner space of the cover 109 by operating. As a result, in the component mounting system 11, the replacement of the magazine 41 when the self-propelled magazine transport device is run on the aisle can be easily automated at low equipment cost without the need for a large-scale elevator device or the like. Become.
(実施の形態2)
 次に、実施の形態2について説明する。
(Embodiment 2)
Next, the second embodiment will be described.
 図26は、実施の形態2に係る物品搬送装置209を備えた物品搬送システム211の全体構成図である。なお、実施の形態2において、実施の形態1において図1~図25に示した部材・部位と同等の部材・部位には同一の符号を付し重複する説明は省略する。 FIG. 26 is an overall configuration diagram of an article transport system 211 provided with the article transport device 209 according to the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, the same members and parts as those shown in FIGS. 1 to 25 in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and duplicate description will be omitted.
 物品搬送装置209は、工場フロアに設置された少なくとも一つの製造設備(後述参照)で使用する物品(例えば、部品収納体69の一例としてのパレット39。以下同様。)を工場フロア上で搬送する。物品搬送装置209は、マガジン搬送装置とも称せられる。 The article transfer device 209 conveys articles (for example, a pallet 39 as an example of a component storage body 69; the same applies hereinafter) used in at least one manufacturing facility (see below) installed on the factory floor. .. The article transfer device 209 is also referred to as a magazine transfer device.
 ここで、本明細書において、製造設備とは、組立、加工、処理、検査等を行う装置のみならず、それらの部材で消費される物品の保管や装置へ供給する付帯設備を含める。本明細書では、トレイ部品供給装置23、テープ部品供給装置25、トレイ部品ストック装置29が付帯設備に該当する。 Here, in the present specification, the manufacturing equipment includes not only the equipment for assembling, processing, processing, inspection, etc., but also the incidental equipment for storing and supplying the articles consumed by those members. In this specification, the tray parts supply device 23, the tape parts supply device 25, and the tray parts stock device 29 correspond to incidental equipment.
 物品搬送装置209は、搬送車213が物品搬送装置209の側部に連結されることにより、工場フロアの通路15を自動走行可能となる。つまり、物品搬送装置209は、牽引型である。物品搬送装置209は、トレイ部品供給装置23に接続されるトレイ部品ストック装置29から離れた作業場所(図示略)で物品(例えばパレット39)を装填したマガジン41を収容し、指定されたトレイ部品ストック装置29に運搬およびドッキングして、マガジン41の回収および補給を可能とする。 The article transfer device 209 can automatically travel in the passage 15 on the factory floor by connecting the transfer vehicle 213 to the side portion of the article transfer device 209. That is, the article transport device 209 is a traction type. The article transfer device 209 accommodates a magazine 41 loaded with articles (for example, a pallet 39) at a work place (not shown) away from the tray component stock device 29 connected to the tray component supply device 23, and a designated tray component. It can be transported and docked to the stock device 29 to collect and replenish the magazine 41.
 図27は、物品搬送装置209の斜視図である。物品搬送装置209は、少なくとも一つの物品を収納する物品収納体を有する。実施の形態2において、物品収納体は、マガジン41である。以下、物品収納体は、マガジン41とも称す。なお、実施の形態1で説明した部品収納体69(図4参照)は、トレイ31でもよいし、パレット39でもよいし、トレイ31とパレット39とにより構成されたものであってよい。物品搬送装置209は、工場フロアを走行するための車輪215を備えたベース部217を有する。物品搬送装置209は、ベース部217よりも上方が上下方向に長い直方体状のカバー219により覆われる。 FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the article transport device 209. The article transfer device 209 has an article storage body for accommodating at least one article. In the second embodiment, the article storage body is the magazine 41. Hereinafter, the article storage body is also referred to as a magazine 41. The component storage body 69 (see FIG. 4) described in the first embodiment may be a tray 31, a pallet 39, or may be composed of a tray 31 and a pallet 39. The article transfer device 209 has a base portion 217 provided with wheels 215 for traveling on the factory floor. The article transfer device 209 is covered with a rectangular parallelepiped cover 219 that is vertically long above the base portion 217.
 カバー219の内方には、開口221を有した収納ラックであるマガジン収納ラック223が収容される。マガジン収納ラック223の内壁面には、マガジン41を保持する保持テーブルが少なくとも一つ設けられる。この保持テーブルは、マガジン収納ラック223がベース部217に対して昇降されることにより、マガジン収納ラック223と一体的に昇降する。保持テーブルは、例えば第1のマガジン保持テーブル225と第2のマガジン保持テーブル227とからなる。なお、保持テーブルの数は、2つに限定されない。マガジン収納ラック223は、トレイ部品ストック装置29のスライドテーブル127が開口221から進退することにより、保持テーブルの横方向からマガジン41を出し入れ可能としている。 Inside the cover 219, a magazine storage rack 223, which is a storage rack having an opening 221 is accommodated. At least one holding table for holding the magazine 41 is provided on the inner wall surface of the magazine storage rack 223. This holding table moves up and down integrally with the magazine storage rack 223 by raising and lowering the magazine storage rack 223 with respect to the base portion 217. The holding table includes, for example, a first magazine holding table 225 and a second magazine holding table 227. The number of holding tables is not limited to two. The magazine storage rack 223 allows the magazine 41 to be taken in and out from the lateral direction of the holding table by moving the slide table 127 of the tray parts stock device 29 back and forth from the opening 221.
 図28は、物品搬送装置209の側断面図である。物品搬送装置209は、収納ラックを昇降させるラック昇降装置229を備える。ラック昇降装置229は、ラック昇降モータ231と、送りねじ233と、ラック昇降ナット部235と、を有する。ラック昇降モータ231は、駆動軸がZ軸に沿う姿勢で、上下に延在するフレーム237に固定される。送りねじ233は、ラック昇降モータ231の駆動軸に同軸で接続され、複数の軸受板239により回転自在に支持される。ラック昇降ナット部235は、送りねじ233に螺合するとともに、ラック昇降ナット部235の側面がマガジン収納ラック223の背面(つまり開口221と反対側の面)に固定される。 FIG. 28 is a side sectional view of the article transport device 209. The article transporting device 209 includes a rack lifting device 229 that raises and lowers the storage rack. The rack elevating device 229 includes a rack elevating motor 231, a feed screw 233, and a rack elevating nut portion 235. The rack elevating motor 231 is fixed to a frame 237 extending up and down with the drive shaft in a posture along the Z axis. The lead screw 233 is coaxially connected to the drive shaft of the rack elevating motor 231 and is rotatably supported by a plurality of bearing plates 239. The rack elevating nut portion 235 is screwed into the feed screw 233, and the side surface of the rack elevating nut portion 235 is fixed to the back surface of the magazine storage rack 223 (that is, the surface opposite to the opening 221).
 図29は、図28のB-B断面図である。したがって、ラック昇降モータ231が駆動されると、送りねじ233が回転し、ラック昇降ナット部235が上下方向に移動することにより、マガジン収納ラック223の背面に固定されたスライド部241が、ベース部217に立設されたスライドガイド243に案内されて、マガジン収納ラック223が昇降する。図28に示すユニット内空間245に収容されたラック昇降モータ231は、ベース部217に収容されたマガジン搬送装置制御部247により動作が制御される。また、開口221の内方には、マガジン収納ラック223の昇降に干渉しない位置でマガジン搬送装置制御部247に接続される無線通信ユニット249が設けられている。 FIG. 29 is a sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 28. Therefore, when the rack elevating motor 231 is driven, the feed screw 233 rotates and the rack elevating nut portion 235 moves in the vertical direction, so that the slide portion 241 fixed to the back surface of the magazine storage rack 223 becomes the base portion. Guided by the slide guide 243 erected on the 217, the magazine storage rack 223 moves up and down. The operation of the rack elevating motor 231 housed in the unit inner space 245 shown in FIG. 28 is controlled by the magazine transfer device control unit 247 housed in the base unit 217. Further, inside the opening 221 is provided a wireless communication unit 249 connected to the magazine transport device control unit 247 at a position that does not interfere with the raising and lowering of the magazine storage rack 223.
 図27、図28に示すように、マガジン収納ラック223の開口221には、後述する基準高さ検出部である基準高さ検出センサ251が設けられる。基準高さ検出部は、センサ単体に限定されず、例えば画像認識用のカメラユニット等であってもよい。また、図28に示すように、マガジン収納ラック223の内壁面には、第1のマガジン保持テーブル225および第2のマガジン保持テーブル227のそれぞれを上下で挟むスライドテーブル検出センサ253が一対ずつ合計4つ設けられている。 As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the opening 221 of the magazine storage rack 223 is provided with a reference height detection sensor 251 which is a reference height detection unit described later. The reference height detection unit is not limited to the sensor alone, and may be, for example, a camera unit for image recognition or the like. Further, as shown in FIG. 28, on the inner wall surface of the magazine storage rack 223, a pair of slide table detection sensors 253 sandwiching each of the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227 at the top and bottom is a total of four. There are two.
 図29に示すように、第1のマガジン保持テーブル225および第2のマガジン保持テーブル227のそれぞれには、Y軸に沿う両端側に、後述するXアライメントローラ255、マガジン受け部257、Yアライメント部材259が設けられる。第1のマガジン保持テーブル225および第2のマガジン保持テーブル227のそれぞれは、マガジン収納ラック223の対向する内壁面に両側が支持される。なお、図29中の破線は、マガジン41を平面視した輪郭を示す。Xアライメントローラ255、マガジン受け部257、Yアライメント部材259は、マガジン41の四隅にそれぞれが配置される。すなわち、Xアライメントローラ255、マガジン受け部257、Yアライメント部材259は、それぞれが4つ配置される。 As shown in FIG. 29, each of the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227 has an X alignment roller 255, a magazine receiving portion 257, and a Y alignment member, which will be described later, on both ends along the Y axis. 259 is provided. Each of the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227 is supported on both sides by the facing inner wall surface of the magazine storage rack 223. The broken line in FIG. 29 shows the outline of the magazine 41 in a plan view. The X alignment roller 255, the magazine receiving portion 257, and the Y alignment member 259 are arranged at the four corners of the magazine 41, respectively. That is, four X alignment rollers 255, a magazine receiving portion 257, and a Y alignment member 259 are arranged.
 マガジン収納ラック223の奥壁と第1のマガジン保持テーブル225との間、マガジン収納ラック223の奥壁と第2のマガジン保持テーブル227との間のそれぞれには、ストッパ261が設けられる。それぞれのストッパ261は、第1のマガジン保持テーブル225および第2のマガジン保持テーブル227のそれぞれが所定以上、マガジン収納ラック223に後退するのを規制する。また、マガジン収納ラック223の奥壁と第1のマガジン保持テーブル225との間には、後述する第1マガジン検出センサ263が設けられる。第1マガジン検出センサ263は、第1のマガジン保持テーブル225に載るマガジン41を検出する。マガジン収納ラック223の奥壁と第2のマガジン保持テーブル227との間には、後述する第2マガジン検出センサ265が設けられる。第2マガジン検出センサ265は、第2のマガジン保持テーブル227に載るマガジン41を検出する。 A stopper 261 is provided between the back wall of the magazine storage rack 223 and the first magazine holding table 225, and between the back wall of the magazine storage rack 223 and the second magazine holding table 227. Each stopper 261 restricts each of the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227 from retracting to the magazine storage rack 223 by a predetermined number or more. Further, a first magazine detection sensor 263, which will be described later, is provided between the back wall of the magazine storage rack 223 and the first magazine holding table 225. The first magazine detection sensor 263 detects the magazine 41 placed on the first magazine holding table 225. A second magazine detection sensor 265, which will be described later, is provided between the back wall of the magazine storage rack 223 and the second magazine holding table 227. The second magazine detection sensor 265 detects the magazine 41 placed on the second magazine holding table 227.
 第1のマガジン保持テーブル225および第2のマガジン保持テーブル227のそれぞれには、マガジン41に帯電する静電気を除く除電用接触子267が設けられている。 Each of the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227 is provided with a static eliminating contact 267 for removing static electricity charged in the magazine 41.
 図27に示すように、ベース部217は、ベース部217が第1の方向(例えばY軸に沿う方向)へ移動して製造設備に接近することによって製造設備が有するドッキングベース115(図8参照)にドッキングするドッキング部269をさらに有する。 As shown in FIG. 27, the base portion 217 has a docking base 115 (see FIG. 8) possessed by the manufacturing equipment by moving the base portion 217 in a first direction (for example, a direction along the Y axis) and approaching the manufacturing equipment. ) Further has a docking unit 269 for docking.
 図30は、ドッキングベース115の斜視図である。図31は、ドッキング部269の斜視図である。ドッキング部269は、ドッキングベース115に設けた少なくとも一つのアライメント部材に接触しながら第1の方向(Y軸に沿う方向)へ移動して接近することで第1の方向と水平方向に直行する第2の方向(例えばX軸に沿う方向)におけるベース部217(すなわち、物品搬送装置209全体)の位置を調整する少なくとも一つの被アライメント部材を有する。ドッキングベース115に設けたアライメント部材とは、図30に示す案内斜面425を有するXガイド271と、位置決めピンガイド穴273を有する位置決めピンガイド部材275とである。これらアライメント部材は、X軸に沿う方向の位置規制を行う。ドッキング部269の有する被アライメント部材とは、Xガイドローラ277と、位置決めピン279とのことである。 FIG. 30 is a perspective view of the docking base 115. FIG. 31 is a perspective view of the docking unit 269. The docking portion 269 moves in the first direction (direction along the Y axis) and approaches in contact with at least one alignment member provided on the docking base 115, so that the docking portion 269 is orthogonal to the first direction in the horizontal direction. It has at least one aligned member that adjusts the position of the base portion 217 (ie, the entire article transfer device 209) in two directions (eg, along the X-axis). The alignment member provided on the docking base 115 is an X guide 271 having a guide slope 425 shown in FIG. 30 and a positioning pin guide member 275 having a positioning pin guide hole 273. These alignment members regulate the position in the direction along the X axis. The aligned member included in the docking portion 269 is an X guide roller 277 and a positioning pin 279.
 物品搬送装置209では、図31に示すように、これら二つの被アライメント部材が、第2の方向(X軸に沿う方向)に間隔を空けて配置される。これらそれぞれの被アライメント部材は、ドッキングベース115に第2の方向に間隔を空けて設けた二つのアライメント部材に個別に接触する。 In the article transfer device 209, as shown in FIG. 31, these two aligned members are arranged at intervals in the second direction (direction along the X axis). Each of these aligned members individually contacts two alignment members provided on the docking base 115 at intervals in the second direction.
 ベース部217は、ドッキングベース115に設けたドッキング保持部281に保持される被保持部材をさらに有する。ドッキング保持部281は、第2の方向(X軸に沿う方向)に間隔を空けて配置されるフック挿入口283を有する。ベース部217の有する被保持部材とは、図31に示す第2の方向(X軸に沿う方向)に間隔を空けて配置される一対のフック285である。 The base portion 217 further has a held member held by the docking holding portion 281 provided on the docking base 115. The docking holding portion 281 has a hook insertion port 283 arranged at a distance in a second direction (direction along the X axis). The held member included in the base portion 217 is a pair of hooks 285 arranged at intervals in the second direction (direction along the X axis) shown in FIG. 31.
 ドッキング部269は、ドッキングベース115に設けた一方のコネクタ117に電気的に接続される通信用または給電用の他方のコネクタ287を有する。一方のコネクタ117は、一対のXガイド271の中間位置に配置される。他方のコネクタ287は、一対のXガイドローラ277の中間位置に配置される。一方のコネクタ117は、雌端子を絶縁性樹脂からなる雌ハウジングに収容した雌コネクタである。他方のコネクタ287は、雌端子に電気的に接続する雄端子を絶縁性樹脂からなる雄ハウジングに収容した雄コネクタである。なお、一方のコネクタ117および他方のコネクタ287の雌雄は、これに限定されない。 The docking unit 269 has a other connector 287 for communication or power supply that is electrically connected to one connector 117 provided on the docking base 115. One connector 117 is arranged at an intermediate position between the pair of X guides 271. The other connector 287 is arranged at an intermediate position between the pair of X guide rollers 277. One connector 117 is a female connector in which a female terminal is housed in a female housing made of an insulating resin. The other connector 287 is a male connector in which a male terminal electrically connected to a female terminal is housed in a male housing made of an insulating resin. The sex of one connector 117 and the other connector 287 is not limited to this.
 また、他方のコネクタ287は、通信回路用電線と電源回路用電線の二つの回路を接続可能とする。この場合、他方のコネクタ287は、同一の雄ハウジングに、異なる回路の電線に装着される雄端子がそれぞれ収容される複数の端子収容室を備えて形成することができる。また、他方のコネクタ287は、別体で形成された通信用の雄ハウジングと電源用の雄ハウジングとを一体に接合したものであってもよい。 The other connector 287 makes it possible to connect two circuits, a communication circuit electric wire and a power supply circuit electric wire. In this case, the other connector 287 can be formed in the same male housing with a plurality of terminal accommodating chambers accommodating male terminals mounted on electric wires of different circuits. Further, the other connector 287 may be one in which a male housing for communication and a male housing for power supply formed separately are integrally joined.
 ドッキング部269は、ドッキングの際の他方のコネクタ287の上下方向の位置を調整するコネクタ位置調整機構289を有する。もしくは、ドッキングベース115は、ドッキングの際の一方のコネクタ117の上下方向の位置を調整するコネクタ位置調整機構289を有する。つまり、コネクタ位置調整機構289は、ドッキング部269またはドッキングベース115のいずれに設けられてもよい。コネクタ位置調整機構289は、ドッキング相手に設けられるアライメント部材により作動する。実施の形態2において、コネクタ位置調整機構289は、例えばドッキング部269に設けられる。したがって、コネクタ位置調整機構289を作動させるアライメント部材は、ドッキングベース115に設けられている。 The docking unit 269 has a connector position adjusting mechanism 289 that adjusts the vertical position of the other connector 287 at the time of docking. Alternatively, the docking base 115 has a connector position adjusting mechanism 289 that adjusts the vertical position of one connector 117 at the time of docking. That is, the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 may be provided on either the docking portion 269 or the docking base 115. The connector position adjusting mechanism 289 is operated by an alignment member provided on the docking partner. In the second embodiment, the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 is provided, for example, in the docking portion 269. Therefore, the alignment member for operating the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 is provided on the docking base 115.
 コネクタ位置調整機構289は、図31に示す昇降部材291と、押し込み部材293と、カムフォロア295とを有する。また、コネクタ位置調整機構289を作動させるアライメント部材は、図30に示す作用面(例えば傾斜面Sc)を有した板状のカム297である。 The connector position adjusting mechanism 289 has an elevating member 291 shown in FIG. 31, a pushing member 293, and a cam follower 295. Further, the alignment member that operates the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 is a plate-shaped cam 297 having a working surface (for example, an inclined surface Sc) shown in FIG. 30.
 ドッキング部269では、コネクタ位置調整機構289が、他方のコネクタ287とともに昇降する。コネクタ位置調整機構289では、カムフォロア295が、トレイ部品ストック装置29のドッキングベース115に設けたカム297の傾斜面Scに接触しながら第1の方向(Y軸に沿う方向)へ移動することで、カム297によって昇降部材291の高さ位置が調整される。 In the docking section 269, the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 moves up and down together with the other connector 287. In the connector position adjusting mechanism 289, the cam follower 295 moves in the first direction (direction along the Y axis) while contacting the inclined surface Sc of the cam 297 provided on the docking base 115 of the tray component stock device 29. The height position of the elevating member 291 is adjusted by the cam 297.
 物品搬送システム211は、工場フロアに設置された少なくとも一つの製造設備(トレイ部品ストック装置29)と、工場フロアを移動して製造設備で使用する物品を搬送する物品搬送装置209とを有する。物品搬送システム211は、トレイ部品ストック装置29が有する図30に示したドッキングベース115と物品搬送装置209が有する図31に示したドッキング部269とで構成されるドッキング装置299(図35参照)によって、物品搬送装置209をトレイ部品ストック装置29にドッキングさせ、物品搬送装置209とトレイ部品ストック装置29との間で物品の受け渡しを行う。つまり、ドッキング装置299は、物品搬送装置209とトレイ部品ストック装置29とを接合する接合部と言える。 The article transport system 211 includes at least one manufacturing facility (tray parts stock device 29) installed on the factory floor, and an article transport device 209 that moves the factory floor and transports articles used in the manufacturing facility. The article transfer system 211 is provided by a docking device 299 (see FIG. 35) including the docking base 115 shown in FIG. 30 of the tray parts stock device 29 and the docking unit 269 shown in FIG. 31 of the article transfer device 209. , The article transfer device 209 is docked to the tray parts stock device 29, and the article is delivered between the article transfer device 209 and the tray parts stock device 29. That is, it can be said that the docking device 299 is a joint portion for joining the article transport device 209 and the tray component stock device 29.
 図32は、物品搬送装置209に設けられるドッキング部269の平面図である。図33は、図32のC-C断面図である。ドッキング装置299は、誘導部301と、緩衝部303(図30参照)と、ドッキング保持部281(図30参照)と、コネクタ連結部305(図35参照)とを有する。 FIG. 32 is a plan view of the docking unit 269 provided in the article transport device 209. 33 is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 32. The docking device 299 has an induction unit 301, a cushioning unit 303 (see FIG. 30), a docking holding unit 281 (see FIG. 30), and a connector connecting unit 305 (see FIG. 35).
 誘導部301は、アライメント部材(例えばXガイド271)と、被アライメント部材(例えばXガイドアーム307、Xガイドローラ277)とにより構成される。誘導部301は、トレイ部品ストック装置29に向けて第1の方向(Y軸に沿う方向)から接近する物品搬送装置209の第1の方向に水平面内で直交する第2の方向(X軸に沿う方向)における位置を調整しながら誘導する。この誘導部301は、ドッキングベース115に設けた少なくとも一つのアライメント部材(例えばXガイド271)と、ドッキング部269に設けた少なくとも一つの被アライメント部(例えばXガイドアーム307、Xガイドローラ277)を有する。誘導部301は、Xガイドローラ277をXガイド271の案内斜面425に接触させながら第1の方向(Y軸に沿う方向)へ移動することにより、Xガイドローラ277の軌道がXガイド271によって修正され、これにより物品搬送装置209の第2の方向(X軸に沿う方向)における位置が調整される。 The guide portion 301 is composed of an alignment member (for example, X guide 271) and an aligned member (for example, X guide arm 307, X guide roller 277). The guide portion 301 has a second direction (in the X axis) orthogonal to the first direction of the article transport device 209 approaching from the first direction (direction along the Y axis) toward the tray component stock device 29 in the horizontal plane. Guidance is made while adjusting the position in the direction along the line). The guide portion 301 includes at least one alignment member (for example, X guide 271) provided on the docking base 115 and at least one aligned portion (for example, X guide arm 307, X guide roller 277) provided on the docking portion 269. Have. The guide portion 301 moves the X guide roller 277 in the first direction (direction along the Y axis) while contacting the guide slope 425 of the X guide 271, so that the trajectory of the X guide roller 277 is corrected by the X guide 271. This adjusts the position of the article transport device 209 in the second direction (direction along the X axis).
 すなわち、被アライメント部は、アライメント部材(例えばXガイド271)に接触するローラ(例えばXガイドローラ277)を含んで構成されている。 That is, the aligned portion includes a roller (for example, X guide roller 277) that comes into contact with the alignment member (for example, X guide 271).
 図34は、ドッキング前の緩衝部303およびドッキング保持部281の概念図である。緩衝部303は、軸受309と、スライド軸311と、大径部313と、受け部315と、クッション部材(例えば緩衝ばね317)とにより構成される。緩衝部303は、緩衝ばね317の反発力を利用して物品搬送装置209を製造設備から離れる方向に押すことによりドッキング時の衝撃を吸収する。この緩衝部303は、ドッキングベース115またはドッキング部269の一方に配置される。ドッキングベース115またはドッキング部269の他方には、第1の方向(Y軸に沿う方向)から緩衝部303に当接して緩衝ばね317を変形させる突起部319が配置される。実施の形態2においては、緩衝ばね317がドッキングベース115に配置され、突起部319がドッキング部269に配置される。 FIG. 34 is a conceptual diagram of the shock absorber 303 and the docking holding portion 281 before docking. The cushioning portion 303 is composed of a bearing 309, a slide shaft 311, a large diameter portion 313, a receiving portion 315, and a cushion member (for example, a cushioning spring 317). The cushioning unit 303 absorbs the impact at the time of docking by pushing the article transporting device 209 in the direction away from the manufacturing equipment by utilizing the repulsive force of the cushioning spring 317. The cushioning portion 303 is arranged on one of the docking base 115 and the docking portion 269. On the other side of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269, a protrusion 319 that abuts on the cushioning portion 303 from the first direction (direction along the Y axis) and deforms the cushioning spring 317 is arranged. In the second embodiment, the cushioning spring 317 is arranged on the docking base 115, and the protrusion 319 is arranged on the docking part 269.
 ドッキング保持部281は、フック保持部321と、緩衝部303とにより構成される。ドッキング保持部281は、トレイ部品ストック装置29とドッキングした物品搬送装置209が緩衝ばね317の反発力で製造設備(例えばトレイ部品ストック装置29)から離れないようにする。このドッキング保持部281は、ドッキングベース115またはドッキング部269の一方に配置される。ドッキングベース115またはドッキング部269の他方には、ドッキング保持部281に保持される少なくとも一つの被保持部材(例えばフック285)が設けられる。実施の形態2においては、ドッキング保持部281がドッキングベース115に配置され、被保持部材(例えばフック285)がドッキング部269に配置される。 The docking holding portion 281 is composed of a hook holding portion 321 and a cushioning portion 303. The docking holding portion 281 prevents the tray parts stocking device 29 and the docked article transporting device 209 from separating from the manufacturing equipment (for example, the tray parts stocking device 29) due to the repulsive force of the cushioning spring 317. The docking holding portion 281 is arranged on one of the docking base 115 and the docking portion 269. At least one held member (for example, hook 285) held by the docking holding portion 281 is provided on the other side of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269. In the second embodiment, the docking holding portion 281 is arranged on the docking base 115, and the held member (for example, the hook 285) is arranged on the docking portion 269.
 ドッキング保持部281は、レバー323と、保持力発生部325(例えば保持用ばね327、レバー軸329、ドッキング用ローラ331)とを有する。レバー323は、第1の方向(例えばY軸に沿う方向)に対して交差する第3の方向(例えばX軸に沿う方向)から被保持部材(例えばフック285)に当接するドッキング用ローラ331を有する。保持力発生部325は、レバー323を旋回させてドッキング用ローラ331をフック285に押し付ける。フック285は、ドッキングベース115に向かって突出する先端に、肉太部333が形成される。肉太部333は、先端側の前テーパ335と、前テーパ335より基端側の後テーパ337とにより楔状に形成される。フック285は、物品搬送装置209が第1の方向(例えばY軸に沿う方向)に移動してトレイ部品ストック装置29への接近に伴ってドッキング用ローラ331を第3の方向とは反対向きの方向に変位させた後、第3の方向へ変位させるローラ操作面(すなわち、後テーパ337)を有する。 The docking holding portion 281 has a lever 323 and a holding force generating portion 325 (for example, a holding spring 327, a lever shaft 329, and a docking roller 331). The lever 323 provides a docking roller 331 that abuts on the held member (eg, hook 285) from a third direction (eg, along the X axis) that intersects the first direction (eg, along the Y axis). Have. The holding force generating unit 325 turns the lever 323 and presses the docking roller 331 against the hook 285. A thick portion 333 is formed at the tip of the hook 285 protruding toward the docking base 115. The thick portion 333 is formed in a wedge shape by the front taper 335 on the tip side and the rear taper 337 on the base end side of the front taper 335. The hook 285 makes the docking roller 331 in the direction opposite to the third direction as the article transport device 209 moves in the first direction (for example, along the Y axis) and approaches the tray component stock device 29. It has a roller operating surface (ie, rear taper 337) that is displaced in a direction and then displaced in a third direction.
 コネクタ連結部305(図35参照)は、図31、図32に示したコネクタ位置調整機構289(例えば昇降部材291、押し込み部材293)と、アライメント部材(例えばカムフォロア295)とにより構成される。コネクタ連結部305は、物品搬送装置209の製造設備(例えばトレイ部品ストック装置29)への接近に伴い、物品搬送装置209が有する他方のコネクタ287と製造設備が有する一方のコネクタ117との位置を調整する。 The connector connecting portion 305 (see FIG. 35) is composed of a connector position adjusting mechanism 289 (for example, an elevating member 291 and a pushing member 293) shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, and an alignment member (for example, a cam follower 295). The connector connecting portion 305 positions the other connector 287 of the article transporting device 209 and the one connector 117 of the manufacturing facility as the article transporting device 209 approaches the manufacturing equipment (for example, the tray component stocking device 29). adjust.
 このコネクタ連結部305は、ドッキングベース115またはドッキング部269の一方に配置されたコネクタ位置調整機構289と、ドッキングベース115またはドッキング部269の他方に配置されたアライメント部材(例えばカム297)を含む。コネクタ位置調整機構289は、他方のコネクタ287とともに昇降する。コネクタ位置調整機構289は、アライメント部材に接触しながら第1の方向(Y軸に沿う方向)へ移動することでアライメント部材によって高さ位置が調整される昇降部材291を有する。実施の形態2においては、コネクタ位置調整機構289がドッキング部269に配置され、アライメント部材がドッキングベース115に配置される。 The connector connecting portion 305 includes a connector position adjusting mechanism 289 arranged on one of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269, and an alignment member (for example, cam 297) arranged on the other of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269. The connector position adjusting mechanism 289 moves up and down together with the other connector 287. The connector position adjusting mechanism 289 has an elevating member 291 whose height position is adjusted by the alignment member by moving in a first direction (direction along the Y axis) while contacting the alignment member. In the second embodiment, the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 is arranged on the docking portion 269, and the alignment member is arranged on the docking base 115.
 コネクタ連結部305は、図32、図33に示すコネクタ押し付け部339を含む。コネクタ押し付け部339は、ドッキングベース115またはドッキング部269の一方に配置され、ドッキングベース115またはドッキング部269の一方に配置された一方のコネクタ117を他方のコネクタ287に押し付ける。実施の形態2においては、コネクタ押し付け部339がドッキング部269に配置される。したがって、ドッキング部269に設けられたコネクタ押し付け部339は、ドッキング部269に設けられる他方のコネクタ287を、ドッキングベース115に設けられる一方のコネクタ117(図35参照)に押し付ける。 The connector connecting portion 305 includes the connector pressing portion 339 shown in FIGS. 32 and 33. The connector pressing portion 339 is arranged on one of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269, and one connector 117 arranged on one of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269 is pressed against the other connector 287. In the second embodiment, the connector pressing portion 339 is arranged on the docking portion 269. Therefore, the connector pressing portion 339 provided on the docking portion 269 presses the other connector 287 provided on the docking portion 269 against the one connector 117 (see FIG. 35) provided on the docking base 115.
 コネクタ押し付け部339は、図32、図33に示す昇降部材291に設けられる。昇降部材291は、昇降ガイド341により昇降自在となってベース部217に支持される。昇降部材291は、引張りばね343によりZ軸に沿う下方向に付勢される。昇降部材291は、下降ストッパ345に当接することによりそれ以上の下降が規制される。昇降部材291のドッキングベース115に対向する面には、X軸に沿う方向に離間した一対のガイドロッド347が突出される。それぞれのガイドロッド347は、矩形板状に形成された押し込み部材293の長手方向両側を貫通する。 The connector pressing portion 339 is provided on the elevating member 291 shown in FIGS. 32 and 33. The elevating member 291 is movable up and down by the elevating guide 341 and is supported by the base portion 217. The elevating member 291 is urged downward along the Z axis by the tension spring 343. Further lowering of the elevating member 291 is restricted by abutting on the lowering stopper 345. A pair of guide rods 347 separated in the direction along the X axis are projected from the surface of the elevating member 291 facing the docking base 115. Each guide rod 347 penetrates both sides in the longitudinal direction of the pushing member 293 formed in the shape of a rectangular plate.
 ガイドロッド347が貫通した押し込み部材293は、ガイドロッド347に沿って昇降部材291に接近離反方向に移動自在となる。ガイドロッド347には、昇降部材291と押し込み部材293との間で、コネクタ押付けばね349が外挿されている。コネクタ押付けばね349は、押し込み部材293を、昇降部材291から離反する方向に付勢する。押し込み部材293は、ガイドロッド347の突出先端に形成された離脱規制部によりガイドロッド347からの離脱が規制されている。つまり、押し込み部材293は、コネクタ押付けばね349の付勢力に抗して昇降部材291に接近する方向に押し込み可能となって支持されている。 The pushing member 293 through which the guide rod 347 penetrates becomes movable along the guide rod 347 in the direction of approaching and separating from the elevating member 291. A connector pressing spring 349 is extrapolated from the guide rod 347 between the elevating member 291 and the pushing member 293. The connector pressing spring 349 urges the pushing member 293 in a direction away from the elevating member 291. The push-in member 293 is restricted from being detached from the guide rod 347 by a detachment restricting portion formed at the protruding tip of the guide rod 347. That is, the pushing member 293 can be pushed in a direction approaching the elevating member 291 against the urging force of the connector pressing spring 349 and is supported.
 上述したように、ドッキングベース115またはドッキング部269の一方は、第1の方向(Y軸に沿う方向)に突出した少なくとも一つの位置決めピン279を有する。ドッキングベース115またはドッキング部269の他方は、位置決めピンガイド部材275を有する。位置決めピンガイド部材275は、第1の方向から位置決めピン279が挿入される少なくとも一つの位置決めピンガイド穴273を有する。実施の形態2においては、位置決めピン279がドッキング部269に配置され、位置決めピンガイド部材275がドッキングベース115に配置される。なお、図28に示すように、位置決めピン279を有するドッキング部269の形成されたベース部217には、位置決めピン279と反対側の側面に、物品搬送装置209を牽引する搬送車213が連結される爪部351が設けられている。 As described above, one of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269 has at least one positioning pin 279 protruding in the first direction (direction along the Y axis). The other of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269 has a positioning pin guide member 275. The positioning pin guide member 275 has at least one positioning pin guide hole 273 into which the positioning pin 279 is inserted from the first direction. In the second embodiment, the positioning pin 279 is arranged in the docking portion 269, and the positioning pin guide member 275 is arranged in the docking base 115. As shown in FIG. 28, a transport vehicle 213 for pulling the article transport device 209 is connected to the base portion 217 formed of the docking portion 269 having the positioning pin 279 on the side surface opposite to the positioning pin 279. A claw portion 351 is provided.
 次に、ドッキング動作について説明する。 Next, the docking operation will be described.
 図35は、ドッキングによる水平方向の位置決め動作の説明図である。図36は、ドッキングによる上下方向の位置決め動作の説明図である。ドッキングベース115に対するドッキング部269のドッキングは、トレイ部品ストック装置29と物品搬送装置209とのX軸に沿う方向の予備的位置合わせが完了した後に開始される。ドッキング動作は、先ず、物品搬送装置209がトレイ部品ストック装置29に接近することにより、Xガイド271に倣ってXガイドローラ277がX軸に沿う方向に変位する。これにより、物品搬送装置209のX方向の位置が修正され、トレイ部品ストック装置29に位置合わせされる。 FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram of the horizontal positioning operation by docking. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram of a vertical positioning operation by docking. Docking of the docking portion 269 with respect to the docking base 115 is started after the preliminary alignment of the tray component stock device 29 and the article transfer device 209 in the direction along the X axis is completed. In the docking operation, first, the article transport device 209 approaches the tray component stock device 29, so that the X guide roller 277 is displaced in the direction along the X axis following the X guide 271. As a result, the position of the article transport device 209 in the X direction is corrected and aligned with the tray component stock device 29.
 この状態で、位置決めピン279は、位置決めピンガイド穴273に挿入可能な位置へ移動し、カムフォロア295もカム297に接触可能な位置へ移動する。 In this state, the positioning pin 279 moves to a position where it can be inserted into the positioning pin guide hole 273, and the cam follower 295 also moves to a position where it can contact the cam 297.
 このまま物品搬送装置209をトレイ部品ストック装置29へ移動させると、位置決めピン279が位置決めピンガイド穴273へ挿入される。このとき、物品搬送装置209は、Xガイドローラ277がXガイド271に当接しながら、トレイ部品ストック装置29へ接近する方向に移動する。 If the article transfer device 209 is moved to the tray parts stock device 29 as it is, the positioning pin 279 is inserted into the positioning pin guide hole 273. At this time, the article transport device 209 moves in the direction of approaching the tray component stock device 29 while the X guide roller 277 abuts on the X guide 271.
 物品搬送装置209は、位置決めピン279が位置決めピンガイド穴273に挿入されることにより、X軸に沿う方向の位置合わせが完了する。また、コネクタ位置調整機構289は、カムフォロア295がカム297の傾斜面Scを乗り上がってカム297の平坦面に移動することでZ軸に沿う方向の位置合わせが完了する。この状態で、一方のコネクタ117と他方のコネクタ287とが互いに連結可能な位置で向き合う。さらに物品搬送装置209をトレイ部品ストック装置29に接近する方向に移動させると、一方のコネクタ117と他方のコネクタ287との結合が開始される。さらに移動を継続すると、コネクタ押付けばね349が圧縮され、このばねの反発力でコネクタ同士がしっかり結合する。これにより、物品搬送装置209は、トレイ部品ストック装置29に対してのXZ方向の位置合わせが完了する。 The article transfer device 209 completes the alignment in the direction along the X axis by inserting the positioning pin 279 into the positioning pin guide hole 273. Further, in the connector position adjusting mechanism 289, the cam follower 295 rides on the inclined surface Sc of the cam 297 and moves to the flat surface of the cam 297, so that the alignment in the direction along the Z axis is completed. In this state, one connector 117 and the other connector 287 face each other at a position where they can be connected to each other. Further, when the article transfer device 209 is moved in the direction approaching the tray component stock device 29, the coupling between the one connector 117 and the other connector 287 is started. When the movement is continued, the connector pressing spring 349 is compressed, and the repulsive force of this spring firmly bonds the connectors to each other. As a result, the article transport device 209 completes the alignment in the XZ direction with respect to the tray component stock device 29.
 物品搬送装置209は、XZ方向の位置合わせが完了した後、突起部319(図34参照)が緩衝部303(図34参照)の受け部315(図34参照)を押圧するように、搬送車213によりトレイ部品ストック装置29を押す。緩衝部303は、緩衝ばね317(図34参照)の付勢力に抗して受け部315が所定位置まで後退すると、それ以上の後退が規制される。 After the alignment in the XZ direction is completed, the article transport device 209 is such that the protrusion 319 (see FIG. 34) presses the receiving portion 315 (see FIG. 34) of the buffer portion 303 (see FIG. 34). The tray component stocking device 29 is pushed by 213. When the receiving portion 315 retracts to a predetermined position against the urging force of the cushioning spring 317 (see FIG. 34), the cushioning portion 303 is restricted from further retreating.
 図37は、ドッキング後におけるドッキング保持部281の概念図である。ドッキング後において、物品搬送装置209は、緩衝ばね317の反発力により突起部319が押圧される。突起部319が押圧された物品搬送装置209は、トレイ部品ストック装置29から離反する方向に戻されようとする。その際、物品搬送装置209は、ドッキング保持部281のフック285に形成された後テーパ337が保持力発生部325のドッキング用ローラ331に係止する。なお、ドッキング用ローラ331は、レバー323の変位角が、変位角規制ストッパ353(図34、図37参照)により規制されている。保持用ばね327は、反発力によって物品搬送装置209とトレイ部品ストック装置29のドッキング状態が解除されるのを防止しうるばね力を発生する。つまり、ドッキング保持部281は、物品搬送装置209とトレイ部品ストック装置29とを一定の距離だけ離間させてドッキング状態に保持する。これにより、物品搬送装置209は、トレイ部品ストック装置29に対する第1の方向(Y軸に沿う方向)の位置合わせが完了し、ドッキング動作を終了する。 FIG. 37 is a conceptual diagram of the docking holding portion 281 after docking. After docking, the article transport device 209 is pressed against the protrusion 319 by the repulsive force of the cushioning spring 317. The article transporting device 209 on which the protrusion 319 is pressed is about to be returned in the direction away from the tray component stocking device 29. At that time, in the article transfer device 209, the rear taper 337 formed on the hook 285 of the docking holding portion 281 is engaged with the docking roller 331 of the holding force generating portion 325. The displacement angle of the lever 323 of the docking roller 331 is regulated by the displacement angle regulating stopper 353 (see FIGS. 34 and 37). The holding spring 327 generates a spring force that can prevent the article transport device 209 and the tray component stock device 29 from being released from the docked state due to the repulsive force. That is, the docking holding unit 281 keeps the article transporting device 209 and the tray component stocking device 29 apart by a certain distance and holds them in the docked state. As a result, the article transport device 209 completes the alignment in the first direction (direction along the Y axis) with respect to the tray component stock device 29, and ends the docking operation.
 物品搬送システム211は、図26に示すように、工場フロアに設置された少なくとも一つの製造設備(トレイ部品ストック装置29)と、工場フロアを移動する少なくとも一つの物品搬送装置209を含み、トレイ部品ストック装置29と物品搬送装置209との間で、物品を搬送する。 As shown in FIG. 26, the article transport system 211 includes at least one manufacturing facility (tray component stock device 29) installed on the factory floor and at least one article transport device 209 moving on the factory floor, and is a tray component. The article is transported between the stock device 29 and the article transfer device 209.
 図38は、マガジン収納ラック223の斜視図である。物品搬送システム211は、マガジン41と、第1支持テーブルと、第2支持テーブルと、第1支持テーブル移動装置と、第2支持テーブル昇降装置とを有する。 FIG. 38 is a perspective view of the magazine storage rack 223. The article transport system 211 includes a magazine 41, a first support table, a second support table, a first support table moving device, and a second support table elevating device.
 物品搬送システム211において、物品は図4に示す部品33を収納するトレイ31を保持したパレット39である。マガジン41は、図6に示すように、複数のパレット39を収納する。 In the article transport system 211, the article is a pallet 39 holding a tray 31 for accommodating the component 33 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 6, the magazine 41 stores a plurality of pallets 39.
 図39は、第1支持テーブルと第2支持テーブルの支持領域を示す説明図である。第1支持テーブルは、トレイ部品ストック装置29に設けられる。第1支持テーブルは、スライドテーブル装置123のスライドテーブル127である。以下、第1支持テーブルは、スライドテーブル127とも称す。 FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram showing the support areas of the first support table and the second support table. The first support table is provided in the tray component stocking device 29. The first support table is the slide table 127 of the slide table device 123. Hereinafter, the first support table is also referred to as a slide table 127.
 スライドテーブル127は、マガジン41を平面投影した領域の一部である第1領域F1内に位置するマガジン41の複数の部分を下から支持する。 The slide table 127 supports a plurality of parts of the magazine 41 located in the first region F1 which is a part of the region where the magazine 41 is projected in a plane from below.
 第2支持テーブルは、物品搬送装置209に設けられる。第2支持テーブルは、マガジン収納ラック223に設けられる第1のマガジン保持テーブル225、第2のマガジン保持テーブル227である。以下、第2支持テーブルは、第1のマガジン保持テーブル225または第2のマガジン保持テーブル227とも称す。 The second support table is provided in the article transport device 209. The second support table is a first magazine holding table 225 and a second magazine holding table 227 provided in the magazine storage rack 223. Hereinafter, the second support table is also referred to as a first magazine holding table 225 or a second magazine holding table 227.
 第1のマガジン保持テーブル225と第2のマガジン保持テーブル227は、マガジン41を平面投影した領域の他の一部であって第1領域F1とは重ならない第2領域F2内に位置するマガジン41の他の複数の部分を下から支持する。 The first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227 are other parts of the area where the magazine 41 is projected in a plane and are located in the second area F2 which does not overlap with the first area F1. Support several other parts from below.
 図40は、スライドテーブル127がマガジン収納ラック223に進出した状態を示す平面図である。第1支持テーブル移動装置は、トレイ部品ストック装置29(図26参照)に設けられる。第1支持テーブル移動装置は、進退駆動部129を主要部に有して構成される。進退駆動部129は、上述のようにエアシリンダ131、ピニオンギア193、スライダ195、第1ラックギア189、第2ラックギア191よりなる。以下、第1支持テーブル移動装置は、進退駆動部129とも称す。 FIG. 40 is a plan view showing a state in which the slide table 127 has advanced to the magazine storage rack 223. The first support table moving device is provided in the tray component stocking device 29 (see FIG. 26). The first support table moving device is configured to have an advancing / retreating driving unit 129 as a main unit. As described above, the advancing / retreating drive unit 129 includes an air cylinder 131, a pinion gear 193, a slider 195, a first rack gear 189, and a second rack gear 191. Hereinafter, the first support table moving device is also referred to as an advance / retreat drive unit 129.
 ここで、スライドテーブル127は、図40に示すように、マガジン収納ラック223の内部にスライドして進入した状態であっても、第1のマガジン保持テーブル225および第2のマガジン保持テーブル227に干渉しないように配置される。 Here, as shown in FIG. 40, the slide table 127 interferes with the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227 even in a state where the slide table 127 slides into the inside of the magazine storage rack 223. Arranged so as not to.
 図41は、保持テーブルの斜視図である。第1のマガジン保持テーブル225および第2のマガジン保持テーブル227のそれぞれは、Y軸に沿う方向に長尺の一対の平行なテーブル可動板355の基端同士がテーブル連結板357により連結された平面視でコ字状に形成される。第1のマガジン保持テーブル225および第2のマガジン保持テーブル227のそれぞれは、ラック昇降装置229により昇降するマガジン収納ラック223と共に上下に移動する。第1のマガジン保持テーブル225および第2のマガジン保持テーブル227のコ字状の内側には、図40に示すように、マガジン収納ラック223の内側に進出したスライドテーブル127が配置される。 FIG. 41 is a perspective view of the holding table. Each of the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227 is a plane in which the base ends of a pair of parallel table movable plates 355 long in the direction along the Y axis are connected to each other by a table connecting plate 357. It is visually formed in a U-shape. Each of the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227 moves up and down together with the magazine storage rack 223 which is raised and lowered by the rack raising and lowering device 229. As shown in FIG. 40, a slide table 127 advancing inside the magazine storage rack 223 is arranged inside the U-shape of the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227.
 第1のマガジン保持テーブル225および第2のマガジン保持テーブル227のそれぞれは、コ字状の内側に配置されたスライドテーブル127に干渉することなく、上下に移動が可能となっている。そのため、第1のマガジン保持テーブル225および第2のマガジン保持テーブル227のそれぞれは、コ字状の内側がスライドテーブル通過空間359となる。スライドテーブル127は、水平方向に進出するのみで停止している。したがって、マガジン収納ラック223が昇降することにより、上下に移動する第1のマガジン保持テーブル225および第1のマガジン保持テーブル225のそれぞれに対して、停止しているスライドテーブル127が相対的に通過することになる。すなわち、スライドテーブル127と、第1のマガジン保持テーブル225および第2のマガジン保持テーブル227のそれぞれとは、干渉することなくマガジン41を支持可能となるように上下方向に行き違い可能となっている。 Each of the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227 can move up and down without interfering with the slide table 127 arranged inside the U-shape. Therefore, each of the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227 has a U-shaped inside as a slide table passing space 359. The slide table 127 is stopped only by advancing in the horizontal direction. Therefore, as the magazine storage rack 223 moves up and down, the stopped slide table 127 passes relatively to each of the first magazine holding table 225 and the first magazine holding table 225 that move up and down. It will be. That is, the slide table 127 and each of the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227 can be crossed in the vertical direction so as to be able to support the magazine 41 without interfering with each other.
 進退駆動部129(図40参照)は、図39に示すように、マガジン41を支持したスライドテーブル127を、マガジン41の載置されていない空きの第1のマガジン保持テーブル225または第2のマガジン保持テーブル227に向って移動させることにより、マガジン41の第2領域F2を第1のマガジン保持テーブル225または第2のマガジン保持テーブル227の「上方」に位置させる。あるいは、進退駆動部129は、空きのスライドテーブル127を第1のマガジン保持テーブル225または第2のマガジン保持テーブル227に向って移動させることによりスライドテーブル127を第1のマガジン保持テーブル225または第2のマガジン保持テーブル227に支持されたマガジン41の第2領域F2の「下方」に位置させる。 As shown in FIG. 39, the advancing / retreating driving unit 129 (see FIG. 40) uses the slide table 127 supporting the magazine 41 as a vacant first magazine holding table 225 or a second magazine in which the magazine 41 is not placed. By moving towards the holding table 227, the second region F2 of the magazine 41 is positioned "above" the first magazine holding table 225 or the second magazine holding table 227. Alternatively, the advancing / retreating drive unit 129 moves the empty slide table 127 toward the first magazine holding table 225 or the second magazine holding table 227 to move the slide table 127 toward the first magazine holding table 225 or the second magazine holding table 225 or the second. It is located "below" the second region F2 of the magazine 41 supported by the magazine holding table 227.
 第2支持テーブル昇降装置は、物品搬送装置209に設けられる。以下、第2支持テーブル昇降装置は、ラック昇降装置229(図28参照)とも称す。ラック昇降装置229は、図39に示すように、第1のマガジン保持テーブル225または第2のマガジン保持テーブル227をスライドテーブル127よりも低い位置から高い位置に移動させることにより、スライドテーブル127に支持されたマガジン41を第1のマガジン保持テーブル225または第2のマガジン保持テーブル227に受け渡す。 The second support table elevating device is provided in the article transporting device 209. Hereinafter, the second support table elevating device is also referred to as a rack elevating device 229 (see FIG. 28). As shown in FIG. 39, the rack elevating device 229 supports the slide table 127 by moving the first magazine holding table 225 or the second magazine holding table 227 from a position lower than the slide table 127 to a higher position. The magazine 41 is delivered to the first magazine holding table 225 or the second magazine holding table 227.
 あるいは、第1のマガジン保持テーブル225または第2のマガジン保持テーブル227をスライドテーブル127よりも高い位置から低い位置に移動させることにより第1のマガジン保持テーブル225または第2のマガジン保持テーブル227に支持されたマガジン41をスライドテーブル127に受け渡す。 Alternatively, the first magazine holding table 225 or the second magazine holding table 227 is supported by the first magazine holding table 225 or the second magazine holding table 227 by moving it from a position higher than the slide table 127 to a lower position. The magazine 41 is delivered to the slide table 127.
 マガジン41は、第1領域F1内に複数の第1アライメント部を有する。第1アライメント部は、図39に示す上述した第1アライメントグループ103である。第1アライメントグループ103は、図7に示すように、4つのXアライメントローラ93と、4つのYアライメントローラ99とを有する。 The magazine 41 has a plurality of first alignment portions in the first region F1. The first alignment unit is the above-mentioned first alignment group 103 shown in FIG. 39. As shown in FIG. 7, the first alignment group 103 has four X alignment rollers 93 and four Y alignment rollers 99.
 図42は、マガジン41に設けられる第2アライメント部と、第1のマガジン保持テーブル225および第2のマガジン保持テーブル227とに設けられる第2アライメントガイド361を示す要部拡大斜視図である。 FIG. 42 is an enlarged perspective view of a main part showing a second alignment portion provided in the magazine 41 and a second alignment guide 361 provided in the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227.
 また、マガジン41は、第2領域F2内に複数の第2アライメント部を有する。第2アライメント部は、上述した第2アライメントグループ107である。第2アライメントグループ107は、図7、図42に示すように、4つのYアライメント部95と、2つのXアライメント部105とを有する。 Further, the magazine 41 has a plurality of second alignment portions in the second region F2. The second alignment unit is the above-mentioned second alignment group 107. The second alignment group 107 has four Y alignment units 95 and two X alignment units 105, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 42.
 スライドテーブル127は、複数の第1アライメントグループ103に接触してマガジン41のスライドテーブル127に対する位置を調整する図39に示す複数の第1アライメントガイド363を有する。第1アライメントガイド363は、図17に示す上述した4つのXアライメントガイド181と、4つのYアライメントガイド187とを有する。 The slide table 127 has a plurality of first alignment guides 363 shown in FIG. 39 which are in contact with the plurality of first alignment groups 103 to adjust the position of the magazine 41 with respect to the slide table 127. The first alignment guide 363 has the four X alignment guides 181 shown in FIG. 17 and the four Y alignment guides 187.
 第1のマガジン保持テーブル225または第2のマガジン保持テーブル227は、複数の第2アライメントグループ107に接触してマガジン41の第1のマガジン保持テーブル225または第2のマガジン保持テーブル227に対する位置を調整する図41に示す複数の第2アライメントガイド361を有する。第2アライメントガイド361は、図42に示すように、Xアライメントローラ255と、Yアライメント部材259とを有する。 The first magazine holding table 225 or the second magazine holding table 227 contacts a plurality of second alignment groups 107 to adjust the position of the magazine 41 with respect to the first magazine holding table 225 or the second magazine holding table 227. It has a plurality of second alignment guides 361 shown in FIG. 41. As shown in FIG. 42, the second alignment guide 361 has an X alignment roller 255 and a Y alignment member 259.
 図39に示す複数の第1アライメントガイド363のうち少なくとも一つは、水平な第1方向(X軸に沿う方向)についてマガジン41の位置を、スライドテーブル127に対して調整し、少なくとも他の一つは第1方向に水平面内で直交する第2方向(Y軸に沿う方向)についてマガジン41の位置を、スライドテーブル127に対して調整する。 At least one of the plurality of first alignment guides 363 shown in FIG. 39 adjusts the position of the magazine 41 with respect to the slide table 127 in the horizontal first direction (direction along the X axis), and at least one of the other. First, the position of the magazine 41 is adjusted with respect to the slide table 127 in the second direction (direction along the Y axis) orthogonal to the first direction in the horizontal plane.
 複数の第2アライメントガイド361のうち少なくとも一つは、水平な第3方向(例えばX軸に沿う方向)についてマガジン41の位置を、第1のマガジン保持テーブル225、第2のマガジン保持テーブル227に対して調整し、少なくとも他の一つは第3方向に水平面内で直交する第4方向(例えばY軸に沿う方向)についてマガジン41の位置を、第1のマガジン保持テーブル225、第2のマガジン保持テーブル227に対して調整する。 At least one of the plurality of second alignment guides 361 positions the magazine 41 in the horizontal third direction (for example, along the X-axis) on the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227. The position of the magazine 41 is adjusted with respect to the position of the magazine 41 in the fourth direction (for example, the direction along the Y axis) orthogonal to the third direction in the horizontal plane, the first magazine holding table 225, and the second magazine. Adjust for retention table 227.
 図43は、マガジン収納ラック223を透視した斜視図である。物品搬送システム211に用いられる物品搬送装置209は、保持テーブル(例えば第1のマガジン保持テーブル225および第2のマガジン保持テーブル227)が収納ラックに対して横方向(例えばY軸に沿う方向)へスライド自在に装着されている。第1のマガジン保持テーブル225および第2のマガジン保持テーブル227のそれぞれは、マガジン収納ラック223の対向する内壁に固定される一対のテーブルスライドレール365により、マガジン収納ラック223からそれぞれが引き出し可能となっている。収納ラック(例えばマガジン収納ラック223)には、保持テーブルのスライドを阻止するためのスライドロック部367が設けられている。 FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the magazine storage rack 223. In the article transfer device 209 used in the article transfer system 211, the holding tables (for example, the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227) are laterally oriented with respect to the storage rack (for example, along the Y axis). It is mounted so that it can slide freely. Each of the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227 can be pulled out from the magazine storage rack 223 by a pair of table slide rails 365 fixed to the facing inner walls of the magazine storage rack 223. ing. The storage rack (for example, the magazine storage rack 223) is provided with a slide lock portion 367 for preventing the holding table from sliding.
 図44は、図43に示したスライドロック部367の動作を説明する要部拡大平面図である。マガジン収納ラック223における開口221の近傍の内壁には、それぞれの保持テーブルに対応してレバー支柱369が内壁から垂直に突出する。レバー支柱369は、テーブルロックレバー371の中央部が回転自在に支持されて揺動自在となる。テーブルロックレバー371は、開口221に臨む側の揺動端がロック操作部373となる。テーブルロックレバー371は、ロック操作部373の反対側の揺動端に、Z軸に沿う方向の回転中心軸で回転自在となるロック用ローラ375が回転自在に支持されている。 FIG. 44 is an enlarged plan view of a main part for explaining the operation of the slide lock portion 367 shown in FIG. 43. On the inner wall in the vicinity of the opening 221 in the magazine storage rack 223, a lever column 369 corresponding to each holding table projects vertically from the inner wall. The lever column 369 is swingable because the central portion of the table lock lever 371 is rotatably supported. The swing end of the table lock lever 371 on the side facing the opening 221 serves as the lock operation portion 373. The table lock lever 371 is rotatably supported by a rocking roller 375 which is rotatable about a rotation center axis in the direction along the Z axis at a swing end on the opposite side of the lock operation unit 373.
 テーブルロックレバー371は、マガジン収納ラック223との間に挟み入れられたレバー付勢ばね377により、ロック用ローラ375が保持テーブルに接近する回転方向(図44の反時計回り)に付勢されている。レバー付勢ばね377により反時計回りに付勢されたテーブルロックレバー371は、レバー支柱369に設けられた規制ピン379に当接することにより、それ以上の反時計回りの回転が規制される。 The table lock lever 371 is urged in the rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 44) in which the locking roller 375 approaches the holding table by the lever urging spring 377 sandwiched between the table lock lever 371 and the magazine storage rack 223. There is. The table lock lever 371 urged counterclockwise by the lever urging spring 377 abuts on the regulation pin 379 provided on the lever strut 369 to restrict further counterclockwise rotation.
 テーブルロックレバー371は、規制ピン379に当接した回転位置で、ロック用ローラ375がテーブル可動板355の引き出し方向先端381に当接する。引き出し方向先端381にロック用ローラ375が当接した保持テーブルは、引き出しが規制されたロック状態となる。テーブルロックレバー371は、ロック操作部373がマガジン収納ラック223の内壁から離反する回転方向(例えば図44の時計回り方向)に回転されると、ロック用ローラ375がテーブル可動板355の引き出し方向先端381から外れる。これにより、スライドロック部367は、ロック用ローラ375がテーブル可動板355の外面を転動し、テーブル可動板355(すなわち、保持テーブル)の引き出しを可能とする。 The table lock lever 371 is in a rotational position where the locking roller 375 abuts on the regulation pin 379, and the lock roller 375 abuts on the tip 381 of the table movable plate 355 in the pull-out direction. The holding table in which the locking roller 375 is in contact with the tip 381 in the pulling direction is in a locked state in which the pulling is restricted. When the lock operation unit 373 of the table lock lever 371 is rotated in the rotation direction (for example, the clockwise direction in FIG. 44) away from the inner wall of the magazine storage rack 223, the lock roller 375 is the tip of the table movable plate 355 in the pull-out direction. It deviates from 381. As a result, in the slide lock portion 367, the lock roller 375 rolls on the outer surface of the table movable plate 355, and the table movable plate 355 (that is, the holding table) can be pulled out.
 このようにして、物品搬送装置209は、スライドロック部367を手動でロック解除することができる。保持テーブルは、スライドロック部367が解除されることにより、スライド自在となる。これにより、収納ラックは、回収・補給場所において、保持テーブルを引き出して、作業者の手作業によるマガジン41の回収・補充作業が容易に行えるようになっている。勿論、物品搬送装置209は、回収・補給場所等に設置される回収・補充装置により、自動でマガジン41が回収・補充されるものであってもよい。 In this way, the article transfer device 209 can manually unlock the slide lock portion 367. The holding table becomes slidable when the slide lock portion 367 is released. As a result, the storage rack can easily collect and replenish the magazine 41 manually by the operator by pulling out the holding table at the collection / replenishment place. Of course, the article transporting device 209 may be one in which the magazine 41 is automatically collected / replenished by the collection / replenishment device installed in the collection / replenishment place or the like.
 次に、物品搬送装置209の制御系を説明する。 Next, the control system of the article transport device 209 will be described.
 図45は、物品搬送装置209の制御系を示すブロック図である。物品搬送装置209は、マガジン搬送装置制御部247を備える。マガジン搬送装置制御部247には、基準高さ検出部(例えば基準高さ検出センサ251)と、4つのスライドテーブル検出センサ253と、第1マガジン検出センサ263と、第2マガジン検出センサ265と、無線通信ユニット249と、他方のコネクタ287と、動力電源ユニット383と、ラック昇降装置229のモータドライバ385と、モータドライバ385に接続されるラック昇降モータ231およびエンコーダ387とが接続される。 FIG. 45 is a block diagram showing a control system of the article transport device 209. The article transfer device 209 includes a magazine transfer device control unit 247. The magazine transfer device control unit 247 includes a reference height detection unit (for example, a reference height detection sensor 251), four slide table detection sensors 253, a first magazine detection sensor 263, and a second magazine detection sensor 265. The wireless communication unit 249, the other connector 287, the power power supply unit 383, the motor driver 385 of the rack elevating device 229, and the rack elevating motor 231 and the encoder 387 connected to the motor driver 385 are connected.
 他方のコネクタ287の通信線389を介してマガジン搬送装置制御部247に接続される。動力電源ユニット383は、給電ケーブル391を介して他方のコネクタ287とモータドライバ385とに接続される。 It is connected to the magazine transfer device control unit 247 via the communication line 389 of the other connector 287. The power power supply unit 383 is connected to the other connector 287 and the motor driver 385 via the power supply cable 391.
 マガジン搬送装置制御部247には、バッテリ393が接続される。バッテリ393は、マガジン搬送装置制御部247や無線通信ユニット249に電力を供給する。バッテリ393は、コネクタ接続時は、充電される。 A battery 393 is connected to the magazine transfer device control unit 247. The battery 393 supplies electric power to the magazine transfer device control unit 247 and the wireless communication unit 249. The battery 393 is charged when the connector is connected.
 マガジン搬送装置制御部247は、受電制御部395と、基準高さ設定部397と、位置決め高さ算出部399と、第1搬入部401と、第1搬出部403と、第2搬入部405と、第2搬出部407と、搬送装置記憶部409とを有する。搬送装置記憶部409は、高低差記憶部411と、Z0記憶部413と、位置決め高さ記憶部415とを有する。 The magazine transfer device control unit 247 includes a power reception control unit 395, a reference height setting unit 397, a positioning height calculation unit 399, a first carry-in unit 401, a first carry-out unit 403, and a second carry-in unit 405. , A second carry-out unit 407 and a transfer device storage unit 409. The transport device storage unit 409 has a height difference storage unit 411, a Z0 storage unit 413, and a positioning height storage unit 415.
 受電制御部395は、トレイ部品ストック装置29と部品装着装置13とがドッキングした後の電力投入処理や、ドッキング解除前のシャットダウンを行う。 The power receiving control unit 395 performs a power input process after the tray parts stock device 29 and the parts mounting device 13 are docked, and shuts down before the docking is released.
 基準高さ設定部397は、後述の図48に示す基準高さLv0を検出して、その位置決め高さ(例えばZ座標)を設定する処理を実行する。 The reference height setting unit 397 detects the reference height Lv0 shown in FIG. 48, which will be described later, and executes a process of setting the positioning height (for example, Z coordinate).
 位置決め高さ算出部399は、後述の図48に示す第1レベルLv1、第2レベルLv2、第3レベルLv3、第4レベルLv4の位置決め高さ(例えばZ座標)を計算する。 The positioning height calculation unit 399 calculates the positioning height (for example, Z coordinate) of the first level Lv1, the second level Lv2, the third level Lv3, and the fourth level Lv4 shown in FIG. 48, which will be described later.
 第1搬入部401は、第1のマガジン保持テーブル225にマガジン41を搬入する処理を実行する。第1搬出部403は、第1のマガジン保持テーブル225からマガジン41を搬出する処理を実行する。第2搬入部405は、第2のマガジン保持テーブル227にマガジン41を搬入する処理を実行する。第2搬出部407は、第2のマガジン保持テーブル227からマガジン41を搬出する処理を実行する。 The first loading unit 401 executes a process of loading the magazine 41 into the first magazine holding table 225. The first unloading unit 403 executes a process of unloading the magazine 41 from the first magazine holding table 225. The second carry-in unit 405 executes a process of carrying the magazine 41 into the second magazine holding table 227. The second unloading unit 407 executes a process of unloading the magazine 41 from the second magazine holding table 227.
 高低差記憶部411は、基準高さLv0に対する第1レベルLv1~第4レベルLv4の高低差(例えば設計値)を記憶する。 The height difference storage unit 411 stores the height difference (for example, design value) of the first level Lv1 to the fourth level Lv4 with respect to the reference height Lv0.
 Z0記憶部413は、基準高さLv0のラック昇降装置229における位置決め高さ(例えばZ座標)を基準高さ設定部397によって取得する。 The Z0 storage unit 413 acquires the positioning height (for example, Z coordinate) of the rack elevating device 229 with the reference height Lv0 by the reference height setting unit 397.
 位置決め高さ記憶部415は、位置決め高さ算出部399で求めた第1レベルLv1~第4レベルLv4の位置決め高さ(例えばZ座標)を記憶する。 The positioning height storage unit 415 stores the positioning heights (for example, Z coordinates) of the first level Lv1 to the fourth level Lv4 obtained by the positioning height calculation unit 399.
 図46は、ドッキング後に動力用電源パワーがONされるまでの手順を示すフローチャートである。物品搬送装置209は、ドッキング部269がドッキングベース115にドッキングされると、動力用電源パワーがONされる。すなわち、ドッキングベース115とドッキング部269とがドッキングされると、マガジン搬送装置制御部247がドッキングの有無を判断する(Ast1)。マガジン搬送装置制御部247は、ドッキングが検出されると、自己診断機能により、ドッキング状態を確認する(Ast2)。 FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a procedure until the power supply for power is turned on after docking. In the article transfer device 209, when the docking unit 269 is docked to the docking base 115, the power supply for power is turned on. That is, when the docking base 115 and the docking unit 269 are docked, the magazine transfer device control unit 247 determines whether or not there is docking (Ast1). When docking is detected, the magazine transfer device control unit 247 confirms the docking state by the self-diagnosis function (Ast2).
 マガジン搬送装置制御部247は、ドッキング状態の正常または異常を判断する(Ast3)。マガジン搬送装置制御部247は、ドッキング状態が異常のとき、異常を報知し(Ast4)、動力用電源パワーをONせずに処理を終了する。マガジン搬送装置制御部247は、ドッキング状態が正常のとき、動力用電力要求のコマンドをトレイ部品ストック装置29へ送信する(Ast5)。マガジン搬送装置制御部247は、トレイ部品ストック装置29からの受電の有無を判断する(Ast6)。マガジン搬送装置制御部247は、受電が確認されると、動力用電源パワーをONして(Ast7)処理を終了する。 The magazine transfer device control unit 247 determines whether the docking state is normal or abnormal (Ast3). When the docking state is abnormal, the magazine transfer device control unit 247 notifies the abnormality (Ast4) and ends the process without turning on the power supply for power. When the docking state is normal, the magazine transfer device control unit 247 transmits a power request command for power to the tray component stock device 29 (Ast5). The magazine transfer device control unit 247 determines whether or not power is received from the tray component stock device 29 (Ast6). When the power reception is confirmed, the magazine transfer device control unit 247 turns on the power supply for power (Ast7) and ends the process.
 図47は、ドッキング後の物品搬送装置209とトレイ部品ストック装置29の位置関係を示す説明図である。物品搬送装置209は、位置検出部(例えばエンコーダ387)と、基準高さ検出部(例えば基準高さ検出センサ251)と、制御部(例えばマガジン搬送装置制御部247)とを備える。 FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the article transport device 209 and the tray parts stock device 29 after docking. The article transfer device 209 includes a position detection unit (for example, an encoder 387), a reference height detection unit (for example, a reference height detection sensor 251), and a control unit (for example, a magazine transfer device control unit 247).
 エンコーダ387は、マガジン収納ラック223の高さ方向の位置を検出する。基準高さ検出センサ251は、マガジン収納ラック223とともに昇降してトレイ部品ストック装置29に設けた基準点(例えば基準高さ標識417の穴419)を検出する。マガジン搬送装置制御部247は、ドッキング部269によってベース部217がトレイ部品ストック装置29のドッキングベース115にドッキングした状態でラック昇降装置229を作動させて基準点(例えば穴419)を基準高さ検出部(例えば基準高さ検出センサ251)で検出する。マガジン搬送装置制御部247は、基準高さ検出センサ251が穴419を検出したときに、エンコーダ387で得られた位置を基準高さに設定し、基準高さに基づいてラック昇降装置229を作動させて保持テーブルと製造設備との間でマガジン41の受け渡し作業を実行する。 The encoder 387 detects the position of the magazine storage rack 223 in the height direction. The reference height detection sensor 251 moves up and down together with the magazine storage rack 223 to detect a reference point (for example, a hole 419 of the reference height sign 417) provided in the tray component stock device 29. The magazine transfer device control unit 247 operates the rack elevating device 229 with the base unit 217 docked to the docking base 115 of the tray parts stock device 29 by the docking unit 269 to detect a reference point (for example, a hole 419) as a reference height. It is detected by a unit (for example, a reference height detection sensor 251). The magazine transfer device control unit 247 sets the position obtained by the encoder 387 to the reference height when the reference height detection sensor 251 detects the hole 419, and operates the rack elevating device 229 based on the reference height. The magazine 41 is transferred between the holding table and the manufacturing equipment.
 物品搬送装置209とトレイ部品ストック装置29とにおける受け渡し作業は、保持テーブルとマガジン収納ラック223の内部空間に突出したスライドテーブル127との間でマガジン41を受け渡す作業である。 The delivery work between the article transfer device 209 and the tray parts stock device 29 is the work of delivering the magazine 41 between the holding table and the slide table 127 protruding into the internal space of the magazine storage rack 223.
 マガジン搬送装置制御部247は、保持テーブルをスライドテーブル127よりも低い第1レベルLv1とスライドテーブル127よりも高い第2レベルLv2に位置させる位置決め高さを基準高さに基づいて求める。 The magazine transfer device control unit 247 obtains the positioning height at which the holding table is located at the first level Lv1 lower than the slide table 127 and the second level Lv2 higher than the slide table 127 based on the reference height.
 マガジン搬送装置制御部247は、マガジン41をスライドテーブル127から保持テーブルへ受け渡す場合、ラック昇降装置229によってマガジン収納ラック223を第1レベルLv1から第2レベルLv2へ移動させる。 When the magazine 41 is transferred from the slide table 127 to the holding table, the magazine transfer device control unit 247 moves the magazine storage rack 223 from the first level Lv1 to the second level Lv2 by the rack elevating device 229.
 マガジン搬送装置制御部247は、保持テーブルからスライドテーブル127へ受け渡す場合、ラック昇降装置229によってマガジン収納ラック223を第2レベルLv2から第1レベルLv1へ移動させる。 When handing over from the holding table to the slide table 127, the magazine transfer device control unit 247 moves the magazine storage rack 223 from the second level Lv2 to the first level Lv1 by the rack elevating device 229.
 マガジン搬送装置制御部247は、基準高さ設定部397と、位置決め高さ算出部399と、受渡作業実行部(例えば第1搬入部401、第1搬出部403)とを有する。基準高さ設定部397は、ドッキング部269によってベース部217が製造設備にドッキングした状態でラック昇降装置229を作動させて基準点を基準高さ検出センサ251で検出する。基準高さ設定部397は、基準高さ検出センサ251が基準点を検出したときにエンコーダ387で得られた位置を基準高さに設定する。 The magazine transfer device control unit 247 has a reference height setting unit 397, a positioning height calculation unit 399, and a delivery work execution unit (for example, a first carry-in unit 401 and a first carry-out unit 403). The reference height setting unit 397 operates the rack elevating device 229 with the base unit 217 docked to the manufacturing equipment by the docking unit 269, and detects the reference point with the reference height detection sensor 251. The reference height setting unit 397 sets the position obtained by the encoder 387 when the reference height detection sensor 251 detects the reference point to the reference height.
 位置決め高さ算出部399は、基準高さに基づいてトレイ部品ストック装置29との間でマガジン41の受け渡し作業を行うためのマガジン収納ラック223の複数の位置決め高さを算出する。 The positioning height calculation unit 399 calculates a plurality of positioning heights of the magazine storage rack 223 for transferring the magazine 41 to and from the tray component stock device 29 based on the reference height.
 受渡作業実行部(例えば第1搬入部401、第1搬出部403)は、複数の位置決め高さに基づいてラック昇降装置229を制御して受け渡し作業を実行する。 The delivery work execution unit (for example, the first carry-in unit 401 and the first carry-out unit 403) controls the rack elevating device 229 based on a plurality of positioning heights to execute the delivery work.
 位置決め高さ算出部399は、少なくとも保持テーブルをスライドテーブル127よりも低い第1レベルLv1とスライドテーブル127よりも高い第2レベルLv2に位置させる位置決め高さを求める。 The positioning height calculation unit 399 obtains at least the positioning height for positioning the holding table at the first level Lv1 lower than the slide table 127 and the second level Lv2 higher than the slide table 127.
 受渡作業実行部は、第1搬入部401と第1搬出部403とを含む。第1搬入部401は、ラック昇降装置229によってマガジン収納ラック223を第1レベルLv1から第2レベルLv2へ移動させてマガジン41をスライドテーブル127から保持テーブルへ受け渡す。第1搬出部403は、ラック昇降装置229によって収納ラックを第2レベルから第1レベルへ移動させてマガジン41を保持テーブルからスライドテーブル127へ受け渡す。 The delivery work execution unit includes the first carry-in unit 401 and the first carry-out unit 403. The first carry-in unit 401 moves the magazine storage rack 223 from the first level Lv1 to the second level Lv2 by the rack elevating device 229, and transfers the magazine 41 from the slide table 127 to the holding table. The first carry-out unit 403 moves the storage rack from the second level to the first level by the rack elevating device 229, and transfers the magazine 41 from the holding table to the slide table 127.
 図48は、マガジン収納ラック223の位置決め高さの説明図である。基準高さ検出センサ251は、トレイ部品ストック装置29の基準高さ標識417(例えば穴419)を検出したときのラック昇降装置229から得られた位置を基準高さLv0とし、その時のラック昇降装置229における位置決め高さ(例えばZ座標)Zoを記憶する。 FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram of the positioning height of the magazine storage rack 223. The reference height detection sensor 251 sets the position obtained from the rack elevating device 229 when the reference height sign 417 (for example, hole 419) of the tray component stock device 29 is detected as the reference height Lv0, and sets the rack elevating device at that time. The positioning height (for example, Z coordinate) Zo at 229 is stored.
 位置決め高さ(例えばZ座標)Zoと、第1レベルLv1~第4レベルLv4のそれぞれとの高低差は、設定データ(例えばh1~h4)として搬送装置記憶部409において予め記憶されている。このため、位置決め高さ算出部399は、基準高さLv0に対応する位置決め高さZ0と設定データ(例えばh1~h4)とにより、第1レベルLv1~第4レベルLv4のそれぞれの位置決め高さ(例えばZ座標)を計算し、Z1~Z4のそれぞれ(図48参照)を記憶する。 The height difference between the positioning height (for example, Z coordinate) Zo and each of the first level Lv1 to the fourth level Lv4 is stored in advance in the transport device storage unit 409 as setting data (for example, h1 to h4). Therefore, the positioning height calculation unit 399 uses the positioning height Z0 corresponding to the reference height Lv0 and the setting data (for example, h1 to h4) to obtain the respective positioning heights of the first level Lv1 to the fourth level Lv4 (for example, h1 to h4). For example, the Z coordinate) is calculated, and each of Z1 to Z4 (see FIG. 48) is stored.
 図49は、マガジン受渡し動作の説明図である。基準高さ設定部397による基準高さ設定の処理は、ドッキング完了後、ラック昇降装置229によりマガジン収納ラック223を昇降させて、基準高さ検出センサ251でトレイ部品ストック装置29の基準高さ標識417(穴419)を検出する。 FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram of the magazine delivery operation. In the process of setting the reference height by the reference height setting unit 397, after the docking is completed, the magazine storage rack 223 is raised and lowered by the rack raising and lowering device 229, and the reference height indicator of the tray parts stock device 29 is used by the reference height detection sensor 251. 417 (hole 419) is detected.
 図50は、位置決め高さ設定処理を示すフローチャートである。位置決め高さ設定処理は、先ず、マガジン収納ラック223が、サーチ動作開始高さへ移動する(Bst1)。基準高さのサーチを開始する(Bst2)。 FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the positioning height setting process. In the positioning height setting process, first, the magazine storage rack 223 moves to the search operation start height (Bst1). The search for the reference height is started (Bst2).
 図51は、基準高さ標識417の検出原理の説明図である。マガジン収納ラック223に設けられた基準高さ検出センサ251は、発光部421と受光部423とを有する。一方、基準高さ検出センサ251がマガジン収納ラック223の昇降に伴って移動する軌跡に対向したパレットストック部43には、基準高さ標識417が設けられている。基準高さ標識417は、基準高さ位置に配置された穴419を有している。マガジン収納ラック223の下降に伴って基準高さ検出センサ251は、発光部421からの光をパレットストック部43に照射する。基準高さ検出センサ251は、発光部421から出射した光をパレットストック部43に反射させて受光部423により受光する。この動作がマガジン収納ラック223の昇降に伴って連続して行われることにより、基準高さ標識417のサーチが行われる。 FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram of the detection principle of the reference height sign 417. The reference height detection sensor 251 provided in the magazine storage rack 223 has a light emitting unit 421 and a light receiving unit 423. On the other hand, the reference height sign 417 is provided on the pallet stock portion 43 facing the locus in which the reference height detection sensor 251 moves as the magazine storage rack 223 moves up and down. The reference height sign 417 has a hole 419 located at the reference height position. As the magazine storage rack 223 descends, the reference height detection sensor 251 irradiates the pallet stock unit 43 with the light from the light emitting unit 421. The reference height detection sensor 251 reflects the light emitted from the light emitting unit 421 to the pallet stock unit 43 and receives the light by the light receiving unit 423. Since this operation is continuously performed as the magazine storage rack 223 moves up and down, the reference height sign 417 is searched.
 基準高さ検出センサ251は、発光部421からの光が基準高さ標識417の穴419に照射されると、パレットストック部43からの反射光が受光部423により検出されなくなる。基準高さ検出センサ251は、これをもって基準高さLv0を検出する。 In the reference height detection sensor 251, when the light from the light emitting unit 421 is applied to the hole 419 of the reference height marker 417, the reflected light from the pallet stock unit 43 is not detected by the light receiving unit 423. The reference height detection sensor 251 detects the reference height Lv0 with this.
 図50に示すように、基準高さLv0が検出されたなら(Bst3)、基準高さ設定部397が位置決め高さ(例えばZ座標)Z0を搬送装置記憶部409に記憶させる(Bst4)。位置決め高さ算出部399は、設定データ(例えばh1~h4)とこの位置決め高さ(例えばZ座標)Z0に基づき位置決め高さ(例えばZ座標)第1レベルLv1~第4レベルLv4のそれぞれを計算し(Bst5)、位置決め高さ算出部399による処理を終了する。 As shown in FIG. 50, when the reference height Lv0 is detected (Bst3), the reference height setting unit 397 stores the positioning height (for example, Z coordinate) Z0 in the transport device storage unit 409 (Bst4). The positioning height calculation unit 399 calculates each of the first level Lv1 to the fourth level Lv4 of the positioning height (for example, Z coordinate) based on the setting data (for example, h1 to h4) and the positioning height (for example, Z coordinate) Z0. (Bst5), the processing by the positioning height calculation unit 399 is completed.
 次に、製造設備から物品搬送装置209へのマガジン搬入動作と、物品搬送装置209から製造設備へのマガジン搬出動作を説明する。 Next, the magazine loading operation from the manufacturing equipment to the article transporting device 209 and the magazine loading operation from the article transporting device 209 to the manufacturing equipment will be described.
 製造設備から物品搬送装置209へのマガジン搬入動作は、物品を消費して空となったマガジン41の回収動作である。物品搬送装置209から製造設備へのマガジン搬出動作は、物品を収容したマガジン41の供給動作である。 The magazine loading operation from the manufacturing equipment to the article transporting device 209 is a collecting operation of the magazine 41 that has consumed the article and is emptied. The magazine unloading operation from the article transport device 209 to the manufacturing equipment is a supply operation of the magazine 41 containing the articles.
(第1のマガジン保持テーブルへの搬入)
 図52は、第1のマガジン保持テーブル225への搬入の手順を示すマガジン受渡し動作のフローチャートである。トレイ部品ストック装置29からのマガジン搬出動作(例えば第1搬入部401の処理)は、先ず、ラック昇降装置229によりマガジン収納ラック223を第1レベルLv1へ移動させる(Cst1)。Lv0=Lv1の場合はこの動作は不要となる。
(Delivery to the first magazine holding table)
FIG. 52 is a flowchart of a magazine delivery operation showing a procedure for carrying in the first magazine holding table 225. In the magazine unloading operation from the tray component stock device 29 (for example, the processing of the first loading section 401), the magazine storage rack 223 is first moved to the first level Lv1 by the rack elevating device 229 (Cst1). When Lv0 = Lv1, this operation is unnecessary.
 第1マガジン検出センサ263で第1のマガジン保持テーブル225にマガジン41がないことを確認し(Cst2)、無しならばトレイ部品ストック装置29にスライドテーブル127の進出許可を送信する(Cst3)。有りならば作業者へ報知して処理を終了する(Cst4)。 The first magazine detection sensor 263 confirms that the magazine 41 does not exist in the first magazine holding table 225 (Cst2), and if it does not exist, the slide table 127 advance permission is transmitted to the tray parts stock device 29 (Cst3). If there is, the worker is notified and the process is terminated (Cst4).
 図53は、第1搬入部401の処理によるトレイ部品ストック装置29からの搬出動作の説明図である。スライドテーブル装置123を駆動してマガジン41を保持したスライドテーブル127を第1のマガジン保持テーブル225の上方へ進出させる(図53の状態)。 FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram of the unloading operation from the tray component stock device 29 by the processing of the first loading unit 401. The slide table device 123 is driven to advance the slide table 127 holding the magazine 41 to the upper side of the first magazine holding table 225 (state of FIG. 53).
 図54は、第1搬入部401の処理による第1のマガジン保持テーブル225への搬入動作の説明図である。スライドレール167の進出完了の通知が有ったなら(Cst5)、ラック昇降装置229によりマガジン収納ラック223を第2レベルLv2へ移動させ、第1のマガジン保持テーブル225をスライドテーブル127よりも高い位置へ移動させる(Cst6)。第1のマガジン保持テーブル225とスライドテーブル127が上下にすれ違うことでマガジン41はスライドテーブル127から第1のマガジン保持テーブル225に載り移る(図54の状態)。 FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram of the loading operation to the first magazine holding table 225 by the processing of the first loading unit 401. If there is a notification of the completion of advancement of the slide rail 167 (Cst5), the magazine storage rack 223 is moved to the second level Lv2 by the rack elevating device 229, and the first magazine holding table 225 is positioned higher than the slide table 127. Move to (Cst6). When the first magazine holding table 225 and the slide table 127 pass each other up and down, the magazine 41 is transferred from the slide table 127 to the first magazine holding table 225 (state of FIG. 54).
 ここで、第1レベルLv1とは、スライドテーブル127が位置する高さ位置よりも低い高さ位置であって、スライドテーブル127に保持されて移動するマガジン41と保持テーブルとが干渉しない高さである。第2レベルLv2とは、スライドテーブル127が位置する高さ位置よりも高い高さ位置であって、スライドテーブル127が保持テーブルに保持されたマガジン41に干渉することなくスライドできる高さである。スライドテーブル127から保持テーブルへマガジン41を受け渡す動作は、保持テーブルが第1レベルLv1から第2レベルLv2へ上昇する。保持テーブルからスライドテーブル127にマガジン41を受け渡す動作はこの逆の動きになる。 Here, the first level Lv1 is a height position lower than the height position where the slide table 127 is located, and is at a height at which the magazine 41 held and moved by the slide table 127 and the holding table do not interfere with each other. be. The second level Lv2 is a height position higher than the height position where the slide table 127 is located, and is a height at which the slide table 127 can slide without interfering with the magazine 41 held by the holding table. In the operation of passing the magazine 41 from the slide table 127 to the holding table, the holding table rises from the first level Lv1 to the second level Lv2. The operation of passing the magazine 41 from the holding table to the slide table 127 is the opposite operation.
 図55は、第1搬入部401の処理による第1のマガジン保持テーブル225への搬入動作の説明図である。マガジン搬送装置制御部247からトレイ部品ストック装置29へスライドテーブル127の収納許可送信が行われる(Cst7)。マガジン搬送装置制御部247は、トレイ部品ストック装置29からスライドテーブル127の収納完了通知の有無を判断する(Cst8)。マガジン搬送装置制御部247は、スライドテーブル127の収納完了通知が有ったなら、スライドテーブル127の有無をスライドテーブル検出センサ253で検出する(Cst9)。マガジン搬送装置制御部247は、マガジン収納ラック223にスライドテーブル127が無ければ、処理を終了する。マガジン搬送装置制御部247は、マガジン収納ラック223にスライドテーブル127が有れば、作業者へ報知して作業を終了する。これでトレイ部品ストック装置29から第1のマガジン保持テーブル225へのマガジン搬出動作が完了する。 FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram of the loading operation to the first magazine holding table 225 by the processing of the first loading unit 401. The storage permission of the slide table 127 is transmitted from the magazine transfer device control unit 247 to the tray parts stock device 29 (Cst7). The magazine transfer device control unit 247 determines whether or not there is a storage completion notification of the slide table 127 from the tray parts stock device 29 (Cst8). When the storage completion notification of the slide table 127 is received, the magazine transfer device control unit 247 detects the presence / absence of the slide table 127 with the slide table detection sensor 253 (Cst9). The magazine transfer device control unit 247 ends the process if the magazine storage rack 223 does not have the slide table 127. If the magazine storage rack 223 has a slide table 127, the magazine transfer device control unit 247 notifies the operator and ends the work. This completes the magazine unloading operation from the tray component stock device 29 to the first magazine holding table 225.
(第2のマガジン保持テーブルへの搬入)
 図56は、第2のマガジン保持テーブル227への搬入の手順を示すマガジン受渡し動作のフローチャートである。トレイ部品ストック装置29からのマガジン搬出動作(第2搬入部405の処理)は、先ず、ラック昇降装置229によりマガジン収納ラック223を第3レベルLv3へ移動させる(Dst1)。
(Carrying to the second magazine holding table)
FIG. 56 is a flowchart of a magazine delivery operation showing a procedure for carrying in the second magazine holding table 227. In the magazine unloading operation (processing of the second loading unit 405) from the tray component stock device 29, first, the magazine storage rack 223 is moved to the third level Lv3 by the rack elevating device 229 (Dst1).
 第2マガジン検出センサ265で第2のマガジン保持テーブル227にマガジン41がないことを確認し(Dst2)、無しならばトレイ部品ストック装置29にスライドテーブル127の進出許可を送信する(Dst3)。有りならば作業者へ報知して処理を終了する(Dst4)。 The second magazine detection sensor 265 confirms that the magazine 41 does not exist in the second magazine holding table 227 (Dst2), and if there is none, the slide table 127 advance permission is transmitted to the tray parts stock device 29 (Dst3). If there is, the worker is notified and the process is terminated (Dst4).
 スライドテーブル装置123を駆動してマガジン41を保持したスライドテーブル127を第2のマガジン保持テーブル227の上方へ進出させる。 The slide table device 123 is driven to advance the slide table 127 holding the magazine 41 above the second magazine holding table 227.
 スライドレール167の進出完了の通知が有ったなら(Dst5)、ラック昇降装置229によりマガジン収納ラック223を第4レベルLv4へ移動させ、第2のマガジン保持テーブル227をスライドテーブル127よりも高い位置へ移動させる(Dst6)。第2のマガジン保持テーブル227とスライドテーブル127が上下にすれ違うことでマガジン41はスライドテーブル127から第2のマガジン保持テーブル227に載り移る。 If there is a notification of the completion of advancement of the slide rail 167 (Dst5), the magazine storage rack 223 is moved to the fourth level Lv4 by the rack elevating device 229, and the second magazine holding table 227 is positioned higher than the slide table 127. Move to (Dst6). When the second magazine holding table 227 and the slide table 127 pass each other up and down, the magazine 41 is transferred from the slide table 127 to the second magazine holding table 227.
 ここで、第3レベルLv3とは、スライドテーブル127が位置する高さ位置よりも低い高さ位置であって、スライドテーブル127に保持されて移動するマガジン41と保持テーブルとが干渉しない高さである。第4レベルLv4とは、スライドテーブル127が位置する高さ位置よりも高い高さ位置であって、スライドテーブル127が保持テーブルに保持されたマガジン41に干渉することなくスライドできる高さである。スライドテーブル127から保持テーブルへマガジン41を受け渡す動作は、保持テーブルが第3レベルLv3から第4レベルLv4へ上昇する。保持テーブルからスライドテーブル127にマガジン41を受け渡す動作はこの逆の動きになる。 Here, the third level Lv3 is a height position lower than the height position where the slide table 127 is located, and is at a height at which the magazine 41 held and moved by the slide table 127 and the holding table do not interfere with each other. be. The fourth level Lv4 is a height position higher than the height position where the slide table 127 is located, and is a height at which the slide table 127 can slide without interfering with the magazine 41 held by the holding table. In the operation of passing the magazine 41 from the slide table 127 to the holding table, the holding table rises from the third level Lv3 to the fourth level Lv4. The operation of passing the magazine 41 from the holding table to the slide table 127 is the opposite operation.
 マガジン搬送装置制御部247からトレイ部品ストック装置29へスライドテーブル127の収納許可送信が行われる(Dst7)。マガジン搬送装置制御部247は、トレイ部品ストック装置29からスライドテーブル127の収納完了通知の有無を判断する(Dst8)。マガジン搬送装置制御部247は、スライドテーブル127の収納完了通知が有ったなら、スライドテーブル127の有無をスライドテーブル検出センサ253で検出する(Dst9)。マガジン搬送装置制御部247は、マガジン収納ラック223にスライドテーブル127が無ければ、処理を終了する。マガジン搬送装置制御部247は、マガジン収納ラック223にスライドテーブル127が有れば、作業者へ報知して作業を終了する。これでトレイ部品ストック装置29から第2のマガジン保持テーブル227へのマガジン搬出動作が完了する。 The storage permission of the slide table 127 is transmitted from the magazine transfer device control unit 247 to the tray parts stock device 29 (Dst7). The magazine transfer device control unit 247 determines whether or not there is a storage completion notification of the slide table 127 from the tray parts stock device 29 (Dst8). When the storage completion notification of the slide table 127 is received, the magazine transfer device control unit 247 detects the presence / absence of the slide table 127 with the slide table detection sensor 253 (Dst9). The magazine transfer device control unit 247 ends the process if the magazine storage rack 223 does not have the slide table 127. If the magazine storage rack 223 has a slide table 127, the magazine transfer device control unit 247 notifies the operator and ends the work. This completes the magazine unloading operation from the tray component stock device 29 to the second magazine holding table 227.
(第2のマガジン保持テーブルからの搬出)
 図57は、第2のマガジン保持テーブル227からの搬出の手順を示すマガジン受渡し動作のフローチャートである。第2のマガジン保持テーブル227からの搬出動作(第2搬出部407の処理)は、先ず、ラック昇降装置229によりマガジン収納ラック223を第4レベルLv4へ移動させる。(Est1)。
(Carrying out from the second magazine holding table)
FIG. 57 is a flowchart of a magazine delivery operation showing a procedure for carrying out from the second magazine holding table 227. In the unloading operation from the second magazine holding table 227 (processing of the second unloading unit 407), first, the magazine storage rack 223 is moved to the fourth level Lv4 by the rack elevating device 229. (Est1).
 第2マガジン検出センサ265で第2のマガジン保持テーブル227にマガジン41があることを確認し(Est2)、有りならばトレイ部品ストック装置29にスライドテーブル進出許可を送信する(Est3)。無ければ作業者へ報知して処理を終了する(Est4)。 The second magazine detection sensor 265 confirms that the magazine 41 is on the second magazine holding table 227 (Est2), and if there is, the slide table advance permission is transmitted to the tray parts stock device 29 (Est3). If not, the worker is notified and the process is terminated (Est4).
 図58は、第2搬出部407の処理による第2のマガジン保持テーブル227からの搬出動作の説明図である。スライドテーブル装置123を駆動してスライドテーブル127をマガジン41を保持した第2のマガジン保持テーブル227の下方へ進出させる(図58の状態)。 FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram of the unloading operation from the second magazine holding table 227 by the processing of the second unloading unit 407. The slide table device 123 is driven to advance the slide table 127 to the lower side of the second magazine holding table 227 holding the magazine 41 (state of FIG. 58).
 図59は、第2搬出部407の処理によるトレイ部品ストック装置29への搬出動作の説明図である。スライドレール167の進出完了の通知が有ったなら(Cst5)、ラック昇降装置229によりマガジン収納ラック223を第3レベルLv3へ移動させ、第2のマガジン保持テーブル227をスライドテーブル127よりも低い位置へ移動させる(Est6)。第2のマガジン保持テーブル227とスライドテーブル127が上下にすれ違うことでマガジン41は第2のマガジン保持テーブル227からスライドテーブル127に載り移る(図59の状態)。 FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram of the unloading operation to the tray parts stock device 29 by the processing of the second unloading unit 407. If there is a notification of the completion of advancement of the slide rail 167 (Cst5), the magazine storage rack 223 is moved to the third level Lv3 by the rack elevating device 229, and the second magazine holding table 227 is positioned lower than the slide table 127. Move to (Est6). When the second magazine holding table 227 and the slide table 127 pass each other up and down, the magazine 41 is transferred from the second magazine holding table 227 to the slide table 127 (state in FIG. 59).
 ここで、第4レベルLv4とは、スライドテーブル127が位置する高さ位置よりも高い高さ位置であって、スライドテーブル127に保持されて移動するマガジン41と保持テーブルとが干渉しない高さである。第3レベルLv3とは、スライドテーブル127が位置する高さ位置よりも低い高さ位置であって、スライドテーブル127が保持テーブルに保持されたマガジン41に干渉することなくスライドできる高さである。保持テーブルからスライドテーブル127へマガジン41を受け渡す動作は、保持テーブルが第4レベルLv4から第3レベルLv3へ下降する。スライドテーブル127から保持テーブルにマガジン41を受け渡す動作はこの逆の動きになる。 Here, the fourth level Lv4 is a height position higher than the height position where the slide table 127 is located, and is at a height at which the magazine 41 held and moved by the slide table 127 and the holding table do not interfere with each other. be. The third level Lv3 is a height position lower than the height position where the slide table 127 is located, and is a height at which the slide table 127 can slide without interfering with the magazine 41 held by the holding table. In the operation of passing the magazine 41 from the holding table to the slide table 127, the holding table descends from the fourth level Lv4 to the third level Lv3. The operation of passing the magazine 41 from the slide table 127 to the holding table is the opposite operation.
 図60は、第2搬出部407の処理によるトレイ部品ストック装置29への搬入動作の説明図である。マガジン搬送装置制御部247からトレイ部品ストック装置29へスライドテーブル127の収納許可送信が行われる(Est7)。マガジン搬送装置制御部247は、トレイ部品ストック装置29からスライドテーブル127の収納完了通知の有無を判断する(Est8)。マガジン搬送装置制御部247は、スライドテーブル127の収納完了通知が有ったなら、スライドテーブル127の有無をスライドテーブル検出センサ253で検出する(Est9)。マガジン搬送装置制御部247は、マガジン収納ラック223にスライドテーブル127が無ければ、処理を終了する。マガジン搬送装置制御部247は、マガジン収納ラック223にスライドテーブル127が有れば、作業者へ報知して作業を終了する。これで第2のマガジン保持テーブル227からトレイ部品ストック装置29へのマガジン搬出動作が完了する。 FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram of the loading operation into the tray parts stock device 29 by the processing of the second unloading unit 407. The storage permission of the slide table 127 is transmitted from the magazine transfer device control unit 247 to the tray parts stock device 29 (Est7). The magazine transfer device control unit 247 determines whether or not there is a storage completion notification of the slide table 127 from the tray parts stock device 29 (Est 8). When the storage completion notification of the slide table 127 is received, the magazine transfer device control unit 247 detects the presence / absence of the slide table 127 with the slide table detection sensor 253 (Est9). The magazine transfer device control unit 247 ends the process if the magazine storage rack 223 does not have the slide table 127. If the magazine storage rack 223 has a slide table 127, the magazine transfer device control unit 247 notifies the operator and ends the work. This completes the magazine unloading operation from the second magazine holding table 227 to the tray parts stock device 29.
(第1のマガジン保持テーブルからの搬出)
 図61は、第1のマガジン保持テーブル225からの搬出の手順を示すマガジン受渡し動作のフローチャートである。第1のマガジン保持テーブル225からの搬出動作(例えば第1搬出部403の処理)は、先ず、ラック昇降装置229によりマガジン収納ラック223を第2レベルLv2へ移動させる(Fst1)。
(Carrying out from the first magazine holding table)
FIG. 61 is a flowchart of a magazine delivery operation showing a procedure for carrying out from the first magazine holding table 225. In the unloading operation from the first magazine holding table 225 (for example, processing of the first unloading unit 403), the magazine storage rack 223 is first moved to the second level Lv2 by the rack elevating device 229 (Fst1).
 第1マガジン検出センサ263で第1のマガジン保持テーブル225にマガジン41があることを確認し(Fst2)、有りならばトレイ部品ストック装置29にスライドテーブル進出許可を送信する(Fst3)。無ければ作業者へ報知して処理を終了する(Fst4)。 The first magazine detection sensor 263 confirms that the magazine 41 is on the first magazine holding table 225 (Fst2), and if there is, the slide table advance permission is transmitted to the tray parts stock device 29 (Fst3). If not, the worker is notified and the process is terminated (Fst4).
 スライドテーブル装置123を駆動してスライドテーブル127をマガジン41を保持した第1のマガジン保持テーブル225の下方へ進出させる。 The slide table device 123 is driven to advance the slide table 127 below the first magazine holding table 225 holding the magazine 41.
 スライドレール167の進出完了の通知が有ったなら(Fst5)、ラック昇降装置229によりマガジン収納ラック223を第1レベルLv1へ移動させ、第1のマガジン保持テーブル225をスライドテーブル127よりも低い位置へ移動させる(Fst6)。第1のマガジン保持テーブル225とスライドテーブル127が上下にすれ違うことでマガジン41は第1のマガジン保持テーブル225からスライドテーブル127に載り移る。 If there is a notification of the completion of advancement of the slide rail 167 (Fst5), the magazine storage rack 223 is moved to the first level Lv1 by the rack elevating device 229, and the first magazine holding table 225 is positioned lower than the slide table 127. Move to (Fst6). When the first magazine holding table 225 and the slide table 127 pass each other up and down, the magazine 41 is transferred from the first magazine holding table 225 to the slide table 127.
 ここで、第2レベルLv2とは、スライドテーブル127が位置する高さ位置よりも高い高さ位置であって、スライドテーブル127に保持されて移動するマガジン41と保持テーブルとが干渉しない高さである。第1レベルLv1とは、スライドテーブル127が位置する高さ位置よりも低い高さ位置であって、スライドテーブル127が保持テーブルに保持されたマガジン41に干渉することなくスライドできる高さである。保持テーブルからスライドテーブル127へマガジン41を受け渡す動作は、保持テーブルが第2レベルLv2から第1レベルLv1へ下降する。スライドテーブル127から保持テーブルにマガジン41を受け渡す動作はこの逆の動きになる。 Here, the second level Lv2 is a height position higher than the height position where the slide table 127 is located, and is at a height at which the magazine 41 held and moved by the slide table 127 and the holding table do not interfere with each other. be. The first level Lv1 is a height position lower than the height position where the slide table 127 is located, and is a height at which the slide table 127 can slide without interfering with the magazine 41 held by the holding table. In the operation of passing the magazine 41 from the holding table to the slide table 127, the holding table descends from the second level Lv2 to the first level Lv1. The operation of passing the magazine 41 from the slide table 127 to the holding table is the opposite operation.
 マガジン搬送装置制御部247からトレイ部品ストック装置29へスライドテーブル127の収納許可送信が行われる(Fst7)。マガジン搬送装置制御部247は、トレイ部品ストック装置29からスライドテーブル127の収納完了通知の有無を判断する(Fst8)。マガジン搬送装置制御部247は、スライドテーブル127の収納完了通知が有ったなら、スライドテーブル127の有無をスライドテーブル検出センサ253で検出する(Fst9)。マガジン搬送装置制御部247は、マガジン収納ラック223にスライドテーブル127が無ければ、処理を終了する。マガジン搬送装置制御部247は、マガジン収納ラック223にスライドテーブル127が有れば、作業者へ報知して作業を終了する。これで第1のマガジン保持テーブル225からトレイ部品ストック装置29へのマガジン搬出動作が完了する。 The storage permission of the slide table 127 is transmitted from the magazine transfer device control unit 247 to the tray parts stock device 29 (Fst7). The magazine transfer device control unit 247 determines whether or not there is a storage completion notification of the slide table 127 from the tray parts stock device 29 (Fst8). When the storage completion notification of the slide table 127 is received, the magazine transfer device control unit 247 detects the presence / absence of the slide table 127 with the slide table detection sensor 253 (Fst9). The magazine transfer device control unit 247 ends the process if the magazine storage rack 223 does not have the slide table 127. If the magazine storage rack 223 has a slide table 127, the magazine transfer device control unit 247 notifies the operator and ends the work. This completes the magazine unloading operation from the first magazine holding table 225 to the tray parts stock device 29.
 次に、実施の形態2に係る物品搬送装置209と物品搬送システム211の作用を説明する。 Next, the operations of the article transfer device 209 and the article transfer system 211 according to the second embodiment will be described.
 物品搬送装置209は、工場フロアに設置された少なくとも一つの製造設備で使用する物品を工場フロア上で搬送する物品搬送装置209であって、少なくとも一つの物品を収納する物品収納体(マガジン41)と、工場フロアを走行するための車輪215を有するベース部217と、ベース部217に対して昇降可能であり、物品収納体を保持する保持テーブル(第1のマガジン保持テーブル225、第2のマガジン保持テーブル227)を少なくとも一つ有し、保持テーブルの横方向から物品収納体を出し入れ可能な開口221を有する収納ラック(マガジン収納ラック223)と、収納ラックを昇降させるラック昇降装置229と、を備える。 The article transport device 209 is an article transport device 209 that transports articles used in at least one manufacturing facility installed on the factory floor on the factory floor, and is an article storage body (magazine 41) that stores at least one article. A holding table (first magazine holding table 225, second magazine) that can be raised and lowered with respect to the base portion 217 having wheels 215 for traveling on the factory floor and holding the article storage body. A storage rack (magazine storage rack 223) having at least one holding table 227) and an opening 221 that allows the article storage body to be taken in and out from the lateral direction of the holding table, and a rack elevating device 229 for raising and lowering the storage rack. Be prepared.
 この物品搬送装置209によれば、物品搬送装置209が、ベース部217に設けた車輪215により、工場フロアの通路15を走行する。物品搬送装置209は、収納ラックを備える。収納ラックは、マガジン41を保持する保持テーブルを有する。この収納ラックは、開口221を有する。収納ラックは、保持テーブルに保持しているマガジン41が、開口221から出し入れ可能となる。 According to this article transfer device 209, the article transfer device 209 travels in the passage 15 on the factory floor by the wheels 215 provided on the base portion 217. The article transfer device 209 includes a storage rack. The storage rack has a holding table for holding the magazine 41. This storage rack has an opening 221. In the storage rack, the magazine 41 held on the holding table can be taken in and out from the opening 221.
 収納ラックは、物品搬送装置209のベース部217に対して、ラック昇降装置229により昇降が可能となる。物品搬送装置209は、開口221から表出する保持テーブルに保持されたマガジン41が、ラック昇降装置229が駆動されることにより、上下に移動される。物品搬送装置209は、この収納ラックごとのマガジン41の上下移動を行うことにより、開口221を介して収納ラック内に進入させた製造設備からのスライドテーブル127に対し、マガジン41の容易な受け渡しを可能としている。 The storage rack can be raised and lowered by the rack raising and lowering device 229 with respect to the base portion 217 of the article transporting device 209. In the article transfer device 209, the magazine 41 held by the holding table exposed from the opening 221 is moved up and down by driving the rack elevating device 229. The article transfer device 209 moves the magazine 41 up and down for each storage rack so that the magazine 41 can be easily delivered to the slide table 127 from the manufacturing equipment that has entered the storage rack through the opening 221. It is possible.
 すなわち、製造設備は、物品搬送装置209の収納ラックに水平方向に進退のみするスライドテーブル127を有する。物品搬送装置209は、収納ラックを上下のみに昇降する。これにより、製造設備および物品搬送装置209は、それぞれが必要最小限の極めて簡素な機構を備えるのみで、マガジン41の回収および供給を実現させている。その結果、物品搬送装置209は、単純な機構を用いて製造設備との間でマガジン41を自動で補給および回収することができる。 That is, the manufacturing equipment has a slide table 127 that only advances and retreats in the horizontal direction in the storage rack of the article transport device 209. The article transfer device 209 raises and lowers the storage rack only up and down. As a result, the manufacturing equipment and the article transporting device 209 each have an extremely simple mechanism that is the minimum necessary, and the magazine 41 can be collected and supplied. As a result, the article transfer device 209 can automatically replenish and collect the magazine 41 with the manufacturing equipment by using a simple mechanism.
 また、物品搬送装置209において、ベース部217は、ベース部217が第1の方向(Y軸に沿う方向)へ移動して製造設備に接近することによって製造設備が有するドッキングベース115にドッキングするドッキング部269をさらに有する。 Further, in the article transfer device 209, the base portion 217 is docked to the docking base 115 of the manufacturing equipment by moving the base portion 217 in the first direction (direction along the Y axis) and approaching the manufacturing equipment. It further has a portion 269.
 この物品搬送装置209によれば、物品搬送装置209が、ドッキング部269を有する。一方、製造設備には、ドッキングベース115が設けられている。物品搬送装置209は、製造設備とのドッキングに際し、Y軸に沿う方向で製造設備に接近する。製造設備に接近した物品搬送装置209は、ドッキング部269が製造設備のドッキングベース115に一致すると、ドッキング部269がドッキングベース115にドッキングし、製造設備と相互に連結される。物品搬送装置209は、それ以降、ドッキング部269がドッキング解除されない限り、製造設備と連結した状態が維持される。 According to this article transfer device 209, the article transfer device 209 has a docking unit 269. On the other hand, the manufacturing equipment is provided with a docking base 115. The article transfer device 209 approaches the manufacturing equipment in the direction along the Y axis when docked with the manufacturing equipment. When the docking section 269 matches the docking base 115 of the manufacturing facility, the article transport device 209 close to the manufacturing facility has the docking section 269 docked to the docking base 115 and is interconnected with the manufacturing facility. After that, the article transfer device 209 is maintained in a state of being connected to the manufacturing equipment unless the docking unit 269 is undocked.
 また、物品搬送装置209において、ドッキング部269は、ドッキングベース115に設けた少なくとも一つのアライメント部材(Xガイド271、位置決めピンガイド穴273)に接触しながら第1の方向(Y軸に沿う方向)へ移動して接近することで第1の方向と水平方向に直行する第2の方向(X軸に沿う方向)におけるベース部217の位置を調整する少なくとも一つの被アライメント部材(Xガイドローラ277、位置決めピン279)を有する。 Further, in the article transport device 209, the docking portion 269 is in contact with at least one alignment member (X guide 271, positioning pin guide hole 273) provided on the docking base 115 in a first direction (direction along the Y axis). At least one aligned member (X guide roller 277,) that adjusts the position of the base portion 217 in the second direction (direction along the X axis) orthogonal to the first direction and the horizontal direction by moving to and approaching. It has a positioning pin 279).
 この物品搬送装置209によれば、ドッキング部269が、Y軸に沿う方向からドッキングベース115に接近すると、ドッキング部269の有する被アライメント部材が、ドッキングベース115に設けられたアライメント部材に当接する。ドッキング部269がさらにドッキングベース115に接近すると、被アライメント部材がアライメント部材に沿って変位し、ドッキング部269がドッキングベース115に位置あわせ(アライメント)されて、ドッキングする。その結果、物品搬送装置209は、ドッキングベース115にアライメントされたドッキング部269を介して製造設備に対する位置が調整される。 According to this article transfer device 209, when the docking portion 269 approaches the docking base 115 from the direction along the Y axis, the aligned member of the docking portion 269 comes into contact with the alignment member provided on the docking base 115. When the docking portion 269 further approaches the docking base 115, the aligned member is displaced along the alignment member, and the docking portion 269 is aligned with the docking base 115 and docked. As a result, the article transfer device 209 is adjusted in position with respect to the manufacturing equipment via the docking unit 269 aligned with the docking base 115.
 また、物品搬送装置209では、二つの被アライメント部材(Xガイドローラ277、位置決めピン279)が第2の方向(X軸に沿う方向)に間隔を空けて配置されており、各々の被アライメント部材はドッキングベース115に第2の方向に間隔を空けて設けた二つのアライメント部材(Xガイド271、位置決めピンガイド穴273)に個別に接触する。 Further, in the article transfer device 209, two aligned members (X guide roller 277, positioning pin 279) are arranged at a distance in a second direction (direction along the X axis), and each aligned member is arranged. Individually contacts two alignment members (X guide 271, positioning pin guide hole 273) provided on the docking base 115 at intervals in the second direction.
 この物品搬送装置209によれば、物品搬送装置209のベース部217が、Xガイドローラ277と、位置決めピン279とからなる二つの被アライメント部材を備える。二つのXガイドローラ277と、二つの位置決めピン279は、製造設備のドッキングベース115にX軸に沿う方向で離間した二つのXガイド271と、X軸に沿う方向で離間した二つの位置決めピンガイド穴273のそれぞれに位置決めされる。これにより、被アライメント部材とアライメント部材とが一つの場合に比べ、ドッキング部269がドッキングベース115に対してより確実に(高精度に)位置調整可能となる。 According to the article transfer device 209, the base portion 217 of the article transfer device 209 includes two aligned members including an X guide roller 277 and a positioning pin 279. The two X-guide rollers 277 and the two positioning pins 279 are two X-guides 271 separated along the X-axis and two positioning pin guides separated along the X-axis from the docking base 115 of the manufacturing equipment. Positioned in each of the holes 273. As a result, the docking portion 269 can be positioned more reliably (with high accuracy) with respect to the docking base 115 as compared with the case where the alignment member and the alignment member are one.
 また、物品搬送装置209において、ベース部217は、ドッキングベース115に設けたドッキング保持部281に保持される被保持部材をさらに有する。 Further, in the article transporting device 209, the base portion 217 further has a held member held by the docking holding portion 281 provided on the docking base 115.
 この物品搬送装置209によれば、製造設備のドッキングベース115に、ドッキング保持部281が設けられる。ドッキング保持部281は、フック挿入口283、フック保持部321、緩衝部303とを有する。物品搬送装置209のドッキング部269に設けられる被保持部材は、フック285と、突起部319とを有する。物品搬送装置209は、ドッキング部269がドッキングベース115に、Y軸に沿う方向からドッキングすると、フック285が、フック保持部321に係合して保持される。一方、突起部319は、緩衝部303を押圧することにより、緩衝部303からの反力を受ける。反力は、ドッキング部269をドッキングベース115から離反する方向に押圧するが、フック285がフック保持部321に保持されたドッキング部269はドッキングベース115からのドッキング解除が規制される。これにより、物品搬送装置209は、製造設備に対してがたつきが生じることなく、Y軸に沿う方向で位置が調整される。 According to this article transfer device 209, a docking holding portion 281 is provided on the docking base 115 of the manufacturing equipment. The docking holding portion 281 has a hook insertion port 283, a hook holding portion 321, and a cushioning portion 303. The held member provided in the docking portion 269 of the article transport device 209 has a hook 285 and a protrusion 319. In the article transfer device 209, when the docking portion 269 is docked to the docking base 115 from the direction along the Y axis, the hook 285 is engaged with and held by the hook holding portion 321. On the other hand, the protrusion 319 receives the reaction force from the cushioning portion 303 by pressing the cushioning portion 303. The reaction force presses the docking portion 269 in a direction away from the docking base 115, but the docking portion 269 in which the hook 285 is held by the hook holding portion 321 is restricted from being docked from the docking base 115. As a result, the position of the article transport device 209 is adjusted in the direction along the Y axis without causing rattling with respect to the manufacturing equipment.
 また、物品搬送装置209において、ドッキング部269は、ドッキングベース115に設けられた一方のコネクタ117に電気的に接続される通信用または給電用の他方のコネクタ287を有する。 Further, in the article transport device 209, the docking unit 269 has a other connector 287 for communication or power supply that is electrically connected to one connector 117 provided on the docking base 115.
 この物品搬送装置209によれば、ドッキング部269が他方のコネクタ287を備える。一方、ドッキングベース115には、一方のコネクタ117が備えられる。ドッキング部269に設けられた他方のコネクタ287は、ドッキング部269がドッキングベース115に対し、X軸に沿う方向、Y軸に沿う方向で位置が調整されることにより、ドッキングベース115に設けられた一方のコネクタ117に対して結合可能に位置が調整される。 According to this article transfer device 209, the docking unit 269 includes the other connector 287. On the other hand, the docking base 115 is provided with one connector 117. The other connector 287 provided on the docking portion 269 is provided on the docking base 115 by adjusting the position of the docking portion 269 with respect to the docking base 115 in the direction along the X axis and the direction along the Y axis. The position is adjusted so that it can be coupled to one of the connectors 117.
 また、物品搬送装置209において、ドッキング部269は、ドッキングの際の他方のコネクタ287の上下方向の位置を調整するコネクタ位置調整機構289、もしくは、ドッキングベース115に設けられたコネクタ位置調整機構289を作動させるアライメント部材(カムフォロア295)を有する。 Further, in the article transporting device 209, the docking unit 269 has a connector position adjusting mechanism 289 that adjusts the vertical position of the other connector 287 at the time of docking, or a connector position adjusting mechanism 289 provided on the docking base 115. It has an alignment member (cam follower 295) to be operated.
 この物品搬送装置209によれば、ドッキング部269またはドッキングベース115が、コネクタ位置調整機構289を有する。コネクタ位置調整機構289は、ドッキング部269に設けられている他方のコネクタ287の上下方向の位置を調整する。実施の形態2では、コネクタ位置調整機構289は、ドッキング部269に設けられている。また、ドッキング部269は、アライメント部材(カムフォロア295)を備える。これにより、他方のコネクタ287は、ドッキングベース115の一方のコネクタ117に対して上下方向の位置が自動的に調整されることになる。 According to this article transfer device 209, the docking unit 269 or the docking base 115 has a connector position adjusting mechanism 289. The connector position adjusting mechanism 289 adjusts the vertical position of the other connector 287 provided in the docking portion 269. In the second embodiment, the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 is provided in the docking portion 269. Further, the docking portion 269 includes an alignment member (cam follower 295). As a result, the position of the other connector 287 in the vertical direction with respect to the one connector 117 of the docking base 115 is automatically adjusted.
 また、物品搬送装置209において、ドッキング部269はコネクタ位置調整機構289を有し、コネクタ位置調整機構289は、他方のコネクタ287とともに昇降し、製造設備に設けたアライメント部材(カム297)に接触しながら第1の方向(Y軸に沿う方向)へ移動することでアライメント部材によって高さ位置が調整される昇降部材291を有する。 Further, in the article transport device 209, the docking portion 269 has a connector position adjusting mechanism 289, and the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 moves up and down together with the other connector 287 and comes into contact with an alignment member (cam 297) provided in the manufacturing equipment. However, it has an elevating member 291 whose height position is adjusted by the alignment member by moving in the first direction (direction along the Y axis).
 この物品搬送装置209によれば、コネクタ位置調整機構289が、昇降部材291を有する。昇降部材291は、製造設備に設けたカム297にカムフォロア295が接触しながらY軸に沿う方向へ移動することにより、高さ位置が調整される。つまり、他方のコネクタ287は、昇降部材291に設けられていることにより、ドッキング部269がドッキングベース115にドッキングされるに際し、カム297に従動するカムフォロア295によって、Z軸に沿う方向(すなわち、高さ位置)が調整される。 According to this article transfer device 209, the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 has an elevating member 291. The height position of the elevating member 291 is adjusted by moving the elevating member 291 in the direction along the Y axis while the cam follower 295 is in contact with the cam 297 provided in the manufacturing equipment. That is, since the other connector 287 is provided on the elevating member 291, when the docking portion 269 is docked to the docking base 115, the cam follower 295 that follows the cam 297 causes the direction along the Z axis (that is, the height). Position) is adjusted.
 また、物品搬送装置209において、保持テーブル(第1のマガジン保持テーブル225、第2のマガジン保持テーブル227)は収納ラック(マガジン収納ラック223)に対して横方向(Y軸に沿う方向)へスライド自在に装着されており、収納ラックに保持テーブルのスライドを阻止するスライドロック部367を設ける。 Further, in the article transfer device 209, the holding tables (first magazine holding table 225, second magazine holding table 227) slide in the lateral direction (direction along the Y axis) with respect to the storage rack (magazine storage rack 223). It is freely mounted, and the storage rack is provided with a slide lock portion 367 that prevents the holding table from sliding.
 この物品搬送装置209によれば、収納ラックが、保持テーブルをスライド自在に備えている。保持テーブルは、収納ラックに設けられているスライドロック部367により、スライドが規制される。スライドロック部367は、手動でロック解除することができる。保持テーブルは、スライドロック部367が解除されることにより、スライド自在となる。これにより、収納ラックは、回収・補給場所において、保持テーブルを引き出して、作業者の手作業によるマガジン41の回収・補充作業が容易に行えるようになっている。 According to this article transfer device 209, the storage rack is provided with a sliding holding table. The slide of the holding table is restricted by the slide lock portion 367 provided in the storage rack. The slide lock portion 367 can be manually unlocked. The holding table becomes slidable when the slide lock portion 367 is released. As a result, the storage rack can easily collect and replenish the magazine 41 manually by the operator by pulling out the holding table at the collection / replenishment place.
 また、物品搬送システム211は、工場フロアに設置された少なくとも一つの製造設備(トレイ部品ストック装置29)と、工場フロアを移動して製造設備で使用する物品(パレット39)を搬送する物品搬送装置209を有し、製造設備が有するドッキングベース115と物品搬送装置209が有するドッキング部269とで構成されるドッキング装置299によって物品搬送装置209を製造設備にドッキングさせて物品搬送装置209と製造設備との間で物品の受け渡しを行う物品搬送システム211であって、ドッキング装置299は、製造設備に対して第1の方向(Y軸に沿う方向)から接近する物品搬送装置209の第1の方向に水平面内で直交する第2の方向(X軸に沿う方向)における位置を調整しながら誘導する誘導部301と、クッション部材(緩衝ばね317)の反発力を利用して物品搬送装置209を製造設備から離れる方向に押すことによりドッキング時の衝撃を吸収する緩衝部303と、ドッキングした物品搬送装置209がクッション部材の反発力で製造設備から離れないようにするドッキング保持部281と、物品搬送装置209の製造設備への接近に伴い、物品搬送装置209が有する他方のコネクタ287と製造設備が有する一方のコネクタ117とを位置合わせして連結するコネクタ連結部305と、を備える。 Further, the article transport system 211 includes at least one manufacturing facility (tray parts stock device 29) installed on the factory floor and an article transport device that moves the factory floor to transport articles (pallets 39) used in the manufacturing facility. The article transport device 209 is docked to the manufacturing facility by the docking device 299 including the docking base 115 of the manufacturing facility and the docking unit 269 of the article transport device 209, and the article transport device 209 and the manufacturing facility. In the article transport system 211 for delivering articles between, the docking device 299 is in the first direction of the article transport device 209 approaching the manufacturing equipment from the first direction (direction along the Y axis). Manufacturing equipment that utilizes the repulsive force of the cushion member (buffer spring 317) and the guide unit 301 that guides while adjusting the position in the second direction (direction along the X axis) orthogonal to each other in the horizontal plane. A cushioning unit 303 that absorbs the impact at the time of docking by pushing in a direction away from the docking unit, a docking holding unit 281 that prevents the docked article transporting device 209 from separating from the manufacturing equipment due to the repulsive force of the cushion member, and an article transporting device 209. With the approach to the manufacturing equipment, the connector connecting portion 305 for aligning and connecting the other connector 287 of the article transport device 209 and the one connector 117 of the manufacturing equipment is provided.
 この物品搬送システム211によれば、製造設備が、ドッキングベース115を備える。物品搬送装置209が、ドッキング部269を備える。ドッキングベース115とドッキング部269とは、製造設備に対し、物品搬送装置209を接合するドッキング装置299を構成する。したがって、ドッキング装置299は、製造設備と物品搬送装置209との接合部とも言える。 According to this article transport system 211, the manufacturing equipment is equipped with a docking base 115. The article transfer device 209 includes a docking unit 269. The docking base 115 and the docking unit 269 form a docking device 299 for joining the article transport device 209 to the manufacturing equipment. Therefore, the docking device 299 can be said to be a joint portion between the manufacturing equipment and the article transport device 209.
 ドッキング部269は、誘導部301を有する。誘導部301は、製造設備に対してY軸に沿う方向から接近する物品搬送装置209のX軸に沿う方向における位置を調整しながらドッキングを誘導する。また、ドッキング装置299は、Y軸に沿う方向でドッキングした物品搬送装置209が、クッション部材の反発力で製造設備から離れないようにするドッキング保持部281を備える。つまり、ドッキングベース115とドッキング部269とは、ドッキングの後に、誘導部301とドッキング保持部281とにより水平面内で位置が調整されることになる。 The docking unit 269 has a guiding unit 301. The guiding unit 301 guides docking while adjusting the position of the article transporting device 209 approaching the manufacturing equipment from the direction along the Y axis in the direction along the X axis. Further, the docking device 299 includes a docking holding portion 281 that prevents the article transporting device 209 docked in the direction along the Y axis from separating from the manufacturing equipment due to the repulsive force of the cushion member. That is, the positions of the docking base 115 and the docking portion 269 are adjusted in the horizontal plane by the guiding portion 301 and the docking holding portion 281 after docking.
 これに加え、ドッキング装置299は、コネクタ連結部305を備える。コネクタ連結部305は、物品搬送装置209の製造設備への接近に伴い、物品搬送装置209が有する他方のコネクタ287と製造設備が有する一方のコネクタ117とを相対的に位置調整して連結する。すなわち、ドッキング装置299は、水平面内での位置調整を行うとともに、水平面内での位置調整が完了した後の、一方のコネクタ117と他方のコネクタ287とを、コネクタ連結部305が水平面に交差する方向(Z軸に沿う方向)で位置調整して連結する。これにより、物品搬送システム211は、単純な機構を用いて製造設備と物品搬送装置209との間の高さのばらつきをドッキング装置299(接合部)が吸収できる。 In addition to this, the docking device 299 includes a connector connecting portion 305. The connector connecting portion 305 connects the other connector 287 of the article transporting device 209 and the one connector 117 of the manufacturing facility by relatively adjusting the positions as the article transporting device 209 approaches the manufacturing equipment. That is, the docking device 299 adjusts the position in the horizontal plane, and after the position adjustment in the horizontal plane is completed, the connector connecting portion 305 intersects the horizontal plane with one connector 117 and the other connector 287. Adjust the position in the direction (direction along the Z axis) and connect. Thereby, in the article transport system 211, the docking device 299 (joint portion) can absorb the variation in height between the manufacturing equipment and the article transport device 209 by using a simple mechanism.
 また、物品搬送システム211において、誘導部301は、ドッキングベース115に設けた少なくとも一つのアライメント部材(例えばXガイド271、位置決めピンガイド穴273)とドッキング部269に設けた少なくとも一つの被アライメント部(例えばXガイドローラ277、位置決めピン279)を有する。誘導部301は、被アライメント部をアライメント部材に接触させながら第1の方向(Y軸に沿う方向)へ移動することにより被アライメント部の軌道をアライメント部材により修正する。これにより、物品搬送装置209の第2の方向(X軸に沿う方向)における位置が調整される。 Further, in the article transport system 211, the guide portion 301 has at least one alignment member (for example, X guide 271 and positioning pin guide hole 273) provided on the docking base 115 and at least one aligned portion (for example) provided on the docking portion 269. For example, it has an X guide roller 277 and a positioning pin 279). The guide portion 301 corrects the trajectory of the aligned portion by the alignment member by moving the aligned portion in the first direction (direction along the Y axis) while bringing the aligned portion into contact with the alignment member. As a result, the position of the article transport device 209 in the second direction (direction along the X axis) is adjusted.
 この物品搬送システム211によれば、誘導部301が、アライメント部材と被アライメント部材とを備える。誘導部301は、ドッキング部269が、Y軸に沿う方向からドッキングベース115に接近すると、ドッキング部269の有する被アライメント部材が、ドッキングベース115に設けられたアライメント部材に当接する。ドッキング部269がさらにドッキングベース115に接近すると、被アライメント部材がアライメント部材に沿って変位し、ドッキング部269がドッキングベース115に位置あわせ(アライメント)されて、ドッキングする。その結果、物品搬送装置209は、ドッキングベース115にアライメントされたドッキング部269を介して製造設備に位置あわせされて、連結される。 According to the article transport system 211, the guide portion 301 includes an alignment member and an aligned member. When the docking portion 269 approaches the docking base 115 from the direction along the Y axis, the alignment member of the docking portion 269 comes into contact with the alignment member provided on the docking base 115. When the docking portion 269 further approaches the docking base 115, the aligned member is displaced along the alignment member, and the docking portion 269 is aligned with the docking base 115 and docked. As a result, the article transfer device 209 is aligned with and connected to the manufacturing equipment via the docking unit 269 aligned with the docking base 115.
 また、物品搬送システム211において、被アライメント部(例えばXガイドローラ277、位置決めピン279)は、アライメント部材(例えばXガイド271、位置決めピンガイド穴273)に接触するローラ(例えばXガイドローラ277)を含む。 Further, in the article transport system 211, the aligned portion (for example, X guide roller 277, positioning pin 279) has a roller (for example, X guide roller 277) that comes into contact with the alignment member (for example, X guide 271, positioning pin guide hole 273). include.
 この物品搬送システム211によれば、ドッキング部269の被アライメント部材が、Xガイドローラ277を有する。Xガイドローラ277は、ドッキングベース115に設けられるXガイド271に接して転動する。Xガイド271には、案内斜面425(図30参照)が形成される。Xガイドローラ277は、ドッキング部269がドッキングベース115に接近するにしたがってXガイド271に接し、その後、案内斜面425を転動することにより案内斜面425からの反力によりドッキング部269を変位させる。これにより、Xガイドローラ277の軌道がXガイド271によって修正され、これにより物品搬送装置209の第2の方向(X軸に沿う方向)における位置が調整される。 According to this article transport system 211, the aligned member of the docking portion 269 has an X guide roller 277. The X guide roller 277 rolls in contact with the X guide 271 provided on the docking base 115. A guide slope 425 (see FIG. 30) is formed on the X guide 271. The X guide roller 277 comes into contact with the X guide 271 as the docking portion 269 approaches the docking base 115, and then rolls the guide slope 425 to displace the docking portion 269 by the reaction force from the guide slope 425. As a result, the trajectory of the X guide roller 277 is corrected by the X guide 271, whereby the position of the article transport device 209 in the second direction (direction along the X axis) is adjusted.
 また、物品搬送システム211において、緩衝部303は、ドッキングベース115またはドッキング部269の一方に配置され、他方には第1の方向から緩衝部303に当接してクッション部材を変形させる突起部319を有する。 Further, in the article transport system 211, the cushioning portion 303 is arranged on one of the docking base 115 and the docking portion 269, and the other has a protrusion 319 that abuts on the cushioning portion 303 from the first direction and deforms the cushion member. Have.
 この物品搬送システム211によれば、ドッキングベース115またはドッキング部269の一方に緩衝部303が配置され、他方に突起部319が配置される。実施の形態2において、緩衝部303はドッキングベース115に配置され、突起部319はドッキング部269に配置される。緩衝部303は、ドッキング部269が接近することにより、突起部319が衝接する。緩衝部303は、突起部319の接近方向(Y軸に沿う方向)と反対方向(-Y方向)に変位し、突起部319が衝接する際の衝撃を吸収する。また、緩衝部303は、突起部319の接近方向と反対方向に変位した後に、突起部319を弾性反発力により押し戻す。 According to the article transport system 211, the cushioning portion 303 is arranged on one of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269, and the protrusion 319 is arranged on the other side. In the second embodiment, the cushioning portion 303 is arranged on the docking base 115, and the protrusion 319 is arranged on the docking portion 269. The cushioning portion 303 is brought into contact with the protruding portion 319 when the docking portion 269 approaches. The cushioning portion 303 is displaced in a direction (−Y direction) opposite to the approaching direction (direction along the Y axis) of the protrusion 319, and absorbs the impact when the protrusion 319 collides. Further, the cushioning portion 303 is displaced in the direction opposite to the approaching direction of the protruding portion 319, and then pushes back the protruding portion 319 by the elastic rebound force.
 また、物品搬送システム211において、ドッキング保持部281は、ドッキングベース115またはドッキング部269の一方に配置され、他方にはドッキング保持部281に保持される少なくとも一つの被保持部材(フック285)が配置される。 Further, in the article transport system 211, the docking holding portion 281 is arranged on one of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269, and at least one held member (hook 285) held by the docking holding portion 281 is arranged on the other side. Will be done.
 この物品搬送システム211によれば、ドッキングベース115またはドッキング部269の一方にドッキング保持部281が配置され、他方に被保持部材が配置される。実施の形態2において、ドッキング保持部281はドッキングベース115に配置され、被保持部材はドッキング部269に配置される。物品搬送装置209は、ドッキング部269がドッキングベース115に、Y軸に沿う方向からドッキングすると、被保持部材が、ドッキング部269に保持される。上記の突起部319は、緩衝部303を押圧することにより、緩衝部303からの反力を受ける。反力は、ドッキング部269をドッキングベース115から離反する方向に押圧するが、被保持部材がドッキング保持部281に保持されたドッキング部269はドッキングベース115からのドッキング解除が規制される。これにより、物品搬送装置209は、製造設備に対してがたつきが生じることなく、Y軸に沿う方向で、位置が調整される。 According to the article transport system 211, the docking holding portion 281 is arranged on one of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269, and the held member is arranged on the other. In the second embodiment, the docking holding portion 281 is arranged on the docking base 115, and the held member is arranged on the docking portion 269. In the article transfer device 209, when the docking portion 269 is docked to the docking base 115 from the direction along the Y axis, the held member is held by the docking portion 269. The protrusion 319 receives a reaction force from the cushioning portion 303 by pressing the cushioning portion 303. The reaction force presses the docking portion 269 in a direction away from the docking base 115, but the docking portion 269 in which the held member is held by the docking holding portion 281 is restricted from being docked from the docking base 115. As a result, the position of the article transfer device 209 is adjusted in the direction along the Y axis without causing rattling with respect to the manufacturing equipment.
 また、物品搬送システム211において、ドッキング保持部281は、第1の方向(Y軸に沿う方向)に対して交差する第3の方向から被保持部材(例えばフック285)に当接するドッキング用ローラ331を有するレバー323と、レバー323を旋回させてドッキング用ローラ331を被保持部材に押し付ける保持力発生部325を含み、被保持部材は、物品搬送装置209が第1の方向に移動して製造設備へ接近に伴ってドッキング用ローラ331を第3の方向とは反対の方向に変位させた後第3の方向へ変位させるローラ操作面(例えば後テーパ337)を有する。 Further, in the article transport system 211, the docking holding portion 281 abuts on the held member (for example, hook 285) from a third direction intersecting with the first direction (direction along the Y axis). The held member includes a holding force generating portion 325 that swivels the lever 323 and presses the docking roller 331 against the held member, and the held member is manufactured by moving the article transporting device 209 in the first direction. It has a roller operating surface (for example, a rear taper 337) that displaces the docking roller 331 in a direction opposite to the third direction and then displaces it in a third direction as it approaches.
 この物品搬送システム211によれば、物品搬送装置209が製造設備に接近すると、製造設備に設けられているドッキング用ローラ331が、物品搬送装置209のフック285に第3の方向から当接する。ドッキング用ローラ331は、レバー323に支持される。レバー323は、保持力発生部325によりドッキング用ローラ331をレバー323に押し付ける。フック285は、ドッキング用ローラ331に当接すると、ドッキング用ローラ331を第3の方向とは反対の方向に変位させる。第3の方向とは反対の方向に変位したドッキング用ローラ331は、さらにフック285が製造設備に接近すると、フック285の有するローラ操作面(例えば後テーパ337)に到達し、保持力発生部325の付勢力により再び第3の方向へ変位する。 According to the article transport system 211, when the article transport device 209 approaches the manufacturing facility, the docking roller 331 provided in the manufacturing facility abuts on the hook 285 of the article transport device 209 from the third direction. The docking roller 331 is supported by the lever 323. The lever 323 presses the docking roller 331 against the lever 323 by the holding force generating portion 325. When the hook 285 comes into contact with the docking roller 331, the hook 285 displaces the docking roller 331 in a direction opposite to the third direction. When the hook 285 further approaches the manufacturing equipment, the docking roller 331 displaced in the direction opposite to the third direction reaches the roller operation surface (for example, the rear taper 337) of the hook 285, and the holding force generating portion 325. It is displaced in the third direction again by the urging force of.
 また、物品搬送システム211において、コネクタ連結部305は、ドッキングベース115またはドッキング部269の一方に配置されたコネクタ位置調整機構289と、他方に配置されたアライメント部材を含み、コネクタ位置調整機構289は、他方のコネクタ287とともに昇降し、アライメント部材(カムフォロア295)に接触しながら第1の方向(Y軸に沿う方向)へ移動することでアライメント部材によって高さ位置が調整される昇降部材291を有する。 Further, in the article transport system 211, the connector connecting portion 305 includes a connector position adjusting mechanism 289 arranged on one of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269 and an alignment member arranged on the other, and the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 includes. It has an elevating member 291 whose height position is adjusted by the alignment member by moving up and down together with the other connector 287 and moving in the first direction (direction along the Y axis) while contacting the alignment member (cam follower 295). ..
 この物品搬送システム211によれば、コネクタ位置調整機構289が、昇降部材291を有する。昇降部材291は、コネクタ位置調整機構289がY軸に沿う方向へ移動しながらアライメント部材に接触することで上下方向に移動する。つまり、昇降部材291に設けられた他方のコネクタ287も上下方向に移動する。実施の形態2では、コネクタ位置調整機構289とアライメント部材がドッキング部269に設けられている。これにより、他方のコネクタ287は、ドッキング部269がドッキングベース115に向かって接近することにより、昇降部材291と共に上下方向に移動し、ドッキングベース115の一方のコネクタ117に対して上下方向の位置が自動的に調整されることになる。 According to this article transport system 211, the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 has an elevating member 291. The elevating member 291 moves in the vertical direction when the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 moves in the direction along the Y axis and comes into contact with the alignment member. That is, the other connector 287 provided on the elevating member 291 also moves in the vertical direction. In the second embodiment, the connector position adjusting mechanism 289 and the alignment member are provided on the docking portion 269. As a result, the other connector 287 moves in the vertical direction together with the elevating member 291 as the docking portion 269 approaches the docking base 115, and the position in the vertical direction with respect to one connector 117 of the docking base 115 is set. It will be adjusted automatically.
 また、物品搬送システム211において、コネクタ連結部305は、ドッキングベース115またはドッキング部269の一方に配置され、一方に配置された一方のコネクタ117を他方のコネクタ287に押し付けるコネクタ押し付け部339を含む。 Further, in the article transport system 211, the connector connecting portion 305 includes a connector pressing portion 339 which is arranged on one of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269 and presses one of the arranged connectors 117 against the other connector 287.
 この物品搬送システム211によれば、コネクタ連結部305が、コネクタ押し付け部339を有する。コネクタ押し付け部339は、ドッキングベース115またはドッキング部269の一方に配置され、ドッキングベース115またはドッキング部269の一方に配置された一方のコネクタ117を他方のコネクタ287に押し付ける。実施の形態2においては、コネクタ押し付け部339がドッキング部269に配置される。したがって、ドッキング部269に設けられたコネクタ押し付け部339は、ドッキング部269に設けられる他方のコネクタ287を、ドッキングベース115に設けられる一方のコネクタ117(図35参照)に押し付ける。一方のコネクタ117と他方のコネクタ287は、結合方向に付勢されることにより、端子同士が安定した接触状態に保たれる。 According to this article transport system 211, the connector connecting portion 305 has a connector pressing portion 339. The connector pressing portion 339 is arranged on one of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269, and one connector 117 arranged on one of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269 is pressed against the other connector 287. In the second embodiment, the connector pressing portion 339 is arranged on the docking portion 269. Therefore, the connector pressing portion 339 provided on the docking portion 269 presses the other connector 287 provided on the docking portion 269 against the one connector 117 (see FIG. 35) provided on the docking base 115. The one connector 117 and the other connector 287 are urged in the coupling direction, so that the terminals are kept in a stable contact state.
 また、物品搬送システム211において、ドッキングベース115またはドッキング部269の一方に第1の方向(Y軸に沿う方向)に突出した少なくとも一つの位置決めピン279を設け、他方に第1の方向から位置決めピン279が挿入される少なくとも一つの位置決めピンガイド穴273を有する位置決めピンガイド部材275を設ける。 Further, in the article transport system 211, at least one positioning pin 279 protruding in the first direction (direction along the Y axis) is provided on one of the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269, and the other is provided with the positioning pin from the first direction. A positioning pin guide member 275 having at least one positioning pin guide hole 273 into which the 279 is inserted is provided.
 この物品搬送システム211によれば、ドッキングベース115またはドッキング部269の一方に位置決めピン279を有し、ドッキングベース115またはドッキング部269の他方に位置決めピンガイド部材275を有する。実施の形態2においては、位置決めピン279がドッキング部269に配置され、位置決めピンガイド部材275がドッキングベース115に配置される。位置決めピンガイド部材275は、第1の方向から位置決めピン279が挿入される少なくとも一つの位置決めピンガイド穴273を有する。ドッキング部269は、位置決めピン279が位置決めピンガイド穴273に挿入されることにより、ドッキングベース115に対してX軸に沿う方向に位置調整される。 According to the article transport system 211, the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269 has a positioning pin 279, and the docking base 115 or the docking portion 269 has a positioning pin guide member 275 on the other side. In the second embodiment, the positioning pin 279 is arranged in the docking portion 269, and the positioning pin guide member 275 is arranged in the docking base 115. The positioning pin guide member 275 has at least one positioning pin guide hole 273 into which the positioning pin 279 is inserted from the first direction. The docking portion 269 is positioned along the X axis with respect to the docking base 115 by inserting the positioning pin 279 into the positioning pin guide hole 273.
 また、物品搬送システム211は、工場フロアに設置された少なくとも一つの製造設備と工場フロアを移動する少なくとも一つの物品搬送装置209を含み、製造設備(例えばトレイ部品ストック装置29)と物品搬送装置209との間で物品(例えばパレット39)を搬送する。物品搬送システム211は、少なくとも一つの物品を収納可能な物品収納体(例えばマガジン41)と、製造設備に設けられ、物品収納体を平面投影した領域の一部である第1領域内に位置する物品収納体の複数の部分を下から支持する第1支持テーブル(例えばスライドテーブル127)と、物品搬送装置209に設けられ、平面投影領域の他の一部であって第1領域とは重ならない第2領域内に位置する物品収納体の他の複数の部分を下から支持する第2支持テーブル(例えば第1のマガジン保持テーブル225、第2のマガジン保持テーブル227)と、物品収納体を支持した第1支持テーブルを空きの第2支持テーブルに向って移動させることにより物品収納体の第2領域を第2支持テーブルの上方に位置させる、あるいは、空きの第1支持テーブルを第2支持テーブルに向って移動させることにより第1支持テーブルを第2支持テーブルに支持された物品収納体の第2領域の下方に位置させる第1支持テーブル移動装置(進退駆動部129)と、第2支持テーブルを第1支持テーブルよりも低い位置から高い位置に移動させることにより第1支持テーブルに支持された物品収納体を第2支持テーブルに受け渡す、あるいは、第2支持テーブルを第1支持テーブルよりも高い位置から低い位置に移動させることにより第2支持テーブルに支持された物品収納体を第1支持テーブルに受け渡すラック昇降装置229と、を備える。 Further, the article transfer system 211 includes at least one manufacturing facility installed on the factory floor and at least one article transfer device 209 moving on the factory floor, and includes a manufacturing facility (for example, a tray parts stock device 29) and an article transfer device 209. An article (eg, pallet 39) is transported to and from. The article transport system 211 is located in an article storage body (for example, a magazine 41) capable of storing at least one article and a first region provided in the manufacturing facility and which is a part of a plan-projected region of the article storage body. A first support table (for example, a slide table 127) that supports a plurality of parts of the article storage body from below, and another part of the plane projection area, which is provided on the article transfer device 209 and does not overlap with the first area. A second support table (for example, a first magazine holding table 225, a second magazine holding table 227) that supports other plurality of parts of the article storage body located in the second region from below, and an article storage body are supported. The second area of the article storage body is positioned above the second support table by moving the first support table to the empty second support table, or the empty first support table is moved to the second support table. A first support table moving device (advance / retreat drive unit 129) and a second support table that position the first support table below the second region of the article storage body supported by the second support table by moving toward. Is transferred from a position lower than the first support table to a higher position to deliver the article storage body supported by the first support table to the second support table, or the second support table is transferred from the first support table. It is provided with a rack elevating device 229 that transfers an article storage body supported by the second support table to the first support table by moving it from a high position to a low position.
 この物品搬送システム211によれば、製造設備が、水平面内で進退移動する第1支持テーブルを有する。物品搬送装置209は、水平面に直交する方向に昇降する第2支持テーブルを有する。これら第1支持テーブルと第2支持テーブルとは、第1支持テーブルが物品搬送装置内に進出した状態で、一つの平面投影領域内に配置される。一つの平面投影領域内に配置された第1支持テーブルは、第1領域内に位置する。一つの平面投影領域内に配置された第2支持テーブルは、第1領域とは重ならない第2領域内に位置する。 According to this article transport system 211, the manufacturing equipment has a first support table that moves back and forth in the horizontal plane. The article transfer device 209 has a second support table that moves up and down in a direction orthogonal to the horizontal plane. The first support table and the second support table are arranged in one plane projection region in a state where the first support table is advanced into the article transport device. The first support table arranged in one plane projection area is located in the first area. The second support table arranged in one plane projection area is located in the second area which does not overlap with the first area.
 つまり、第2支持テーブルは、物品搬送装置内に第1支持テーブルが進入している状態において、ラック昇降装置229が駆動されることにより第1支持テーブルに対して上下方向へ相対移動が可能となる。より具体的には、第2支持テーブルは、スライドテーブル通過空間359を有したコ字状に形成されている。第2支持テーブルは、このスライドテーブル通過空間359に第1支持テーブルを上下方向から通過(すれ違い)させる。 That is, the second support table can move up and down relative to the first support table by driving the rack elevating device 229 while the first support table is in the article transport device. Become. More specifically, the second support table is formed in a U shape having a slide table passage space 359. The second support table allows the slide table passage space 359 to pass (pass) the first support table from above and below.
 物品搬送システム211は、ラック昇降装置229により第2支持テーブルを昇降させることにより、第2支持テーブルのスライドテーブル通過空間359に第1支持テーブルを通過させることにより、第1支持テーブルに載置されたマガジン41を第2支持テーブルに受け渡しが可能となる。また、第2支持テーブルに載置されたマガジン41を第1支持テーブルに受け渡しが可能となる。 The article transfer system 211 is mounted on the first support table by raising and lowering the second support table by the rack elevating device 229 and passing the first support table through the slide table passage space 359 of the second support table. The magazine 41 can be delivered to the second support table. Further, the magazine 41 placed on the second support table can be delivered to the first support table.
 これにより、製造設備は、スライドテーブル127を水平面内で進退させる必要最小限の進退駆動部129のみを備えればよいことになる。また、物品搬送装置209も、第1支持テーブルを昇降させる必要最小限のラック昇降装置229のみを備えればよいことになる。また、物品搬送システム211は、物品搬送装置209にラック昇降装置229を設けたので、積載物(例えばマガジン41)の荷重が水平面内で移動しない。これにより、物品搬送装置209は、水平面内で積載物を移動させるロボットアームやクレーンを採用するのに比べ、小面積のベース部217で転倒を抑制して走行させることができる。すなわち、物品搬送装置209のコンパクト化を実現できる。 As a result, the manufacturing equipment needs only be provided with the minimum necessary advance / retreat drive unit 129 for advancing / retreating the slide table 127 in the horizontal plane. Further, the article transporting device 209 also needs to be provided with only the minimum required rack lifting device 229 for raising and lowering the first support table. Further, in the article transport system 211, since the rack lifting device 229 is provided in the article transport device 209, the load of the load (for example, the magazine 41) does not move in the horizontal plane. As a result, the article transporting device 209 can be driven by suppressing the fall with the base portion 217 having a small area, as compared with the case where the robot arm or the crane that moves the load in the horizontal plane is adopted. That is, the article transport device 209 can be made compact.
 その結果、物品搬送システム211によれば、単純な機構を用いて製造設備と無人搬送車(例えば物品搬送装置209)との間におけるマガジン41の受け渡しが行える。また、物品搬送システム211は、物品搬送システム211が受け渡しの機構としてラック昇降装置229のみを備えければよいので、ロボットアームやクレーンなどの高価で複雑な装置を使用するシステムに比べ、大幅な小型化が可能となる。 As a result, according to the article transport system 211, the magazine 41 can be delivered between the manufacturing equipment and the automatic guided vehicle (for example, the article transport device 209) by using a simple mechanism. Further, since the article transfer system 211 only needs to be provided with the rack lifting device 229 as the transfer mechanism, the article transfer system 211 is significantly smaller than a system using an expensive and complicated device such as a robot arm or a crane. It becomes possible to change.
 また、物品搬送システム211において、物品収納体(例えばマガジン41)は、第1領域F1内に複数の第1アライメント部(例えば第1アライメントグループ103)を有するとともに第2領域F2内に複数の第2アライメント部(例えば第2アライメントグループ107)を有し、第1支持テーブル(例えばスライドテーブル127)は、複数の第1アライメント部に接触して物品収納体の第1支持テーブルに対する位置を調整する複数の第1アライメントガイド363を有し、第2支持テーブル(例えば第1のマガジン保持テーブル225、第2のマガジン保持テーブル227)は、複数の第2アライメント部に接触して物品収納体の第2支持テーブルに対する位置を調整する複数の第2アライメントガイド361を有する。 Further, in the article transport system 211, the article accommodating body (for example, the magazine 41) has a plurality of first alignment portions (for example, the first alignment group 103) in the first region F1 and a plurality of first alignment portions in the second region F2. It has two alignment portions (for example, a second alignment group 107), and a first support table (for example, a slide table 127) contacts a plurality of first alignment portions to adjust the position of the article storage body with respect to the first support table. The second support table (for example, the first magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227) has a plurality of first alignment guides 363 and comes into contact with the plurality of second alignment portions to make the article storage body first. 2 It has a plurality of second alignment guides 361 for adjusting the position with respect to the support table.
 この物品搬送システム211によれば、スライドテーブル127が、複数の第1アライメントガイド363を有する。複数の第1アライメントガイド363は、複数の第1アライメント部に接触してマガジン41のスライドテーブル127に対する位置を調整する。第2支持テーブルは、複数の第2アライメントガイド361を有する。第2アライメントガイド361は、複数の第2アライメント部に接触してマガジン41の第2支持テーブルに対する位置を調整する。これにより、マガジン41は、スライドテーブル127にも位置が自動的に調整されて載置され、第2支持テーブルにも位置が自動的に調整されて載置される。 According to the article transport system 211, the slide table 127 has a plurality of first alignment guides 363. The plurality of first alignment guides 363 come into contact with the plurality of first alignment portions to adjust the position of the magazine 41 with respect to the slide table 127. The second support table has a plurality of second alignment guides 361. The second alignment guide 361 contacts the plurality of second alignment portions and adjusts the position of the magazine 41 with respect to the second support table. As a result, the position of the magazine 41 is automatically adjusted and placed on the slide table 127, and the position of the magazine 41 is automatically adjusted and placed on the second support table.
 また、物品搬送システム211は、複数の第1アライメントガイド363のうち少なくとも一つは、水平な第1方向(X軸に沿う方向)について物品収納体の位置を調整し、少なくとも他の一つは第1方向に水平面内で直交する第2方向(Y軸に沿う方向)について物品収納体の位置を調整し、複数の第2アライメントガイド361のうち少なくとも一つは、水平な第3方向について物品収納体の位置を調整し、少なくとも他の一つは第3方向に水平面内で直交する第4方向について物品収納体の位置を調整する。 Further, in the article transport system 211, at least one of the plurality of first alignment guides 363 adjusts the position of the article accommodating body in the horizontal first direction (direction along the X axis), and at least one of the other is. The position of the article storage body is adjusted in the second direction (direction along the Y axis) orthogonal to the first direction in the horizontal plane, and at least one of the plurality of second alignment guides 361 is the article in the horizontal third direction. The position of the housing is adjusted, and at least the other one adjusts the position of the article storage in the fourth direction orthogonal to the third direction in the horizontal plane.
 この物品搬送システム211によれば、第1アライメントガイド363が、図17に示す4つのXアライメントガイド181と、4つのYアライメントガイド187とを有する。第1アライメントガイド363のうち少なくとも一つ(Xアライメントガイド181)は、水平な第1方向(X軸に沿う方向)についてマガジン41の位置を、スライドテーブル127に対して調整する。第1アライメントガイド363のうち、少なくとも他の一つ(Yアライメントガイド187)は第1方向に水平面内で直交する第2方向(Y軸に沿う方向)についてマガジン41の位置を、スライドテーブル127に対して調整する。 According to the article transport system 211, the first alignment guide 363 has four X alignment guides 181 and four Y alignment guides 187 shown in FIG. At least one of the first alignment guides 363 (X alignment guide 181) adjusts the position of the magazine 41 with respect to the slide table 127 in the horizontal first direction (direction along the X axis). At least one of the first alignment guides 363 (Y alignment guide 187) positions the magazine 41 on the slide table 127 in the second direction (direction along the Y axis) orthogonal to the first direction in the horizontal plane. Adjust for.
 また、第2アライメントガイド361は、図42に示すように、Xアライメントローラ255と、Yアライメント部材259とを有する。複数の第2アライメントガイド361のうち少なくとも一つ(Xアライメントローラ93)は、水平な第3方向(例えばX軸に沿う方向)についてマガジン41の位置を、第1のマガジン保持テーブル225、第2のマガジン保持テーブル227に対して調整する。複数の第2アライメントガイド361のうち少なくとも他の一つ(Yアライメント部材259)は第3方向に水平面内で直交する第4方向(例えばY軸に沿う方向)についてマガジン41の位置を、第1のマガジン保持テーブル225、第2のマガジン保持テーブル227に対して調整する。 Further, as shown in FIG. 42, the second alignment guide 361 has an X alignment roller 255 and a Y alignment member 259. At least one of the plurality of second alignment guides 361 (X alignment roller 93) positions the magazine 41 in a horizontal third direction (for example, a direction along the X axis), the first magazine holding table 225, and the second. Adjust with respect to the magazine holding table 227. At least one of the plurality of second alignment guides 361 (Y alignment member 259) positions the magazine 41 in a fourth direction (for example, a direction along the Y axis) orthogonal to the third direction in the horizontal plane. The magazine holding table 225 and the second magazine holding table 227 are adjusted.
 また、物品搬送システム211において、物品は部品33を収納したトレイ31を保持したパレット39であり、物品収納体は複数のパレット39を収納するマガジン41である。 Further, in the article transport system 211, the article is a pallet 39 holding a tray 31 containing the parts 33, and the article storage body is a magazine 41 storing a plurality of pallets 39.
 この物品搬送システム211によれば、物品が、複数の部品33(例えば基板実装部品等)を収納したトレイ31を保持したパレット39となる。物品収納体は、複数のパレット39を収納したマガジン41となる。したがって、マガジン41には、多数の部品33が収容される。物品搬送システム211は、この多数の物品を、マガジン単位で受け渡しする。すなわち、物品搬送システム211は、マガジン単位での物品の供給を可能にしつつ、マガジン41の回収も可能にしている。 According to the article transport system 211, the article is a pallet 39 holding a tray 31 containing a plurality of components 33 (for example, board-mounted components). The article storage body is a magazine 41 that stores a plurality of pallets 39. Therefore, the magazine 41 accommodates a large number of parts 33. The article transport system 211 delivers this large number of articles in magazine units. That is, the article transport system 211 enables the supply of articles in magazine units and the collection of magazines 41.
 また、物品搬送システム211において、物品搬送装置209が、工場フロアを走行するための車輪215を有するベース部217を備え、ベース部217は、ベース部217が第1の方向へ移動して製造設備に接近することによって製造設備が有するドッキングベース115にドッキングするドッキング部269をさらに有する。 Further, in the article transport system 211, the article transport device 209 includes a base portion 217 having wheels 215 for traveling on the factory floor, and the base portion 217 is a manufacturing facility in which the base portion 217 moves in the first direction. Further has a docking section 269 that docks to the docking base 115 of the manufacturing equipment by approaching.
 この物品搬送システム211によれば、物品搬送装置209がドッキング部269を備える。ドッキング部269は、製造設備が有するドッキングベース115にドッキングが可能となる。これにより、物品搬送システム211は、ラック昇降装置229を備える物品搬送装置209と、スライドテーブル127を備える製造設備とが、ドッキング装置299により高精度に位置調整された状態となるので、単純な機構を用いて製造設備と無人搬送車(物品搬送装置209)との間におけるマガジン41の受け渡しが行える。 According to the article transfer system 211, the article transfer device 209 includes a docking unit 269. The docking unit 269 can be docked to the docking base 115 of the manufacturing equipment. As a result, the article transport system 211 is a simple mechanism because the article transport device 209 provided with the rack lifting device 229 and the manufacturing equipment provided with the slide table 127 are positioned with high accuracy by the docking device 299. The magazine 41 can be delivered between the manufacturing equipment and the automatic guided vehicle (article transport device 209).
 また、物品搬送装置209は、工場フロアに設置された少なくとも一つの製造設備(トレイ部品ストック装置29)で使用する物品(パレット39)を工場フロア上で搬送する物品搬送装置209であって、工場フロアを走行するための車輪215を有するベース部217と、ベース部217を製造設備にドッキングさせるドッキング部269と、ベース部217に対して昇降可能であり、物品収納体(マガジン41)を保持する保持テーブル(第1のマガジン保持テーブル225、第2のマガジン保持テーブル227)を少なくとも一つ有する収納ラック(マガジン収納ラック223)と、収納ラックを昇降させるラック昇降装置229と、収納ラックの高さ方向の位置を検出する位置検出部(エンコーダ387)と、収納ラックとともに昇降して製造設備に設けた基準点(基準高さ標識417の穴419)を検出する基準高さ検出部(基準高さ検出センサ251)と、ドッキング部269によってベース部217が製造設備にドッキングした状態でラック昇降装置229を作動させて基準点を基準高さ検出部で検出し、基準高さ検出部が基準点を検出したときに位置検出部で得られた位置を基準高さに設定し、基準高さに基づいてラック昇降装置229を作動させて保持テーブルと製造設備との間で物品収納体の受け渡し作業を実行する制御部(マガジン搬送装置制御部247)と、を備える。 Further, the article transport device 209 is an article transport device 209 that transports articles (pallets 39) used in at least one manufacturing facility (tray parts stock device 29) installed on the factory floor on the factory floor. It can be raised and lowered with respect to the base portion 217 having wheels 215 for traveling on the floor, the docking portion 269 for docking the base portion 217 to the manufacturing equipment, and the base portion 217, and holds the article storage body (magazine 41). A storage rack (magazine storage rack 223) having at least one holding table (first magazine holding table 225, second magazine holding table 227), a rack elevating device 229 for raising and lowering the storage rack, and the height of the storage rack. A position detection unit (encoder 387) that detects the position in the direction, and a reference height detection unit (reference height) that detects a reference point (hole 419 of the reference height marker 417) provided in the manufacturing equipment by moving up and down together with the storage rack. The rack elevating device 229 is operated with the base unit 217 docked to the manufacturing equipment by the detection sensor 251) and the docking unit 269 to detect the reference point by the reference height detection unit, and the reference height detection unit detects the reference point. The position obtained by the position detection unit at the time of detection is set to the reference height, and the rack elevating device 229 is operated based on the reference height to transfer the article storage body between the holding table and the manufacturing equipment. It includes a control unit (magazine transfer device control unit 247) for execution.
 この物品搬送装置209によれば、製造設備に対してベース部217が、ドッキング部269によりドッキングされる。物品搬送装置209は、ベース部217に設けた車輪215により、工場フロアの通路15を自在に走行が可能となる。工場フロアを走行して製造設備に到着した物品搬送装置209は、ドッキング部269によりドッキングすることにより、製造設備と一体に連結される。 According to this article transfer device 209, the base unit 217 is docked to the manufacturing equipment by the docking unit 269. The article transfer device 209 can freely travel in the passage 15 on the factory floor by the wheels 215 provided on the base portion 217. The article transport device 209 that travels on the factory floor and arrives at the manufacturing equipment is integrally connected to the manufacturing equipment by docking with the docking unit 269.
 物品搬送装置209は、マガジン41を保持テーブルに保持する収納ラックを備える。収納ラックは、保持テーブルにマガジン41を保持した状態で、ラック昇降装置229の駆動により昇降が可能となる。物品搬送装置209は、昇降する収納ラックの高さ方向の位置を検出する位置検出部を有する。また、物品搬送装置209は、製造設備に設けた基準点を検出する基準高さ設定部397を備える。 The article transfer device 209 includes a storage rack for holding the magazine 41 on the holding table. The storage rack can be raised and lowered by driving the rack raising and lowering device 229 while holding the magazine 41 on the holding table. The article transfer device 209 has a position detection unit that detects a position in the height direction of the storage rack that moves up and down. Further, the article transfer device 209 includes a reference height setting unit 397 for detecting a reference point provided in the manufacturing equipment.
 物品搬送装置209は、ドッキング部269によってベース部217が製造設備にドッキングした状態で、ラック昇降装置229を作動させて基準点を基準高さ検出部で検出する制御部を備える。制御部は、基準高さ検出部が基準点を検出したときに、位置検出部で得られた位置を基準高さに設定する。制御部は、基準高さに基づいてラック昇降装置229を所定の高さ(第1レベルLv1~第4レベルLv4)に作動させて、保持テーブルと製造設備との間で物品収納体の受け渡し作業を実行する。 The article transfer device 209 includes a control unit that operates the rack elevating device 229 and detects a reference point by the reference height detection unit in a state where the base unit 217 is docked to the manufacturing equipment by the docking unit 269. The control unit sets the position obtained by the position detection unit to the reference height when the reference height detection unit detects the reference point. The control unit operates the rack elevating device 229 to a predetermined height (1st level Lv1 to 4th level Lv4) based on the reference height, and transfers the article storage body between the holding table and the manufacturing equipment. To execute.
 これにより、物品搬送装置209は、必ずしも同一平面上で位置していない製造設備と物品搬送装置209とを先ずドッキング部269により水平面内で位置あわせした後、製造設備との高さ方向の相対位置を基準高さとして求めることができる。その結果、単純な機構を用いて製造設備と無人搬送車(物品搬送装置209)との間におけるマガジン41の受け渡し高さを調整することができる。 As a result, in the article transport device 209, the manufacturing equipment and the article transport device 209, which are not necessarily located on the same plane, are first aligned in the horizontal plane by the docking unit 269, and then the relative position in the height direction with the manufacturing equipment. Can be obtained as the reference height. As a result, the delivery height of the magazine 41 can be adjusted between the manufacturing equipment and the automatic guided vehicle (article transfer device 209) by using a simple mechanism.
 また、物品搬送装置209において、製造設備は物品収納体を保持するとともに水平方向へ移動するスライドテーブル127を有しており、受け渡し作業は、保持テーブルと収納ラックの内部空間に突出したスライドテーブル127との間で物品収納体を受け渡す作業であり、制御部(マガジン搬送装置制御部247)は、保持テーブルをスライドテーブル127よりも低い第1レベルLv1とスライドテーブル127よりも高い第2レベルLv2に位置させる位置決め高さを基準高さに基づいて求め、物品収納体をスライドテーブル127から保持テーブルへ受け渡す場合はラック昇降装置229によって収納ラックを第1レベルから第2レベルへ移動させ、保持テーブルからスライドテーブル127へ受け渡す場合はラック昇降装置229によって収納ラックを第2レベルから第1レベルへ移動させる。 Further, in the article transport device 209, the manufacturing equipment has a slide table 127 that holds the article storage body and moves in the horizontal direction, and the delivery work is performed by the slide table 127 projecting into the internal space of the holding table and the storage rack. The control unit (magazine transfer device control unit 247) transfers the holding table to and from the first level Lv1 lower than the slide table 127 and the second level Lv2 higher than the slide table 127. When the positioning height to be positioned is determined based on the reference height and the article storage body is transferred from the slide table 127 to the holding table, the storage rack is moved from the first level to the second level by the rack lifting device 229 and held. When handing over from the table to the slide table 127, the storage rack is moved from the second level to the first level by the rack elevating device 229.
 この物品搬送装置209によれば、製造設備が、マガジン41を保持するスライドテーブル127を備える。スライドテーブル127は、物品搬送装置209に設けられる収納ラックの内部空間に進退可能となる。マガジン41の受け渡しは、この内部空間に突出したスライドテーブル127と、収納ラックの保持テーブルとの間で行われる。スライドテーブル127から保持テーブルへの受け渡しは、収納ラックを第1レベルから第2レベルへ移動させることにより行うことができる。保持テーブルからスライドテーブル127への受け渡しは、収納ラックを第2レベルから第1レベルへ移動させることにより行うことができる。これら受け渡しの際に設定される保持テーブルの高さ(例えば第1レベルLv1、第2レベルLv2)は、制御部により求められる。 According to this article transfer device 209, the manufacturing equipment includes a slide table 127 for holding the magazine 41. The slide table 127 can move forward and backward into the internal space of the storage rack provided in the article transport device 209. The magazine 41 is delivered between the slide table 127 protruding into the internal space and the holding table of the storage rack. The transfer from the slide table 127 to the holding table can be performed by moving the storage rack from the first level to the second level. The transfer from the holding table to the slide table 127 can be performed by moving the storage rack from the second level to the first level. The height of the holding table (for example, the first level Lv1 and the second level Lv2) set at the time of these delivery is obtained by the control unit.
 また、物品搬送装置209は、工場フロアに設置された少なくとも一つの製造設備(例えばトレイ部品ストック装置29)で使用する物品(例えばパレット39)を工場フロア上で搬送する物品搬送装置209であって、少なくとも一つの物品を収納する物品収納体(例えばマガジン41)と、工場フロアを走行するための車輪215を有するベース部217と、ベース部217を製造設備にドッキングさせるドッキング部269と、ベース部217に対して昇降可能であり、物品収納体を保持する保持テーブル(例えば第1のマガジン保持テーブル225、第2のマガジン保持テーブル227)を少なくとも一つ有する収納ラック(例えばマガジン収納ラック223)と、収納ラックを昇降させるラック昇降装置229と、収納ラックの高さ方向の位置を検出する位置検出部(例えばエンコーダ387)と、収納ラックとともに昇降して製造設備に設けた基準点を検出する基準高さ検出部(例えば基準高さ検出センサ251)と、位置検出部と基準高さ検出部に接続されるとともにラック昇降装置229を制御する制御部(例えばマガジン搬送装置制御部247)を備え、制御部は、ドッキング部269によってベース部217が製造設備にドッキングした状態でラック昇降装置229を作動させて基準点を基準高さ検出部で検出し、基準高さ検出部が基準点を検出したときに位置検出部で得られた位置を基準高さに設定する基準高さ設定部397と、基準高さに基づいて製造設備との間で物品収納体の受け渡し作業を行うための収納ラックの複数の位置決め高さを算出する位置決め高さ算出部399と、複数の位置決め高さに基づいてラック昇降装置229を制御して受け渡し作業を実行する受渡作業実行部(例えば第1搬入部401、第1搬出部403)と、を有する。 Further, the article transport device 209 is an article transport device 209 that transports articles (for example, pallets 39) used in at least one manufacturing facility (for example, tray parts stock device 29) installed on the factory floor on the factory floor. , An article storage body (for example, a magazine 41) for storing at least one article, a base portion 217 having wheels 215 for traveling on the factory floor, a docking portion 269 for docking the base portion 217 to a manufacturing facility, and a base portion. With a storage rack (for example, magazine storage rack 223) that can be raised and lowered with respect to 217 and has at least one holding table (for example, a first magazine holding table 225 and a second magazine holding table 227) for holding an article storage body. , A rack lifting device 229 that raises and lowers the storage rack, a position detection unit (for example, encoder 387) that detects the position of the storage rack in the height direction, and a reference that moves up and down together with the storage rack to detect a reference point provided in the manufacturing equipment. A height detection unit (for example, a reference height detection sensor 251) and a control unit (for example, a magazine transfer device control unit 247) that is connected to the position detection unit and the reference height detection unit and controls the rack elevating device 229 are provided. The control unit operates the rack elevating device 229 with the base unit 217 docked to the manufacturing equipment by the docking unit 269 to detect the reference point by the reference height detection unit, and the reference height detection unit detects the reference point. A storage rack for transferring an article storage body between the reference height setting unit 397, which sometimes sets the position obtained by the position detection unit to the reference height, and the manufacturing equipment based on the reference height. The positioning height calculation unit 399 that calculates a plurality of positioning heights, and the delivery work execution unit (for example, the first carry-in unit 401, the first carry-in unit 401, No. 1) that controls the rack elevating device 229 based on the plurality of positioning heights to execute the delivery work. 1 Carrying out unit 403) and.
 この物品搬送装置209によれば、製造設備に対してベース部217が、ドッキング部269によりドッキングされる。物品搬送装置209は、ベース部217に設けた車輪215により、工場フロアの通路15を自在に走行が可能となる。工場フロアを走行して製造設備に到着した物品搬送装置209は、ドッキング部269によりドッキングすることにより、製造設備と一体に連結される。 According to this article transfer device 209, the base unit 217 is docked to the manufacturing equipment by the docking unit 269. The article transfer device 209 can freely travel in the passage 15 on the factory floor by the wheels 215 provided on the base portion 217. The article transport device 209 that travels on the factory floor and arrives at the manufacturing equipment is integrally connected to the manufacturing equipment by docking with the docking unit 269.
 物品搬送装置209は、マガジン41を保持テーブルに保持する収納ラックを備える。収納ラックは、保持テーブルにマガジン41を保持した状態で、ラック昇降装置229の駆動により昇降が可能となる。物品搬送装置209は、昇降する収納ラックの高さ方向の位置を検出する位置検出部を有する。また、物品搬送装置209は、製造設備に設けた基準点を検出する基準高さ設定部397を備える。物品搬送装置209は、基準高さ設定部397が設定した基準高さに基づいて、製造設備との間で物品収納体の受け渡し作業を行うための収納ラックの複数の位置決め高さ(例えば第1レベルLv1~第4レベルLv4)が、位置決め高さ算出部399により算出される。物品搬送装置209では、ラック昇降装置229が受渡作業実行部により制御され、複数の位置決め高さでマガジン41の受け渡し作業が実行される。 The article transfer device 209 includes a storage rack for holding the magazine 41 on the holding table. The storage rack can be raised and lowered by driving the rack raising and lowering device 229 while holding the magazine 41 on the holding table. The article transfer device 209 has a position detection unit that detects a position in the height direction of the storage rack that moves up and down. Further, the article transfer device 209 includes a reference height setting unit 397 for detecting a reference point provided in the manufacturing equipment. The article transfer device 209 has a plurality of positioning heights (for example, first) of the storage rack for transferring the article storage body to and from the manufacturing equipment based on the reference height set by the reference height setting unit 397. Level Lv1 to 4th level Lv4) are calculated by the positioning height calculation unit 399. In the article transfer device 209, the rack elevating device 229 is controlled by the delivery work execution unit, and the delivery work of the magazine 41 is executed at a plurality of positioning heights.
 これにより、物品搬送装置209は、必ずしも同一平面上で位置していない製造設備と物品搬送装置209とを先ずドッキング部269により水平面内で位置合わせした後、製造設備との高さ方向の相対位置を基準高さとして求めることができる。その結果、単純な機構を用いて製造設備と無人搬送車(例えば物品搬送装置209)との間におけるマガジン41の受け渡し高さを調整することができる。 As a result, the article transporting device 209 first aligns the manufacturing equipment and the article transporting device 209, which are not necessarily located on the same plane, in the horizontal plane by the docking unit 269, and then positions relative to the manufacturing equipment in the height direction. Can be obtained as the reference height. As a result, the delivery height of the magazine 41 can be adjusted between the manufacturing equipment and the automatic guided vehicle (for example, the article transfer device 209) by using a simple mechanism.
 また、物品搬送装置209において、製造設備は物品収納体を保持するとともに水平方向へ移動するスライドテーブル127を有しており、受け渡し作業は、保持テーブルと収納ラックの内部空間に突出したスライドテーブル127との間で物品収納体を受け渡す作業であり、位置決め高さ算出部399は、少なくとも保持テーブルをスライドテーブル127よりも低い第1レベル(例えば第1レベルLv1)とスライドテーブル127よりも高い第2レベル(例えば第2レベルLv2)に位置させる位置決め高さを求め、受渡作業実行部は、ラック昇降装置229によって収納ラックを第1レベルから第2レベルへ移動させて物品収納体をスライドテーブル127から保持テーブルへ受け渡す搬入部(例えば第1搬入部401)と、ラック昇降装置229によって収納ラックを第2レベルから第1レベルへ移動させて物品収納体を保持テーブルからスライドテーブル127へ受け渡す搬出部(例えば第1搬出部403)とを含む。 Further, in the article transport device 209, the manufacturing equipment has a slide table 127 that holds the article storage body and moves in the horizontal direction, and the delivery work is performed by the slide table 127 projecting into the internal space of the holding table and the storage rack. It is a work of handing over the article storage body to and from, and the positioning height calculation unit 399 at least holds the holding table at the first level lower than the slide table 127 (for example, the first level Lv1) and higher than the slide table 127. Obtaining the positioning height to be positioned at the second level (for example, the second level Lv2), the delivery work execution unit moves the storage rack from the first level to the second level by the rack elevating device 229, and slides the article storage body 127. The storage rack is moved from the second level to the first level by the loading unit (for example, the first loading unit 401) to be delivered from the holding table to the holding table, and the storage rack is transferred from the holding table to the slide table 127 by the rack elevating device 229. It includes a carry-out unit (for example, a first carry-out unit 403).
 この物品搬送装置209によれば、製造設備が、マガジン41を保持するスライドテーブル127を備える。スライドテーブル127は、物品搬送装置209に設けられる収納ラックの内部空間に進退可能となる。マガジン41の受け渡しは、この内部空間に突出したスライドテーブル127と、収納ラックの保持テーブルとの間で行われる。スライドテーブル127から保持テーブルへの受け渡しは、収納ラックを第1レベルから第2レベルへ移動させることにより行うことができる。保持テーブルからスライドテーブル127への受け渡しは、収納ラックを第2レベルから第1レベルへ移動させることにより行うことができる。これら受け渡しの際に設定される保持テーブルの高さ(例えば第1レベルLv1、第2レベルLv2)は、制御部により求められる。この設定される保持テーブルの高さにより、搬入部が、保持テーブルにマガジン41を搬入する処理を実行し、搬出部が保持テーブルからマガジン41を搬出する処理を実行する。 According to this article transfer device 209, the manufacturing equipment includes a slide table 127 for holding the magazine 41. The slide table 127 can move forward and backward into the internal space of the storage rack provided in the article transport device 209. The magazine 41 is delivered between the slide table 127 protruding into the internal space and the holding table of the storage rack. The transfer from the slide table 127 to the holding table can be performed by moving the storage rack from the first level to the second level. The transfer from the holding table to the slide table 127 can be performed by moving the storage rack from the second level to the first level. The height of the holding table (for example, the first level Lv1 and the second level Lv2) set at the time of these delivery is obtained by the control unit. Depending on the height of the holding table to be set, the carrying-in unit executes a process of loading the magazine 41 into the holding table, and the carrying-out unit executes a process of carrying out the magazine 41 from the holding table.
 これにより、物品搬送装置209は、マガジン収納ラック223の内部空間に進入させたスライドテーブル127に対し、マガジン収納ラック223の保持テーブルを上下方向から通過(すれ違い)させ、スライドテーブル127と保持テーブルとの間でのマガジン41の受け渡しを単純な機構を用いて実現させている。 As a result, the article transport device 209 allows the slide table 127 that has entered the internal space of the magazine storage rack 223 to pass (pass) the holding table of the magazine storage rack 223 from above and below, and the slide table 127 and the holding table The transfer of the magazine 41 between the two is realized by using a simple mechanism.
 以上、図面を参照しながら各種の実施の形態について説明したが、本開示はかかる例に限定されないことは言うまでもない。当業者であれば、特許請求の範囲に記載された範疇内において、各種の変更例、修正例、置換例、付加例、削除例、均等例に想到し得ることは明らかであり、それらについても当然に本開示の技術的範囲に属するものと了解される。また、発明の趣旨を逸脱しない範囲において、上述した各種の実施の形態における各構成要素を任意に組み合わせてもよい。 Although various embodiments have been described above with reference to the drawings, it goes without saying that the present disclosure is not limited to such examples. It is clear that a person skilled in the art can come up with various modifications, modifications, substitutions, additions, deletions, and even examples within the scope of the claims. It is naturally understood that it belongs to the technical scope of the present disclosure. Further, each component in the various embodiments described above may be arbitrarily combined as long as the gist of the invention is not deviated.
 なお、本出願は、2020年12月28日出願の日本特許出願(特願2020-219409)に基づくものであり、その内容は本出願の中に参照として援用される。 Note that this application is based on a Japanese patent application filed on December 28, 2020 (Japanese Patent Application No. 2020-219409), the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
 本開示は、単純な機構を用いて製造設備との間で部品収納体を自動で補給および回収できる物品搬送装置として有用である。 This disclosure is useful as an article transporting device that can automatically replenish and collect parts storage bodies with manufacturing equipment using a simple mechanism.
29 トレイ部品ストック装置(製造設備)
39 パレット(物品)
41 マガジン(物品収納体)
115 ドッキングベース
117 一方のコネクタ
209 物品搬送装置
215 車輪
217 ベース部
223 マガジン収納ラック(収納ラック)
225 第1のマガジン保持テーブル(保持テーブル)
227 第2のマガジン保持テーブル(保持テーブル)
229 ラック昇降装置
269 ドッキング部
271 Xガイド(アライメント部材)
273 位置決めピンガイド穴(アライメント部材)
277 Xガイドローラ(被アライメント部材)
279 位置決めピン(被アライメント部材)
281 ドッキング保持部
285 フック(被保持部材)
287 他方のコネクタ
289 コネクタ位置調整機構
291 昇降部材
295 カムフォロア(アライメント部材)
307 Xガイドアーム(被アライメント部材)
367 スライドロック部
29 Tray parts stock equipment (manufacturing equipment)
39 pallets (articles)
41 Magazine (goods storage)
115 Docking base 117 One connector 209 Goods transfer device 215 Wheel 217 Base part 223 Magazine storage rack (storage rack)
225 First magazine holding table (holding table)
227 Second magazine holding table (holding table)
229 Rack lifting device 269 Docking part 271 X guide (alignment member)
273 Positioning pin guide hole (alignment member)
277 X guide roller (aligned member)
279 Positioning pin (aligned member)
281 Docking holding part 285 Hook (held member)
287 Other connector 289 Connector position adjustment mechanism 291 Lifting member 295 Cam follower (alignment member)
307 X guide arm (aligned member)
367 slide lock part

Claims (9)

  1.  工場フロアに設置された少なくとも一つの製造設備で使用する物品を工場フロア上で搬送する物品搬送装置であって、
     少なくとも一つの物品を収納する物品収納体と、
     前記工場フロアを走行するための車輪を有するベース部と、
     前記ベース部に対して昇降可能であり、前記物品収納体を保持する保持テーブルを少なくとも一つ有し、前記保持テーブルの横方向から前記物品収納体を出し入れ可能な開口を有する収納ラックと、
     前記収納ラックを昇降させるラック昇降装置と、を備える、
     物品搬送装置。
    An article transport device that transports articles used in at least one manufacturing facility installed on the factory floor on the factory floor.
    An article storage body that stores at least one article,
    A base portion having wheels for traveling on the factory floor, and
    A storage rack that can be raised and lowered with respect to the base portion, has at least one holding table for holding the article storage body, and has an opening that allows the article storage body to be taken in and out from the lateral direction of the holding table.
    A rack elevating device for elevating and lowering the storage rack.
    Goods transfer device.
  2.  前記ベース部は、前記ベース部が第1の方向へ移動して前記製造設備に接近することによって前記製造設備が有するドッキングベースにドッキングするドッキング部、をさらに有する、
     請求項1に記載の物品搬送装置。
    The base portion further includes a docking portion that docks to the docking base of the manufacturing equipment by moving the base portion in the first direction and approaching the manufacturing equipment.
    The article transporting device according to claim 1.
  3.  前記ドッキング部は、前記ドッキングベースに設けた少なくとも一つのアライメント部材に接触しながら前記第1の方向へ移動して接近することで前記第1の方向と水平方向に直行する第2の方向における前記ベース部の位置を調整する少なくとも一つの被アライメント部材を有する、
     請求項2に記載の物品搬送装置。
    The docking portion moves in the first direction while contacting at least one alignment member provided on the docking base and approaches the docking portion in a second direction orthogonal to the first direction. It has at least one aligned member that adjusts the position of the base.
    The article transporting device according to claim 2.
  4.  二つの前記被アライメント部材が前記第2の方向に間隔を空けて配置され、
     各々の被アライメント部材は、前記ドッキングベースに前記第2の方向に間隔を空けて設けた二つの前記アライメント部材に個別に接触する、
     請求項3に記載の物品搬送装置。
    The two aligned members are spaced apart from each other in the second direction.
    Each aligned member individually contacts two aligned members provided on the docking base at intervals in the second direction.
    The article transporting device according to claim 3.
  5.  前記ベース部は、前記ドッキングベースに設けたドッキング保持部に保持される被保持部材をさらに有する、
     請求項2に記載の物品搬送装置。
    The base portion further has a held member held by the docking holding portion provided on the docking base.
    The article transporting device according to claim 2.
  6.  前記ドッキング部は、前記ドッキングベースに設けられた一方のコネクタに電気的に接続される通信用または給電用の他方のコネクタを有する、
     請求項2に記載の物品搬送装置。
    The docking section has the other connector for communication or power supply that is electrically connected to one connector provided on the docking base.
    The article transporting device according to claim 2.
  7.  前記ドッキング部は、ドッキングの際の前記他方のコネクタの上下方向の位置を調整するコネクタ位置調整機構、もしくは、前記ドッキングベースに設けられたコネクタ位置調整機構を作動させるアライメント部材を有する、
     請求項6に記載の物品搬送装置。
    The docking portion has a connector position adjusting mechanism for adjusting the vertical position of the other connector at the time of docking, or an alignment member for operating the connector position adjusting mechanism provided on the docking base.
    The article transporting device according to claim 6.
  8.  前記ドッキング部は、前記コネクタ位置調整機構を有し、
     前記コネクタ位置調整機構は、前記他方のコネクタとともに昇降し、前記製造設備に設けられた前記アライメント部材に接触しながら前記第1の方向へ移動することで前記アライメント部材によって高さ位置が調整される昇降部材を有する、
     請求項7に記載の物品搬送装置。
    The docking portion has the connector position adjusting mechanism.
    The connector position adjusting mechanism moves up and down together with the other connector and moves in the first direction while contacting the alignment member provided in the manufacturing equipment, whereby the height position is adjusted by the alignment member. Has an elevating member,
    The article transporting device according to claim 7.
  9.  前記保持テーブルは、前記収納ラックに対して横方向へスライド自在に装着され、
     前記収納ラックに、前記保持テーブルのスライドを阻止するスライドロック部が設けられる、
     請求項1に記載の物品搬送装置。
    The holding table is slidably mounted laterally with respect to the storage rack.
    The storage rack is provided with a slide lock portion that prevents the holding table from sliding.
    The article transporting device according to claim 1.
PCT/JP2021/047641 2020-12-28 2021-12-22 Article conveyor WO2022145317A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2022573028A JPWO2022145317A1 (en) 2020-12-28 2021-12-22
CN202180087863.5A CN116602067A (en) 2020-12-28 2021-12-22 Article conveying device

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2020219409 2020-12-28
JP2020-219409 2020-12-28

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022145317A1 true WO2022145317A1 (en) 2022-07-07

Family

ID=82260686

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2021/047641 WO2022145317A1 (en) 2020-12-28 2021-12-22 Article conveyor

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2022145317A1 (en)
CN (1) CN116602067A (en)
WO (1) WO2022145317A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2003258493A (en) * 2001-12-28 2003-09-12 Fuji Mach Mfg Co Ltd Electric component feeding method, and electric component mounting system
JP2006086483A (en) * 2004-09-17 2006-03-30 Fuji Mach Mfg Co Ltd Tray component supplying device and component supplying system
JP2010067679A (en) * 2008-09-09 2010-03-25 Panasonic Corp Apparatus for mounting electronic component and carriage for replacing parts feeder
JP2012146714A (en) * 2011-01-07 2012-08-02 Fuji Mach Mfg Co Ltd Component mounting device

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2003258493A (en) * 2001-12-28 2003-09-12 Fuji Mach Mfg Co Ltd Electric component feeding method, and electric component mounting system
JP2006086483A (en) * 2004-09-17 2006-03-30 Fuji Mach Mfg Co Ltd Tray component supplying device and component supplying system
JP2010067679A (en) * 2008-09-09 2010-03-25 Panasonic Corp Apparatus for mounting electronic component and carriage for replacing parts feeder
JP2012146714A (en) * 2011-01-07 2012-08-02 Fuji Mach Mfg Co Ltd Component mounting device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN116602067A (en) 2023-08-15
JPWO2022145317A1 (en) 2022-07-07

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP2022104295A (en) Article transfer system
CN102656965B (en) Component supplying apparatus and surface mounting apparatus
CN103359463B (en) Supply unit and feedway
US20180242482A1 (en) Separate installation-type reel holding device
US20170066141A1 (en) Component mounting apparatus
KR102400594B1 (en) Feeding device and robot system having same
US8926255B2 (en) Component transfer apparatus and method
KR20130129115A (en) Component supplying device, component mounting device and component supplying method
JP2022104293A (en) Article transport system
KR100341495B1 (en) Tray conveying apparatus and method
WO2022145317A1 (en) Article conveyor
JPWO2016208069A1 (en) Component mounter
KR101604044B1 (en) Tray Feeder Having a Structure of Multi-Stackers
JP2022104294A (en) Article transport device
WO2022019283A1 (en) Component mounting device and pallet conveying device
JP7130826B2 (en) loading assembly
WO2022145442A1 (en) Component stock device and component mount system
JP2642075B2 (en) Self-propelled board exchange robot
JP2022104292A (en) Component stock device and component mounting system
CN111094157A (en) Conveying system
CN217753941U (en) Bearing device and processing system
WO2021144865A1 (en) Component supply unit storage and retrieval system
CN213263070U (en) Conveying mechanism and sheet arranging machine
JP4236851B2 (en) Electronic circuit component supply system
CN118679109A (en) Tray conveying device, transfer system, control device, control method, storage medium, and program

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21915177

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2022573028

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 202180087863.5

Country of ref document: CN

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21915177

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1